WEST COAST FOREST HEALTH MONITORING FIELD GUIDE FY2000

WEST COAST

FOREST HEALTH MONITORING

FIELD GUIDE

FY2000

April 2000

Table of Contents

0 – 8 NATIONAL CORE FIELD GUIDE Version 1.4

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................................................... 1

FIELD GUIDE LAYOUT .............................................................................................................................. 1

UNITS OF MEASURE................................................................................................................................. 2

0.0

GENERAL DESCRIPTION .............................................................................................................. 3

0.1

PLOT SETUP ............................................................................................................................... 4

0.2

PLOT INTEGRITY ........................................................................................................................ 4

1.0

PLOT LEVEL DATA ......................................................................................................................... 7

1.1

STATE....................................................................................................................................... 7

1.2

COUNTY ................................................................................................................................... 7

1.3

PLOT NUMBER ........................................................................................................................ 7

1.4

SAMPLE KIND .......................................................................................................................... 7

1.5

MANUAL VERSION .................................................................................................................. 7

1.6

CURRENT DATE ...................................................................................................................... 8

1.6.1

YEAR ................................................................................................................................. 8

1.6.2

MONTH.............................................................................................................................. 8

1.6.3

DAY.................................................................................................................................... 8

1.7

DECLINATION (CORE OPTIONAL)......................................................................................... 8

1.8

TRAILS OR ROADS ............................................................................................................... 13

1.9

HORIZONTAL DISTANCE TO IMPROVED ROAD................................................................ 13

1.10

ROAD ACCESS .................................................................................................................. 13

1.11

PUBLIC USE RESTRICTIONS ........................................................................................... 14

1.12

RECREATION USE 1 ......................................................................................................... 14

1.13

RECREATION USE 2 ......................................................................................................... 14

1.14

RECREATION USE 3 ......................................................................................................... 15

1.15

WATER ON PLOT............................................................................................................... 15

1.16

QA STATUS (CORE OPTIONAL) ....................................................................................... 15

1.17

CREW TYPE (CORE OPTIONAL) ...................................................................................... 15

1.18

GPS COORDINATES ......................................................................................................... 16

1.18.1

GPS UNIT SETTINGS, DATUM, and COORDINATE SYSTEM ................................. 16

1.18.2

COLLECTING READINGS .......................................................................................... 16

1.18.3

GPS UNIT .................................................................................................................... 16

1.18.4

GPS SERIAL NUMBER ............................................................................................... 17

1.18.5

COORDINATE SYSTEM ............................................................................................. 17

1.18.6

LATITUDE.................................................................................................................... 17

1.18.7

LONGITUDE ................................................................................................................ 17

1.18.8

UTM ZONE................................................................................................................... 17

1.18.9

EASTING (X) UTM....................................................................................................... 17

1.18.10

NORTHING (Y) UTM ................................................................................................. 18

1.18.11

CORRECTION FOR "OFFSET" LOCATION ............................................................... 18

1.18.12

AZIMUTH TO PLOT CENTER................................................................................... 18

1.18.13

DISTANCE TO PLOT CENTER................................................................................. 18

1.18.14

GPS ELEVATION ........................................................................................................ 18

1.18.15

GPS ERROR................................................................................................................ 19

1.18.16

NUMBER OF READINGS............................................................................................ 19

1.19

PLOT-LEVEL NOTES ......................................................................................................... 19

West Coast Forest Health Monitoring Field Guide

April 2000

1.20

P3 HEXAGON NUMBER .................................................................................................... 19

1.21

P3 PLOT NUMBER ............................................................................................................. 19

2.0

CONDITION CLASS ...................................................................................................................... 20

2.1

DETERMINATION OF CONDITION CLASS ............................................................................. 20

2.1.1

Step 1: Delineate the plot area by CONDITION STATUS ................................................. 20

2.1.2

Step 2: Further subdivide Accessible Forest Land by 6 mapping variables ...................... 20

2.2

CONDITION CLASS ATTRIBUTES ........................................................................................... 21

2.2.1

CONDITION CLASS NUMBER........................................................................................... 21

2.2.2

CONDITION STATUS ......................................................................................................... 22

2.3

DETERMINING CONDITION CLASSES DIFFERING IN CONDITION STATUS: .................... 22

2.3.1

ACCESIBLE FOREST LAND .............................................................................................. 25

2.3.2

NONFOREST LAND ........................................................................................................... 27

2.3.3

NONCENSUS WATER ....................................................................................................... 27

2.3.4

CENSUS WATER................................................................................................................ 27

2.3.5

DENIED ACCESS ............................................................................................................... 27

2.3.6

HAZARDOUS ...................................................................................................................... 27

2.3.7

NOT IN THE SAMPLE......................................................................................................... 28

2.4

DETERMINING CONDITION CLASSES WITHIN ACCESSIBLE FOREST LAND: .................. 28

2.4.1

RESERVED STATUS.......................................................................................................... 29

2.4.2

OWNER GROUP................................................................................................................. 29

2.4.3

FOREST TYPE.................................................................................................................... 30

2.4.4

STAND SIZE CLASS........................................................................................................... 30

2.4.5

REGENERATION STATUS ................................................................................................ 31

2.4.6

TREE DENSITY .................................................................................................................. 32

2.4.7

OWNER CLASS .................................................................................................................. 33

2.4.8

PRIVATE OWNER INDUSTRIAL STATUS ........................................................................ 33

2.4.9

ARITFICIAL REGENERATION SPECIES .......................................................................... 34

2.4.10

STAND AGE .................................................................................................................... 34

2.4.11

DISTURBANCE 1 ............................................................................................................ 35

2.4.12

DISTURBANCE YEAR 1 ................................................................................................. 36

2.4.13

DISTURBANCE 2 ............................................................................................................ 36

2.4.14


2.4.15

DISTURBANCE 3 ............................................................................................................ 36

2.4.16


2.4.17

TREATMENT 1 ................................................................................................................ 36

2.4.18

TREATMENT YEAR 1 ..................................................................................................... 37

2.4.19

TREATMENT 2 ................................................................................................................ 37

2.4.20

TREATMENT YEAR 2 ..................................................................................................... 37

2.4.21

TREATMENT 3 ................................................................................................................ 37

2.4.22

TREATMENT YEAR 3 ..................................................................................................... 37

2.4.23

PHYSIOGRAPHIC CLASS .............................................................................................. 37

2.4.24

PAST NONFOREST / INACCESSIBLE LAND USE ....................................................... 39

2.4.25

PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE ............................................................................. 40

2.4.26

NONFOREST YEAR ....................................................................................................... 40

3.0

BOUNDARY REFERENCES ......................................................................................................... 43

3.1

REFERENCE PROCEDURE ..................................................................................................... 43

3.2

BOUNDARY DATA..................................................................................................................... 45

3.2.1

SUBPLOT NUMBER ........................................................................................................... 45

3.2.2

PLOT TYPE......................................................................................................................... 45

3.2.3

BOUNDARY CHANGE........................................................................................................ 45

3.2.4

CONTRASTING CONDITION ............................................................................................. 46

3.2.5

LEFT AZIMUTH................................................................................................................... 46

3.2.6

CORNER AZIMUTH............................................................................................................ 46

3.2.7

CORNER DISTANCE.......................................................................................................... 46 iv


April 2000

3.2.8

RIGHT AZIMUTH ................................................................................................................ 46

4.0

SUBPLOT INFORMATION ............................................................................................................ 47

4.1

SUBPLOT NUMBER............................................................................................................... 47

4.2

SUBPLOT CENTER CONDITION .......................................................................................... 47

4.3

MICROPLOT CENTER CONDITION...................................................................................... 47

4.4

SUBPLOT SLOPE .................................................................................................................. 47

4.5

SUBPLOT ASPECT ................................................................................................................ 48

4.6

SNOW/WATER DEPTH.......................................................................................................... 48

4.7

SUBPLOT/ANNULAR PLOT STATUS ................................................................................... 48

4.8

SUBPLOT/ANNULAR PLOT CONDITION LIST (CORE OPTIONAL) ................................... 49

5.0

TREE AND SAPLING DATA.......................................................................................................... 51

5.1

SUBPLOT NUMBER............................................................................................................... 51

5.2

TREE RECORD NUMBER ..................................................................................................... 52

5.3

CONDITION CLASS ............................................................................................................... 52

5.4

AZIMUTH ................................................................................................................................ 53

5.5

HORIZONTAL DISTANCE...................................................................................................... 53

5.6

TREE STATUS ....................................................................................................................... 54

5.7

LEAN ANGLE.......................................................................................................................... 54

5.8

SPECIES................................................................................................................................. 55

5.9

DIAMETER.............................................................................................................................. 55

5.9.1

DIAMETER AT BREAST HEIGHT (DBH) ....................................................................... 56

5.9.2

DIAMETER AT ROOT COLLAR (DRC) .......................................................................... 58

5.10

DIAMETER CHECK ............................................................................................................ 61

5.11

PERCENT ROTTEN/MISSING CULL................................................................................. 61

5.12

TOTAL LENGTH ................................................................................................................. 62

5.14

LENGTH METHOD ............................................................................................................. 63

5.15

CROWN CLASS.................................................................................................................. 63

5.16

UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN RATIO (P2 – CORE OPTIONAL, P3 – CORE).............. 64

5.17

COMPACTED CROWN RATIO .......................................................................................... 64

5.18

TREE DAMAGE .................................................................................................................. 64

5.18.1

DAMAGE LOCATION 1 ............................................................................................... 65

5.18.2

DAMAGE TYPE 1 ........................................................................................................ 67

5.18.3

DAMAGE SEVERITY 1................................................................................................ 70

5.18.4

DAMAGE LOCATION 2 ............................................................................................... 83

5.18.5

DAMAGE TYPE 2 ........................................................................................................ 83

5.18.6

DAMAGE SEVERITY 2................................................................................................ 83

5.19

CAUSE OF DEATH ............................................................................................................. 83

5.20

MORTALITY YEAR ............................................................................................................. 84

5.21

DECAY CLASS ................................................................................................................... 84

5.22

UTILIZATION CLASS.......................................................................................................... 85

5.23

LENGTH TO DIAMETER MEASUREMENT POINT(CORE OPTIONAL)........................... 85

5.24

PERCENT ROUGH CULL (CORE OPTIONAL) ................................................................. 85

5.25

MISTLETOE CLASS (CORE OPTIONAL) .......................................................................... 85

5.26

TREE NOTES...................................................................................................................... 86

6.0

SEEDLING DATA .......................................................................................................................... 87

6.1

SUBPLOT NUMBER............................................................................................................... 87

6.2

SPECIES................................................................................................................................. 87

6.3

CONDITION CLASS ............................................................................................................... 87

6.4

SEEDLING COUNT ................................................................................................................ 87

7.0

SITE TREE INFORMATION .......................................................................................................... 89

7.1

SITE TREE SELECTION............................................................................................................ 89

7.2

SITE TREE DATA VARIABLES ................................................................................................. 89 v


April 2000

7.2.1

CONDITION CLASS LIST................................................................................................... 89

7.2.2

SPECIES ............................................................................................................................. 89

7.2.3

DIAMETER .......................................................................................................................... 89

7.2.4

SITE TREE LENGTH .......................................................................................................... 89

7.2.5

TREE AGE AT DIAMETER ................................................................................................. 90

7.2.6

SITE TREE NOTES............................................................................................................. 90

8.0

NONFOREST/DENIED ACCESS/HAZARDOUS PLOTS ............................................................. 91

8.1

OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................................ 91

8.2

PROCEDURE............................................................................................................................. 91

8.3

DATA RECORDED .................................................................................................................... 91

8.3.1

STATE ................................................................................................................................. 91

8.3.2

COUNTY ............................................................................................................................. 91

8.3.3

PLOT NUMBER................................................................................................................... 91

8.3.4

SAMPLE KIND .................................................................................................................... 92

8.3.6

CURRENT DATE ................................................................................................................ 92

8.3.7

GPS COORDINATES ......................................................................................................... 92

8.3.8

CONDITION STATUS 1 ...................................................................................................... 92

8.3.9

CONDITION STATUS 2 (CORE OPTIONAL)..................................................................... 92

8.3.10

CONDITION STATUS 3 (CORE OPTIONAL) ................................................................. 93

8.3.11

CONDITION STATUS 4 (CORE OPTIONAL) ................................................................. 93

8.3.13

P3 HEXAGON NUMBER................................................................................................. 93

8.3.14

P3 PLOT NUMBER ......................................................................................................... 93

9 FOREST HEALTH MONITORING OZONE INDICATOR

9.0 QUICK REFERENCE PDR SCREENS .............................................................................................. 95

9.1 OVERVIEW........................................................................................................................................ 98

9.1.1 SCOPE AND APPLICATION ...................................................................................................... 98

9.1.2 SUMMARY OF METHOD ........................................................................................................... 99

9.1.3 INTERFERENCES ...................................................................................................................... 99

9.1.4 SUMMARY OF TALLY PROCEDURES, DEFINITIONS, AND CODES..................................... 99

9.2 SAMPLE COLLECTION, PRESERVATION, AND STORAGE........................................................ 102

9.3 EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES ........................................................................................................ 102

9.4 CALIBRATION AND STANDARDIZATION ..................................................................................... 103

9.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................................................. 103

9.5.1 TRAINING ................................................................................................................................. 103

9.5.2 FIELD AUDITS / REMEASUREMENTS ................................................................................... 103

9.5.3 VOUCHER SPECIMENS .......................................................................................................... 103

9.5.4 MEASUREMENT QUALITY OBJECTIVES .............................................................................. 104

9.5.5 METHOD PERFORMANCE...................................................................................................... 104

9.5.6 COMMUNICATIONS................................................................................................................. 104

9.6 PROCEDURE .................................................................................................................................. 105

9.6.1 SITE SELECTION ON PLOT .................................................................................................... 106

9.6.1.1 NEW PLOTS........................................................................................................................ 108

9.6.1.2 ESTABLISHED PLOTS ...................................................................................................... 109

9.6.2 SPECIES SELECTION ............................................................................................................. 109

9.6.3 PLANT SELECTION ................................................................................................................. 111

9.6.4 SYMPTOM IDENTIFICATION AND SCORING ........................................................................ 113 vi


April 2000

9.6.5 COLLECTION OF LEAF SAMPLES ......................................................................................... 115

9.6.5.1 FIELD COLLECTION.......................................................................................................... 115

9.6.5.2 DATA COLLECTION .......................................................................................................... 115

9.6.5.3 MAILING PROCEDURE..................................................................................................... 117

9.6.6 CREW MEMBER RESPONSIBILITIES .................................................................................... 117

9.6.7 SITE SELECTION OFF-PLOT .................................................................................................. 117

9.7 REFERENCES................................................................................................................................. 119

9.8 ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS ................................................................................................................ 120

Appendix 9.A Key Identifying Characteristics of the Ozone Bioindicator Species ................................ 121

Appendix 9.B Data Sheets..................................................................................................................... 123

10 FOREST HEALTH MONITORING LICHEN INDICATOR

10.1 OVERVIEW.................................................................................................................................... 129

10.1.1 SCOPE AND APPLICATION .................................................................................................. 129

10.1.2 SUMMARY OF METHOD ....................................................................................................... 129

10.1.3 INTERFERENCES .................................................................................................................. 130

10.1.4 SAFETY................................................................................................................................... 130

10.2 SAMPLE COLLECTION, PRESERVATION, AND STORAGE...................................................... 130

10.2.1 PROCEDURE ......................................................................................................................... 130

10.2.2 SAMPLE PROCUREMENT (NOTE PORTABLE DATA RECORDER NOT USED) .............. 132

10.2.3 SAMPLE MAILING .................................................................................................................. 134

10.3 EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES ...................................................................................................... 135

10.3.1 EQUIPMENT AND APPARATUS ........................................................................................... 135

10.3.2 CONSUMABLE SUPPLIES..................................................................................................... 136

10.4 CALIBRATION AND STANDARDIZATION ................................................................................... 136

10.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ................................................................................................................ 137

10.5.1 MEASUREMENT QUALITY OBJECTIVES (MQOS).............................................................. 137

10.5.2 CERTIFICATION..................................................................................................................... 138

10.5.3 HOT AUDITS........................................................................................................................... 138

10.5.4 REMEASUREMENTS ............................................................................................................. 138

10.5.5 DEBRIEFING........................................................................................................................... 139

10.5.6 METHOD PERFORMANCE.................................................................................................... 139

10.6 REFERENCES............................................................................................................................... 140

11 FOREST HEALTH MONITORING SOIL INDICATOR

11.0 SOIL SAMPLING ............................................................................................................................ 143

11.1 OVERVIEW..................................................................................................................................... 143



11.1.3 INTERFERENCES .................................................................................................................. 144

11.1.4 SAFETY................................................................................................................................... 144

11.1.5 DEFINITIONS AND CODES ................................................................................................... 145 vii


April 2000

11.2 SAMPLE COLLECTION, PRESERVATION AND STORAGE....................................................... 146

11.2.1 SAMPLE PROCUREMENT..................................................................................................... 146

11.2.1.1 NATIONAL HISTORIC PRESERVATION ACT................................................................ 146

11.2.1.2 SOIL SAMPLING .............................................................................................................. 147

11.2.1.3 LABELING OF SOIL SAMPLES....................................................................................... 148

11.2.2 SAMPLE MAILING .................................................................................................................. 149

11.3 EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES ...................................................................................................... 150

11.4 CALIBRATION AND STANDARDIZATION ................................................................................... 150


11.5.1 MEASUREMENT QUALITY OBJECTIVES ............................................................................ 151

11.5.2 TRAINING AND CERTIFICATION.......................................................................................... 151

11.5.3 HOT CHECKS (AUDITS) ........................................................................................................ 152

11.5.4 REMEASUREMENTS ............................................................................................................. 152

11.5.5 DEBRIEFING........................................................................................................................... 152

11.5.6 METHOD PERFORMANCE.................................................................................................... 153

11.6 PROCEDURES.............................................................................................................................. 153

11.6.1 SOIL EROSION AND COMPACTION MEASUREMENTS..................................................... 153

11.6.1.1 SOIL EROSION MEASUREMENTS ................................................................................ 153

11.6.1.2 SOIL COMPACTION MEASUREMENTS......................................................................... 154

11.6.2 SOIL SURFACE MEASUREMENTS AND SAMPLING PROCEDURES ............................... 157

11.6.2.1 LOCATION OF SOIL SAMPLING SITES ......................................................................... 157

11.6.2.2 FOREST FLOOR LAYERS .............................................................................................. 158

11.6.2.3 MINERAL SURFACE LAYERS ........................................................................................ 159

11.6.2.3.1 SOIL PROBE SAMPLING METHOD.......................................................................... 160

11.6.2.3.2 BULK DENSITY SOIL SAMPLING PROCEDURES................................................... 161

11.6.2.4 ORGANIC SOIL SAMPLING ........................................................................................... 163

11.6.3 LABORATORY ANALYSES.................................................................................................... 163

11.7 REFERENCES............................................................................................................................... 164

11.9 EXAMPLE DATA SHEETS ............................................................................................................ 165

11.9 SLOPE LENGTH REFERENCE INFORMATION........................................................................... 168

11.10 SLOPE LENGTH SITUATIONS FOUND IN THE FIELD............................................................. 169

11.11 DETAILED PROCEDURES FOR MEASURING FOREST FLOOR & GROUND COVER DEPTH -

SOIL EROSION MEASUREMENTS....................................................................................................... 170

12 FOREST HEALTH MONITORING CROWN INDICATOR

12.0 CROWN MEASUREMENTS AND SAMPLING .............................................................................. 173

12.1 OVERVIEW..................................................................................................................................... 173



12.1.3 INTERFERENCES .................................................................................................................. 174

12.1.4 SAFETY................................................................................................................................... 174

12.1.5 DEFINITIONS AND CODES ................................................................................................... 174

SAMPLE COLLECTIONS, PRESERVATION AND STORAGE ............................................................. 177 viii


April 2000

EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES ............................................................................................................... 177

CALIBRATION AND STANDARDIZATION ............................................................................................ 178


12.5.1 MEASUREMENT QUALITY OBJECTIVES ............................................................................ 179

12.5.2 DATA QUALITY PROCEDURES............................................................................................ 179

12.5.3 CROWN RATING PRECAUTIONS......................................................................................... 180

12.6 PROCEDURES............................................................................................................................... 182

12.6.1

SAPLING PROCEDURES - LIVE TREES 1 in (2.5 cm) TO 4.9 in (12.6 cm) DBH/DRC . 182

12.6.1.1 LIVE CROWN RATIO ........................................................................................................ 182

12.6.1.2 CROWN LIGHT EXPOSURE ........................................................................................... 184

12.6.1.3 CROWN POSITION.......................................................................................................... 185

12.6.1.4 VIGOR CLASS .................................................................................................................. 186

12.6.2

TREE PROCEDURES - LIVE TREES 5.0 in (12.7 cm) DBH/DRC AND LARGER .......... 187

12.6.2.1 LIVE CROWN RATIO ....................................................................................................... 190

12.6.2.2 CROWN LIGHT EXPOSURE ........................................................................................... 190

12.6.2.3 CROWN POSITION.......................................................................................................... 191

12.6.2.4 CROWN DENSITY ........................................................................................................... 191

12.6.2.5 CROWN DIEBACK ........................................................................................................... 193

12.6.3.6 FOLIAGE TRANSPARENCY ........................................................................................... 195

12.7 REFERENCES................................................................................................................................ 197

APPENDICES

APPENDICES ......................................................................................................................................... 199

Appendix 1. State FIPS Codes........................................................................................................... 201

Appendix 2. U.S. Forest Type Codes................................................................................................. 203

Appendix 3. Invasive Plants / Noxious Weeds Checklist Species ..................................................... 207

Appendix 4. U.S. Tree Species Codes............................................................................................... 209

Appendix 5. Site Tree Selection Criteria and Species List................................................................. 217

Appendix 6. Determination of Stocking Values for Land Use Classification...................................... 221

Appendix 7. Glossary ......................................................................................................................... 227

Appendix 8. Figures – Easy Reference Pages .................................................................................. 233 ix


April 2000

0 – 8 FOREST INVENTORY AND ANALYSIS NATIONAL CORE FIELD GUIDE

FIELD DATA COLLECTION PROCEDURES FOR PHASE 2 PLOTS. VERSION 1.4

Version History:

1.1: March 1999 (first version implemented, Maine, 1999)

1999

1.3: September 1999 (revised from Bangor, ME Data Acquisition Band meeting, Aug 1999)

1.4: February 2000 (revised from Charleston, SC Data Acquisition Band meeting, Dec 1999)

INTRODUCTION

This document describes the standards, codes, methods, and definitions for Forest Inventory and

Analysis (FIA) field data items. The objective is to describe CORE FIA field procedures that will be consistent and uniform across all FIA units. This CORE serves as the framework for regional FIA programs; individual programs may add variables, but may not change the

CORE requirements.

Unless otherwise noted, the items in this manual are considered CORE, that is, the information will be collected by all FIA Units as specified. Items or codes specified as

CORE OPTIONAL are not required by individual units; however, if the item is collected or coded, it will be done so as specified in this manual. It is expected that all items in Volume I can be measured by a two-person field crew in less than a single day, on average, including time spent traveling to and from the plot.

The FIA program is in transition, changing in response to legislation and new customer demands.

One of these demands is for increased consistency, which this manual begins to address.

Another change is the merger of the FIA program with the field plot component of the Forest

Health Monitoring (FHM) program. This will be accomplished by a joint sampling approach where FHM plots become a subset of the larger sample of FIA plots. In this model, plots formerly known as FIA plots will now be called Phase 2 plots; plots formerly known as FHM plots will be called Phase 3 plots.

The focus of Volume I is on data that are collected in the field on all Phase 2 plots in the FIA sample and on mensuration add-ons collected on Phase 3 plots. Volume II of the series will describe an additional expanded suite of data collected on the Phase 3 subsample. Volume II will consist of the FHM field manual, minus data elements already collected on the FIA sample.

Volume III of the series (in preparation) will document the office procedures including data elements measured in the office, data from other sources that are merged into the FIA database, and CORE compilation and analysis algorithms. When complete, the three-volume set will describe all field data measured consistently across the country, comprising the CORE FIA program.

FIELD GUIDE LAYOUT

Each section of the field guide corresponds to one of the following sections:

Description

1 Plot

2 Condition

3 Boundary

4 Subplot

Measurements

6 Seedling

1


April 2000

8 Nonforest/Denied Access/Hazardous Plots

Each section begins with some general overview of the data elements collected at that level, along with whatever technical background is necessary to prepare the field crews for data collection. Descriptions of data elements follow, in the following format:

DATA ELEMENT NAME -- <brief variable description>

When collected: <when data element is recorded>

Field width: <X digits>

MQO: <measurement quality objective>

Values: <legal values for coded variables>

Data elements and descriptions of when to collect, field width, MQOs, and values, apply to both

Phase 2 plots (formerly called FIA plots) and Phase 3 plots (formerly called FHM plots) unless specifically noted.

Field width designates the number of columns (or spaces) needed to properly record the data element. MQO describes the acceptable tolerance for each data element. MQOs consist of two parts: a statement of the tolerance and a percentage of time when the collected data are required to be within tolerance.

Tolerances may be stated in +/- terms or a number of classes for ordered categorical data elements (e.g., +/- 2 classes); in absolute terms for some continuous variables (e.g., +/- 0.2 inches); or in terms of percent of the value of the data element (e.g., +/- 10% of the value). For some data elements, no errors are tolerated (e.g., PLOT NUMBER).

Percentage of time within tolerance is generally expressed as "at least X percent of the time," meaning that crews are expected to be within tolerance at least X percent of the time.

UNITS OF MEASURE

The field guide will use ENGLISH units as the measurement system.

Plot Dimensions:

Annular plot - for sample intensification or sampling relatively rare events.

Radius = 58.9 ft

Area = 10,890 sq. ft or 0.25 ac or 1/4 ac

Subplot - for selecting trees with diameter > 5.0 in

Radius = 24.0 ft

Area = 1,809.56 sq. ft or approximately 0.04 ac or approximately 1/24 ac

Microplot - for counting seedlings and selecting saplings

Radius = 6.8 ft

Area = 145.27 sq. ft or approximately 0.003 ac or approximately 1/300 ac

The distance between subplots is 120.0 ft horizontal.

The minimum area needed to qualify as accessible forest land is 1.0 ac.

The minimum width to qualify as accessible forest land is 120.0 ft

2


April 2000

Tree Limiting Dimensions: breast height stump height merchantable top minimum conifer seedling length minimum hardwood seedling length seedling/sapling DBH/DRC break sapling/tree DBH/DRC break

4.5 ft

1.0 ft

4.0 in

6.0 in

12.0 in

1.0 in

5.0 in

0.0 GENERAL

The CORE field plot consists of four subplots approximately 1/24 ac in size with a radius of 24.0 ft. The center subplot is subplot 1. Subplots 2, 3, and 4 are located 120.0 ft horizontal at azimuths of 360, 120, and 240 degrees, respectively from the center of subplot 1. See Figure 1.

Subplots are used to collect data on trees with a diameter (at breast height "DBH", or at root collar "DRC") of 5.0 in or greater. Throughout this manual, use of the word 'plot' refers to the entire set of four subplots. “Plot center” is defined as the center of subplot 1.

Each subplot contains a microplot of approximately 1/300 ac in size with a radius of 6.8 ft. The center of the microplot is offset 90 degrees and 12.0 ft horizontal from each subplot center.

Microplots are numbered in the same way as subplots. Microplots are used to select and collect data on saplings (DBH/DRC of 1.0 in to 4.9 in) and seedlings (DBH/DRC less than 1.0 inch in diameter and greater than 6 inches in length (conifers) or greater than 12 inches in length

(hardwoods)).

As a CORE OPTION , the field plot may also include annular plots of 1/4 ac in size with radius of

58.9 ft with the annular plot center coinciding with each subplot center. Annular plots are numbered in the same way as subplots. Annular plots may be used to select and collect additional data for regional enhancements. For example, annular plots may be used to provide a better sample of rare population elements such as very large trees.

Data are collected on field plots at the following levels:

Plot Data that describe the entire cluster of four subplots.

Subplot Data that describe a single subplot of a cluster.

Condition Class A discrete combination of landscape attributes that describe the environment on all or part of the plot. These attributes include

CONDITION STATUS, RESERVED STATUS, OWNER GROUP,

FOREST TYPE, STAND SIZE CLASS, REGENERATION STATUS, and

TREE DENSITY.

Boundary An approximate description of the demarcation line between two condition classes that occur on a single subplot, microplot, or annular plot. There is no boundary recorded when the demarcation occurs beyond the fixed radius plots.

Tree Data describing saplings with a diameter 1.0 in to 4.9 in, and trees with diameter > 5.0 in

Seedling Data describing trees with a diameter < 1.0 inch and > 6.0 inches in length (conifers) or > 12.0 inches in length (hardwoods).

Site Tree Data describing site index trees.

3


April 2000

SETUP

Plots will be established according to the regional guidelines of each FIA program. In cases where the plot center cannot be occupied due to safety hazards, lack of access, or when the plot center is out of the sample, but some of the subplots can be occupied and are in the sample, those subplots which can be established should be established and sampled according to normal procedures. In cases where a subplot or microplot center cannot be occupied, no data will be collected from that subplot or microplot; instead, the entire subplot or microplot should be classified according to the condition preventing occupancy.

The table provided below can assist in locating subplot 2-4 from a subplot other than subplot 1.

Subplot Numbers Azimuth Backsight Distance

From To

degrees feet

2 3 150 330 207.8

2 4 210 030 207.8

3 4 270 090 207.8

Figure 1. FIA plot diagram.

INTEGRITY

4


April 2000

Each FIA program is responsible for minimizing damage to current or prospective sample trees and for specifying how these trees are monumented for remeasurement. The following field procedures are permitted:

• Scribing and nailing tags on witness trees so that subplot centers can be relocated.

• Boring of trees for age on subplots and annular plots to determine tree age, site index, stand age, or for other reasons.

• Nailing and tagging of trees on microplots, subplots, and annular plots so that these trees can be identified and relocated efficiently and positively at times of remeasurement.

• Nailing, scribing, or painting microplot, subplot, and annular plot trees so that the point of diameter measurement can be accurately relocated and remeasured.

All other potentially damaging procedures that may erode plot integrity are prohibited.

The following practices are specifically prohibited:

• Boring and scribing of some specific tree species, such as quaking aspen, that are known to be negatively affected (i.e., the initiation of infection or callusing).

• Chopping vines from tally trees. When possible, vines should be pried off trunks to enable accurate measure. If this is not possible, alternative tools (calipers, biltmore sticks) should be used.

5


April 2000

1.0 PLOT LEVEL DATA

In general, plot level data apply to the entire plot. They are recorded from the center of subplot 1.

If subplot 1 is not established, record from the lowest numbered subplot which is established.

1.1 STATE

Record the unique FIPS (Federal Information Processing Standard) code identifying the State where the plot center is located.

When collected: All plots

Field width: 2 digits

MQO: No errors, 100% of the time

Values: See Appendix 1

1.2 COUNTY

Record the unique FIPS (Federal Information Processing Standard) code identifying the county

(or unit in AK) where the plot center is located.





1.3 PLOT

Record the identification number for each plot, unique within a county (survey unit in AK).




Values: 0001 to 9999

Record the code that describes the kind of plot being installed.


Field width: 1 digit


Values:

1 Initial plot establishment - field-visited or remotely classified.

2 Remeasurement of a previously established National design plot - field visited or remotely classified.

3 Replacement plot - a previously established National design plot that was replaced with a new plot because the original plot could not be relocated or because plot data were lost.

VERSION

Record the version number of the National Core Field Guide that was used to collect the data on this plot. This will be used to match collected data to the proper version of the field manual.

7


April 2000


Field width: 2 digits (x.y)


Values: 1.1 (Maine 1999) and higher

Record the year, month, and day that the current plot visit occurred as follows:

1.6.1 YEAR

Record the year that the plot visit occurred.




Values: Beginning with 1998, constant for a given year

1.6.2 MONTH

Record the month that the plot visit occurred.




Values:

January 01 May

February 02 June

March 03 July

05 September 09

06 October 10

07 November 11

04 August 08 December 12 April

1.6.3 DAY

Record the day of the month that the plot visit occurred.




Values: 01 to 31

1.7 DECLINATION (CORE OPTIONAL)

Record the azimuth correction used to adjust magnetic north to true north. All azimuths are assumed to be magnetic azimuths unless otherwise designated. The PNW FIA units have historically corrected all compass readings for true north. This field is to be used only in cases where units are adjusting azimuths to correspond to true north; for units using magnetic azimuths, this field will always be set = 0 in the office. This field carries a decimal place because the USGS corrections are provided to the nearest half degree. DECLINATION is defined as:

DECLINATION = (TRUE NORTH - MAGNETIC NORTH)

When collected: CORE OPTIONAL: All plots

Field width: 5 digits including sign. (+xxx.y)


8


April 2000

Values: -359.0 to 359.0

1.7 Cont.

CODE

41 Oregon

Western Oregon

CODE COUNTY Declination Degrees-east

003 Benton

005 Clackamas

007 Clatsop

1/2

21

009 Columbia

Oil Coos

21

1/2

015 Curry

019 Douglas

1/2

1/2

20 1/2 027 Hood River

029 Jackson

033 Josephine

039 Lane 20

041 Lincoln

043 Linn

047 Marion

1/2

20

051 Multnomah

053 Polk

1/2

1/2

057 Tillamook

067 Washington

071 Yamhill

Eastern Oregon

CODE COUNTY

001 Baker

013 Crook

Declination Degrees-east

19

017 Deschutes

021 Gilliam

20

20

023 Grant

025 Harney

1/2

19

031 Jefferson

035 Klamath

20

19

037 Lake

045 Malheur

19

1/2

049 Morrow

059 Umatilla

20

055 Sherman

20

061 Union 1/2

063 Wallowa

065 Wasco

069 Wheeler

1/2

20

9


April 2000

STATE

Washington

Western Washington

CODE COUNTY Declination degrees-east

009 Clallam

011 Clark

015 Cowlitz

027 Grays

18

Harbor

029 Island 19

031 Jefferson 19

033 King

035 Kitsap 19

041 Lewis

045 Mason

049 Pacific

053 Pierce

19

055 San Juan

057 Skagit

059 Skamania

19 1/2

18

067 Thurston

19

1/2

1/2

073 Whatcom

Eastern Washington

CODE COUNTY Declination Degrees-east

001 Adams

003 Asotin

005 Benton

21

20

007 Chelan

013 Columbia 20

017 Douglas

019 Ferry

21

1/2

021 Franklin

023 Garfield

025 Grant

20

21

037 Kittitas

039 Klickitat

043 Linclon

20

21

22

051 Pend Oreille

063 Spokane

065 Stevens

21 1/2

21

071 Walla Walla

075 Whitman

077 Yakima

21 1/2

20

10


April 2000

Item 1--County. This 3-digit code. printed/downlonded by the computer, identiries the county the condition class Is in. The county codes are listed below, along with the declinations to be used In the counties, and the reporting unit in which the county lies--(NC) North Coast, (NI) North Interior. (SA) Sacramento.

(CC) Central Coast, (SJ) San Joaquin, and (SO) SOuthern.

CODE COUNTY DECL FAST UNIT

001 Alameda

003 Alpine

16

16

CC

SJ

005 Amador

007 Butte

019 Fresno

021 Glenn

027 Inyo

029 Kern

031 Kings

16

17

009 Caleveras 16

011 Colusa 17

013 Contra Costa 16

015 Del Norte 18

017 El Dorado 16

15

17

023 Humboldt 18

025 Imperial 13

15

15

15

SJ

SA

S3

SA

CC

NC

SA

SJ

SA

NC

SO

SO

SJ

SJ

033 Lake

035 Lassen

17

17

037 Los Angeles 14

039 Madera 16

041 Marin

043 Mariposa

16

16

045 Mendocino 17

047 Merced

049 Modoc

051 Mono

053 Monterey

055 Napa

057 Nevada

059 Orange

16

18

16

16

17

17

14

061 Placer

063 Plumas

17

17

065 Riverside 14

067 Sacramento 16

069 San Benito 16

071 San Bernardino 14

073 San Diego 14

075 San Francisco 16

077 San Joaquin 16

079 San Luis Obispo 15

081 San Mateo 16

083 Santa Barbara 15

085 Santa Clara 15

087 Santa Cruz

089 Shasta

16

17

091 Sierra

093 Siskiyou

17

18

SA

NI

SO

SJ

CC

SJ

NC

SJ

NI

SJ

CC

SA

SA

SO

SA

SA

SO

SA

CC

SO

SO

CC

S3

CC

CC

CC

CC

CC

NI

SA

NI

11

095 Solano

097 Sonoma

099 Stanislaus

101 Sutter

103 Tehama

107 Tulare

105 Trinity

109 Tuolumne

111 Ventura

113 Yolo

115 Yuba

16

17

16

16

17

15

18

16

15

17

17

CC

NC

SJ

SA

SA

SJ

NI

SJ

CC

SA

SA


April 2000

12


April 2000

1.8 TRAILS OR ROADS

Record the nearest trail or road to the plot. Use the plot photo, maps, or reasonable observations made while traveling to the plot to determine nearest trail or road (within 1 mile straight-line distance of the plot center). If two or more trails or roads are estimated to be equally distant, code the higher quality trail or road (lower code number). Base the coding decision on the condition of the road at the time of the visit.

When collected: All plots with at least one accessible forest land condition class


MQO: No errors, at least 90% of the time

Values:

0

1

2

None within 1 mile

Paved road or highway

Improved gravel road (has gravel, ditching, and/or other improvements)

3

4

5

Improved dirt road (has ditching, culverts, signs, reflectors, or other improvements)

Unimproved dirt road/four-wheel drive road (has no signs of any improvements)

Human access trail- clearly noticeable and primarily for recreational use

1.9 HORIZONTAL DISTANCE TO IMPROVED ROAD

Record the straight-line distance from plot center (subplot 1) to the nearest improved road. An improved road (TRAILS OR ROADS = 1, 2, or 3) is a road of any width that is maintained as evidenced by pavement, gravel, grading, ditching, and/or other improvements.




Values:

1 100 ft or less

2 101 to 300 ft

3 301 to 500 ft

4 501 to 1000 ft

5 1001 ft to 1/2 mile

6 1/2 to 1 mile

7 1 to 3 miles

8 3 to 5 miles

9 Greater than 5 miles

1.10 ROAD

Record the first road access restrictions encountered while traveling to the plot. These restrictions limit car and truck access to the starting point for the walk to the plot, and may occur on ownerships encountered before reaching the plot area.




Values:

0

1

2

3

None – no road access restrictions

Road blocked by locked gate or cable across road

Road blocked by a human-made obstruction across road (ditch, mound, etc.)

Road blocked by natural occurrences (trees blown over onto road, road or bridge washed out)

13


April 2000

4 Posted no motorized vehicle signs; road present, but restricted area such as

Wilderness or National Park where vehicles are not allowed

9 Other – specify in plot-level notes

1.11 PUBLIC USE RESTRICTIONS

Record, if any, the restriction posted near or on the plot area that limits public use of the plot area; if more than one restriction occurs for the plot area, record the lowest number restriction present (1-3, 9).




Values:

0

1

2

None – no public use restrictions

Keep out / no trespassing

No hunting or fishing

3 No

9 Other - specify in plot-level notes

1.12 RECREATION USE 1

Record up to 3 signs of recreation use encountered within the accessible forest land portion of any of the four subplots, based on evidence such as campfire rings, compacted areas (from tents), hiking trails, bullet or shotgun casings, tree stands, etc. Record the recreation use that has had the most significant impact on the plot area first, then the second and third use. For example, in general numerous four-wheel drive or ATV trails would be coded before camping, and camping before hiking, and hiking before fishing. Use the coding system provided as a hierarchy. Do not repeat codes, except codes 0 and 9. Physical recreation evidence must be present to code 1-9. Also, disregard dumping where no evidence of recreation is present.

Examine the plot area for clues before spending an exorbitant amount of time trying to find evidence that normally would not be found in the area; look for the obvious signs first.




Values:

0

1

2

No evidence of recreation use

Motor vehicle (four wheel drive, ATV, motorcycle, snowmobile)

Horse riding, dog team trails, ski trails

3 Camping

4 Hiking

5 Hunting/shooting

6 Fishing

7 Boating – physical evidence such as launch sites or docks

9 Other – recreation use where evidence is present, such as human litter, but purpose is not clear or does not fit into above categories.


Record the second most significant recreation use impact. See RECREATION USE 1 for coding

14


April 2000 instructions.


Record the third most significant recreation use impact. See RECREATION USE 1 for coding instructions.

1.15 WATER ON PLOT

Record the water source that has the greatest impact on the area within the accessible forest land portion of any of the four subplots. The coding hierarchy is listed in order from large permanent water to temporary water. This variable may be used for recreation, wildlife, hydrology, and timber availability studies.


0

1

2



Values:

None – no water sources

Permanent streams or ponds too small to qualify as noncensus water

Permanent water (too small to qualify as Census or noncensus water) in the form of deep

3 swamps, bogs, marshes without standing trees present or with standing trees and less than 1.0 ac in size

Ditch/canal – human-made channels used as a means of moving water, such as irrigation or drainage which are too small to qualify as noncensus water

4 Temporary

5 Flood zones – evidence of flooding when bodies of water exceed their natural banks

9 Other temporary water – specify in plot notes

1.16 QA STATUS (CORE OPTIONAL)

Record the code to indicate the type of plot data collected, using the following codes:

When collected: P2 - CORE OPTIONAL

P3 - All plots



Values:

1 Standard production plot

2 QA field plot (cold check by QA crew)

3 Reference plot (off grid)

4 Training/practice plot (off grid)

5 Botched plot file (disregard during data processing)

1.17 CREW TYPE (CORE OPTIONAL)

Record the code to specify what type of crew is measuring the plot.

When collected: P2 - CORE OPTIONAL

P3 - All plots



Values:

15


April 2000

1 Standard field crew crew trainers

COORDINATES

Use a global positioning system (GPS) unit to determine the plot coordinates and elevation of all field visited plot locations.

1.18.1 GPS UNIT SETTINGS, DATUM, and COORDINATE SYSTEM

Consult the GPS unit operating manual or other regional instructions to ensure that the GPS unit internal settings, including Datum and Coordinate system, are correctly configured.

Each FIA unit will determine the Datum to be used in that region. Most will use the NAD 27

Datum (also known as NAS-C or NA 27 CONUS/CLK66), but coordinates collected using any appropriate datum can be converted back to a national standard for reporting purposes.

Each FIA unit will also determine which coordinate system to use. Regions using a Geographic system will collect coordinates in Degrees, Minutes, and Seconds of Latitude and Longitude; those using the UTM coordinate system will collect UTM Easting, Northing, and Zone.

1.18.2 COLLECTING READINGS

Collect at least 180 GPS readings at the plot center which will then be averaged by the GPS unit.

Each individual reading should have an error of less than 70 ft if possible (the error of all the averaged readings is far less).

Soon after arriving at plot center, use the GPS unit to attempt to collect coordinates. If suitable readings (180 readings at error < 70 ft) can not be obtained, try again before leaving the plot center.

If it is still not possible to get suitable coordinates from plot center, attempt to obtain them from a location within 200 ft of plot center. Obtain the azimuth and horizontal distance from the "offset" location to plot center. If a PLGR unit is used, use the Rng-Calc function in the PLGR to compute the coordinates of the plot center. If another type of GPS unit is used, record the azimuth and horizontal distance in Sections 1.18.12 and 1.18.13.

Coordinates may be collected further than 200 ft away from the plot center if a laser measuring device is used to determine the horizontal distance from the "offset" location to plot center.

Again, if a PLGR unit is used, use the Rng-Calc function in the PLGR to compute the coordinates of the plot center. If another type of GPS unit is used, record the azimuth and horizontal distance in Sections 1.18.12 and 1.18.13.

In all cases try to obtain at least 180 readings before recording the coordinates.

1.18.3 GPS UNIT

Record the kind of GPS unit used to collect coordinates. If suitable coordinates cannot be obtained, record 0.

When collected: All field visited plots



Values:

16


April 2000

0 GPS coordinates not collected

1 Rockwell Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver (PLGR) brand

1.18.4 GPS SERIAL NUMBER

Record the last six digits of the serial number on the GPS unit used.

When collected: When GPS UNIT > 0



Values: 000001 to 999999

1.18.5 COORDINATE SYSTEM

Record a code indicating the type of coordinate system used to obtain readings.




Values:

1 Geographic coordinate system

2 UTM coordinate system

1.18.6 LATITUDE

Record the latitude of the plot center to the nearest hundredth second, as determined by GPS.

When collected: When COORDINATE SYSTEM = 1

Field width: 8 digits (DDMMSSSS)


Values:

1.18.7 LONGITUDE

Record the longitude of the plot center, to the nearest hundredth second, as determined by GPS.


Field width: 9 digits: (DDDMMSSSS)


Values:

1.18.8 UTM ZONE

Record a 2-digit and 1 character field UTM ZONE as determined by GPS.

1.18.9 EASTING (X) UTM

Record the Easting coordinate of the plot center as determined by GPS.


Field width: 3 digits: (##C)


Values: 10-19T and 10-19U

17


April 2000




Values:

1.18.10 NORTHING (Y) UTM

Record the Northing coordinate of the plot center as determined by GPS.




Values:

1.18.11 CORRECTION FOR "OFFSET" LOCATION

As described in Section 1.18.2, coordinates may be collected at a location other than the plot center (an “offset” location). If a PLGR unit is used all offset coordinates will be "corrected" back using the Rng/Calc function. If a GPS unit other than a PLGR is used, then record items 1.18.12 and 1.18.13.

1.18.12 AZIMUTH TO PLOT CENTER

Record the azimuth from the location where coordinates were collected to actual plot center. If coordinates are collected at plot center, record 000.

When collected: When GPS UNIT = 2


MQO: +/- 3 degrees, 100% of the time

Values: 000 when coordinates are collected at plot center

001 to 360 when coordinates are not collected at plot center

1.18.13 DISTANCE TO PLOT CENTER

Record the horizontal distance in feet from the location where coordinates were collected to the actual plot center. If coordinates are collected at plot center, record 000. As described in Section

1.18.2, if a Laser range finder is used to determine DISTANCE TO PLOT CENTER, offset locations may be up to 999 ft from the plot center. If a range finder is not used, the offset location must be within 200 ft.

When collected: When GPS UNIT = 2


MQO: +/- 6 ft, 100% of the time

Values: 000 when coordinates are collected at plot center

001 to 200 when a Laser range finder is not used to determine distance

001 to 999 when a Laser range finder is used to determine distance

1.18.14 GPS ELEVATION

Record the elevation above mean sea level of the plot center, in feet, as determined by GPS.




Values: -00100 to 20000

18


April 2000

1.18.15 GPS ERROR

Record the error as shown on the GPS unit to the nearest foot. As described in Section 1.18.2, make every effort to collect readings only when the error < 70 ft. However, if after trying several different times during the day, at several different locations, this is not possible, record reading with an error of up to 999 ft.




Values: 0 to 70 if possible

71 to 999 if an error of less than 70 cannot be obtained

1.18.16 NUMBER OF READINGS

Record a 3-digit code indicating how many readings were averaged by the GPS unit to calculate the plot coordinates. Collect at least 180 readings if possible.




Values: 1 to 999

NOTES

Use these fields to record notes pertaining to the entire plot. If the notes apply only to a specific subplot or other specific aspect of the plot, then make that clear in the notes.


Field width: Unlimited alphanumeric character field

MQO: N/A

Values: English language words, phrases and numbers

1.20 P3 HEXAGON NUMBER

Record the unique code assigned to each Phase 3 (former FHM) hexagon.

When collected: All Phase 3 plots



Values:

1.21 P3 PLOT NUMBER

Record the P3 PLOT NUMBERS that are used to identify individual plots within the same Phase

3 (former FHM) hexagon.

When collected: All Phase 3 plots



Values: 1 to 9

19


April 2000

2.0 CONDITION

The Forest Inventory and Analysis (FIA) plot is cluster of four subplots in a fixed pattern.

Subplots are never reconfigured or moved in order to confine them to a single condition class; a plot may straddle more than one condition class. Every plot samples at least one condition class: the condition class present at plot center (the center of subplot 1). Delineation and mapping of condition classes is a major departure from past inventory practices, and is intended to allow flexible post stratification of data for a variety of purposes.

2.1 DETERMINATION OF CONDITION CLASS

2.1.1 Step 1: Delineate the plot area by CONDITION STATUS

The first attribute considered when defining a condition class is CONDITION STATUS. The area sampled by a plot is assigned into condition classes based upon the following differences in

CONDITION STATUS:

1. Accessible forest land

2. Nonforest

3. Noncensus

4. Census water water

5. Denied access area

6. Area too hazardous to visit

7. Area that is not in the sample, e.g., in Canada or Mexico.

Accessible forest land defines the population of interest for FIA purposes. This is the area where most of the data collection is conducted.

2.1.2 Step 2: Further subdivide Accessible Forest Land by 6 mapping variables

Any condition class sampled as accessible forest land may be further subdivided, in order of listed priority, into smaller condition classes if distinct, contrasting condition classes are present because of variation within the sampled area in any of the following attributes:

3. Forest

4.

Group

Type

Stand Size Class

5. Regeneration

Density

At time of re-inventory, two additional attributes, PAST NONFOREST/INACCESSIBLE LAND

USE and PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE are mapped to delineate new condition classes if the sampled area on a plot has changed to or from accessible forest land (See Sections 2.4.24 and 2.4.25). This allows tracking of land use changes without requiring mapping of all nonforest condition classes on all plots.

No other attribute shall be the basis for recognizing contrasting accessible forest land condition classes. For each condition class recognized, several “ancillary attributes” that help describe the condition will be collected, but will not be used for mapping purposes (see Sections 2.4.7 to

2.4.23).

20


April 2000

2.2 CONDITION CLASS ATTRIBUTES

A CONDITION CLASS NUMBER and a classification for CONDITION STATUS is required for every condition class sampled on a plot. For each condition class classified as accessible forest land, a classification is required for each of the following attributes:

=

2.4.2 Owner

2.4.3 Forest Type

2.4.4 Size

=

=

=

Attributes where a change causes

a

2.4.6 Tree

2.4.7

=

2.4.8 Private Owner Industrial Status

2.4.9 Artificial Regeneration Species

Stand

2.4.11 Disturbance (up to 3 coded)

=

=

= Ancillary - changes do not

2.4.12 Disturbance Year (1 per disturbance)

2.4.17 Treatment (up to 3 coded)

2.4.18 Treatment Year (1 per treatment)

=

= delineate a new condition class

Physiographic

=

Class =

Three additional attributes require classification in specific situations:

2.4.24 Past Nonforest/ Inaccessible Land Use (for area afforested since last inventory).

2.4.25 Present Nonforest Land Use (for area converted from accessible forest land condition class to nonforest land since last inventory).

2.4.26 Nonforest Year (estimate year that accessible forest land condition class was converted to nonforest).

When classifying condition status, owner group, reserved status, and previous and present nonforest use, base the classification on what is present within the area defined by the fixed radius plot (annular, subplot, or microplot). When classifying all other condition class variables, base the classification on the annular plot.

Specific instructions for the classification of each attribute follow.

2.2.1 CONDITION CLASS NUMBER

On a plot, assign and record a unique identifying number for each condition class. At the time of the plot establishment, the condition class at plot center (the center of subplot 1) is designated condition class 1. Other condition classes are assigned numbers sequentially at the time each condition class is delineated. On a plot, each sampled condition class must have a unique number that can change at remeasurement to reflect new conditions on the plot.

When collected: All condition classes



Values: 1 to 9

21


April 2000

CONDITION CLASS DEFINING (MAPPING) VARIABLES:

2.2.2 CONDITION

Record the code that describes the status of the condition. Record for all condition classes sampled on a plot. The instructions in Section 2.2 and 2.3 apply when delineating condition classes that differ by CONDITION STATUS.

When collected: All condition classes



Values:

1. Accessible forest land land

3. Noncensus water

5. Denied access area

6. Area too hazardous to visit

7. Area that is not in the sample, e.g., in Canada or Mexico.

2.3 DETERMINING CONDITION CLASSES DIFFERING IN CONDITION STATUS:

The first step in delineating condition classes is to recognize differences in CONDITION

STATUS. The most common difference is adjacent accessible forest land and nonforest land.

Adjacent accessible forest land and nonforest land condition classes are recognized only if each of the two prospective condition classes is at least 1.0 ac in size, and each is at least 120.0 ft in width. These size and width minimums apply to both accessible forest land and nonforest land.

Within an accessible forest land condition class, unimproved roads, rock outcrops, and natural nonforest openings less than 1.0 ac in size and less than 120.0 ft in width are considered forest land and are not delineated and classified as a separate nonforest condition class.

Within a nonforest land condition class, forested areas or linear strips of trees less than 1.0 ac in size and less than 120.0 ft in width are considered part of the nonforest condition class.

Five exceptions to these size and width requirements apply:

1. Distinct, alternating strips of forest and nonforest land: this situation occurs when a plot or subplot samples a condition class that is less than 1.0 ac in size and less than 120.0 ft in width. The condition class is one of a series of parallel strips of forest and nonforest land in which none of the strips meet the minimum width requirement.

For many small intermingled strips, determine the total area that the alternating strips occupy, and classify according to the CONDITION STATUS (forest land or nonforest land) that occupies the greater area. If the area of alternating strips is so large or indistinct as to make a total area determination impractical, then classify the sample as forest land.

For two alternating strips of forest and nonforest between two qualifying areas of nonforest land and forest land, see Figure 2. Any subplot that falls in the alternating strips uses the rule. Any subplot that falls in assigned nonforest / forest is assigned that type.

22


April 2000

Nonforest land greater than 120 ft wide

NF

NF

PC

Strip of Forest less than 120 ft wide

PC

Strip of

Nonforest less than 120 ft wide

PC

Forest land greater than 120 ft wide

PC

F

F

Figure 2. Example of alternating strips of forested and nonforested conditions.

2. Developed nonforest inclusions: human-caused nonforest land condition classes such as homes or cabins that are less than 1.0 ac in size and 120.0 ft in width and are surrounded by forest land. All extensions from developed nonforest inclusions are nonforest condition classes regardless of length or width. There are three kinds of developed nonforest inclusions that do not have to meet area or width requirements. a) Improved roads: paved roads, gravel roads, or improved dirt roads regularly maintained for long-term continuing use. Unimproved traces and roads created for skidding logs are not considered improved roads b) Maintained rights-of-way: corridors created for railroads, power lines, gas lines, and canals that are periodically treated to limit the establishment and growth of trees and shrubs. c) Developments: structures and the maintained area next to a structure, all less than 1.0 ac in size and surrounded by forest land. Examples of developments are houses or trailers on very small lots, communication installations in a small cleared area within forest land, and barns and sheds.

3. The 120 foot minimum width for mapping does not apply when a corner angle is 90 degrees or greater (Figure 3).

23


April 2000

Figure 3. Illustration of the 90 degree corner rule.

The dotted lines do not create nonforest conditions.

4. Linear water features: natural water features that are linear in shape such as streams and rivers. A linear water feature must meet the definition for Census or noncensus water to be nonforest area. Therefore, a linear water feature must be at least 30.0 ft wide and cover at least 1.0 ac. The width of a linear water feature is measured across its channel between points on either side up to which water prevents the establishment and survival of trees. To determine whether a linear water feature qualifies as nonforest, rely on all available information on hand such as aerial photos, topographic maps, past survey land calls, and ocular estimates at the current survey visit. Linear water features which do not meet the definition for Census or noncensus water should be classified as forest land only if bounded by forest land on both shores. Crews are NOT expected to measure the length of a linear water feature to determine if it meets the 1.0 ac requirement; use professional judgment and common sense on any linear water feature.

5. Riparian forest area: A riparian forest area is defined as a forest area between 30.0 and

120.0 ft wide, and 1.0 ac or more in size, cumulative, but not necessarily present on both sides of and adjacent to a naturally occurring or artificially created body of water or watercourse with continuous or intermittent flow. Riparian forest areas may be associated with but not limited to streams, rivers, lakes, sloughs, seeps, springs, marsh, beaver ponds, sink holes, cypress domes and ponds, man-made ditches and canals. A riparian forest area must be associated “within forest” and contain at least one distinct and obvious change in a condition class mapping attribute from its adjacent accessible forest land condition class.

Condition Status Definitions:

24


April 2000

2.3.1 ACCESIBLE FOREST LAND

Land that is within the population of interest, is accessible, is on a subplot that can be occupied at subplot center, can safely be visited, and meets at least one of the two following criteria: or

(a) the condition is at least 10-percent stocked by trees of any size (Appendix 4) or has been at least 10-percent stocked in the past. Additionally, the condition is not subject to nonforest use(s) that prevent normal tree regeneration and succession such as regular mowing, intensive grazing, or recreation activities;

(b) in several western woodland types where stocking cannot be determined, and the condition has at least 5 percent crown cover by trees of any size, or has had at least 5 percent cover in the past. Additionally, the condition is not subject to nonforest use that prevents normal regeneration and succession such as regular mowing, chaining, or recreation activities.

To qualify as forest land, the prospective condition must be at least 1.0 ac in size and

120.0 ft wide measured stem-to-stem. Forested strips must be 120.0 ft wide for a continuous length of at least 363.0 ft in order to meet the acre threshold. Forested strips that do not meet these requirements are classified as part of the adjacent nonforest land.

Transition zones and forest/nonforest encroachment. When an accessible forest land condition encroaches into a nonforest condition, the border between forest and nonforest is often a gradual change in tree cover or stocking with no clear and abrupt boundary. In addition, it may be difficult to determine exactly where the forested area meets the minimum stocking criteria and where it does not. For these cases, determine where the land clearly meets the 10% minimum forest land stocking, and where it clearly is less than required stocking; divide the zone between these points in half, and determine the side of the zone on which the subplot center is located. Classify the condition class of the subplot based on this line (Figure 4).

25

Figure 4. Example of classifying the condition class of the subplot in a transition zone with forest/nonforest encroachment.


April 2000

For example, at measurement time 1, a clear and distinct boundary existed between the forest and nonforest condition classes. At time 2, however, there now exists a zone of regeneration or small diameter trees between the previous forest condition and where the nonforest clearly remains. If the zone of encroachment is clearly stocked where it meets the nonforest, classify the entire zone as forest. If the zone is clearly nonforest up to the original stand, call it all nonforest. If the encroachment or transition zone is not clearly stocked where it meets the nonforest, determine where it is clearly stocked

(forest) and where it is clearly not stocked (nonforest); divide this zone in half, and classify the entire subplot based on which side of the line the subplot center falls.

Treated strips – Occasionally, crews will come across plantations of trees, in which rows of trees alternate with strips of vegetation that have been bulldozed, mowed, tilled, treated with herbicide, or crushed. Because these strip treatments are conducted to optimize growth or to release the stand, the areas are considered forest land, and the treatment is considered a timber stand improvement operation. Do not confuse these practices with similar treatments on nonforest lands such as yards or rights-of-way.

Contact with the land owner may help determine the intent of a treatment.

Indistinct boundary due to the condition minimum-width definition: Do not subdivide subplots where a condition class may change due only to the forest vs. nonforest minimum width (120.0 ft) definition. Although the point where the definition changes from forest to nonforest creates an invisible “line” between conditions, this definitional boundary is not distinct and obvious . See Figures 5 and 6. Where the point of the definition change occurs on the subplot, determine only if the subplot center is on the forest or nonforest side of that approximate boundary, and classify the entire subplot based on the condition of the subplot center. If the boundary crosses through the center of the subplot, classify the subplot as the condition it most resembles. If the boundary occurs between subplots, classify each subplot based on its relation to the definitional boundary.

Figure 5. Forest condition narrows within a nonforest condition. Examine the location of the subplot center in reference to the approximate line where the forest narrows to 120 ft wide. In this example, the entire subplot is classified as forest.

26


April 2000

Figure 6. Nonforest condition narrows within a forest condition. Examine the location of the subplot center in reference to the approximate line where the nonforest narrows to 120 ft wide. In this example, the entire subplot is classified as forest.

2.3.2 NONFOREST

Nonforest land is any land within the sample that does not meet the definition of accessible forest land or any of the CONDITION STATUS values defined in Sections

2.3.3 through 2.3.7. To qualify, the area must be at least 1.0 ac in size and 120.0 ft wide, with 5 exceptions discussed previously at the beginning of section 2.3. Do not consider evidence of "possible" or future development or conversion. A nonforest land condition will remain in the sample and will be examined at the next occasion to see if it has become forest land.

WATER

Lakes, reservoirs, ponds, and similar bodies of water 1.0 ac to 4.5 ac in size. Rivers, streams, canals, etc., 30.0 ft to 200 ft wide.

WATER

Lakes, reservoirs, ponds, and similar bodies of water 4.5 ac in size and larger; and rivers, streams, canals, etc., more than 200 ft wide (1990 U.S. Census definition).

ACCESS

Any area within the sampled area on a plot on which access is denied by the legal owner of the land the plot falls on, or by an owner of the only reasonable route to the plot.

There are no minimum area or width requirements for a condition class delineated by denied access. Because a denied-access condition can become accessible in the future, it remains in the sample and is re-examined at the next occasion to determine if access is available.

2.3.6 HAZARDOUS

Any area within the sampled area on plot that cannot be accessed because of a hazard or danger, for example cliffs, quarries, strip mines, illegal plantations, temporary high

27


April 2000 water, etc. Although the hazard is not likely to change over time, a hazardous condition remains in the sample and is re-examined at the next occasion to determine if the hazard is still present. There are no minimum size or width requirements for a condition class delineated by a hazardous condition.

2.3.7 NOT IN THE SAMPLE

Any area within the sampled area on a plot that is not within the boundaries of the sample population of interest. Examples of areas out of the sample would be plots or portions of plots falling in Mexico, Canada, and areas which are not currently participating in FIA such as National Forest land in California, Oregon, Washington, or BLM land in western Washington. A condition outside the sample area remains in the potential population of interest and is re-examined at the next occasion to determine if it becomes part of the population of interest. There are no minimum size or width requirements for a condition class delineated as out of the sample.

2.4 DETERMINING CONDITION CLASSES WITHIN ACCESSIBLE FOREST LAND:

Accessible forest land is subdivided into condition classes that are based on differences in

RESERVED STATUS, OWNER GROUP, FOREST TYPE, STAND SIZE CLASS,

REGENERATION STATUS, and TREE DENSITY. Section 2.1 applies when delineating contrasting forest condition classes. Specific criteria apply for each of the six attributes and are documented by attribute in subsections within 2.4.1 to 2.4.6. “Stands” are defined by plurality of stocking for all live trees that are not overtopped.

Additionally, each separate forest condition class recognized within accessible forest land must be at least 1.0 ac in size and at least 120.0 ft in width. If prospective contrasting forest land condition classes do not each meet these minimum size and width requirements, the most similar prospective conditions should be combined until these minimums are attained.

No other attribute shall be the basis for recognizing contrasting condition classes. For each condition class recognized, several “ancillary attributes” that help describe the condition will be collected, but will not be used for mapping purposes (see Sections 2.4.7 to 2.4.23).

General instructions for delineating condition classes within accessible forest lands:

1. Distinct boundary within an annular plot (if applicable), subplot, or microplot: Separate condition classes ARE recognized if, within a subplot, two (or more) distinctly different condition classes are present and delineated by a distinct, abrupt boundary. The boundary is referenced; see Section 3.0.

2. Indistinct boundary within a subplot: Separate condition classes are NOT recognized if the prospective condition classes abut along an indistinct transition zone, rather than on an abrupt, obvious boundary. Only one condition is recognized, and the subplot is classified entirely as the condition it most resembles.

Example: The 4 subplots all sample only accessible forest land. Subplots 1, 3, and

4 sample what is clearly a stand of large diameter trees. Subplot 2 falls in the middle of a stand size transition zone. In the zone, the large diameter stand phases into a sapling stand.

Subplot 2 must not be divided into two mapped condition classes on the basis of stand size. Instead, it is treated entirely as part of the large diameter condition class or is assigned entirely to a new condition class that is classified as a seedling-sapling stand. The latter occurs only if the crew thinks the entire subplot is more like a stand

28


April 2000 of seedling-saplings than a stand of large diameter trees; then the boundary between the large and small diameter stands is assumed to occur between and not on the subplots.

3. A boundary or transition zone between fixed radii plots that sample distinctly different condition classes: Separate condition classes are recognized and recorded when a valid attribute obviously differs between two fixed radius plots, but a distinct boundary or indistinct transition zone exists outside the sampled (fixed-radius) area of the subplots.

In such cases, a boundary, if present, is not referenced.

Example: The northernmost subplot (2) samples entirely accessible forest land. The other three subplots, 1, 3, and 4, fall clearly in a nonforest meadow. Between subplot

1 and 2 is a transition zone; the number of trees present goes from none to what clearly represents at least 10-percent tree stocking. Two condition classes are sampled: accessible forest land sampled on subplot 2, and nonforest land sampled on the other subplots.

STATUS

Record the code that identifies the reserved designation for the condition. Reserved land is withdrawn by law(s) prohibiting the management of land for the production of wood products (not merely controlling or prohibiting wood harvesting methods). Such authority is vested in a public agency or department, and supersedes rights of ownership. The prohibition against management for wood products cannot be changed through decision of the land manager

(management agency) or through a change in land management personnel, but rather is permanent in nature. The phrase "withdrawn by law" includes as reserved land, parcels of private land with deeds that specifically prohibit the management of the tract for the production of wood products.

When collected: All accessible forestland condition classes (CONDITION STATUS = 1)



Values: reserved

1 Reserved

2.4.2 OWNER

Record the OWNER GROUP code identifying the ownership (or the managing Agency for public lands) of the land in the condition class. Conditions will be mapped based on changes in

OWNER GROUP only; separate conditions due to changes in OWNER GROUP are recognized only where differences can be clearly identified on the ground when visiting the plot.

When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (CONDITION STATUS = 1)



Values:

Service

Federal

30 State and Local Government

40 Private

29


April 2000

Record the code corresponding to the FOREST TYPE (from Appendix 2) that best describes the species with the plurality of stocking for all live trees in the condition class that are not overtopped.



MQO: No errors in group, 100% of the time; No errors in type, at least 95% of the time


The instructions in section 2.1 and 2.3 apply when delineating, within accessible forest land, contrasting conditions based on differences in FOREST TYPE.

2.4.4 STAND SIZE CLASS

Record the code that best describes the predominant size class of all live trees in the condition class that are not overtopped.




Values:

0 Nonstocked:

Meeting the definition of accessible forest land, and one of the following applies:

(a) less than 10 percent stocked by trees of any size, and not classified as chaparral, or

(b) for forest types where stocking standards are not available, less than 5 percent crown cover of trees of any size.

1 1.0 – 4.9 in (seedlings / saplings

At least 10 percent stocking (or 5 percent crown cover if stocking tables are not available) in trees of any size; and at least 1/3 of the crown cover is in trees less than 5.0 in DBH/DRC.

2 5.0 – 8.9 in (softwoods) / 5.0 – 10.9 in (hardwoods)

At least 10 percent stocking (or 5 percent crown cover if stocking tables are not available) in trees of any size; and at least 1/3 of the crown cover is in trees greater than

5.0 in DBH/DRC and the plurality of the crown cover is in softwoods between 5.0 – 8.9 in diameter and/or hardwoods between 5.0 – 10.9 in DBH, and/or western woodland trees

5.0 – 8.9 in DRC.

3 9.0 – 19.9 in (softwoods) / 11.0 – 19.9 in (hardwoods)


5.0 in DBH/DRC and the plurality of the crown cover is in softwoods between 9.0 – 19.9 in diameter and/or hardwoods between 11.0 – 19.9 in DBH, and for western woodland trees 9.0 – 19.9 in DRC.

4 20.0 – 39.9 in


5.0 in DBH/DRC and the plurality of the crown cover is in trees between 20.0 – 39.9 in

DBH.

30


April 2000

5 40.0 + in


5.0 in DBH/DRC and the plurality of the crown cover is in trees > 40.0 in DBH.

6 Chaparral:

Less than 10 percent stocking by trees of any size, and greater than 5 percent crown cover of species that comprise chaparral communities.

The instructions in Sections 2.1 and 2.3 apply when delineating, on accessible forest land, contrasting conditions based on differences in STAND SIZE CLASS.

Within the sampled area on microplot, subplot, or annular plot, recognize only very obvious contrasting stands of different mean diameter with an abrupt boundary. Example: an obvious abrupt boundary exists within the sampled (fixed-radius) area of a subplot and demarcates a large diameter stand from a small diameter stand. Use tree stocking of all live trees that are not overtopped to differentiate between stand-size classes; for most western woodland forest types

(e.g., pinyon, juniper, gambel oak) where stocking values are not readily available, use percent tree cover to represent stocking.

Use crown cover as the surrogate for stocking to determine STAND SIZE CLASS. View the plot from the top down and examine crown cover. The stand must have at least 5% of the crown cover in STAND SIZE CLASSES of 1,2,3,4, and 5 or any combination of these STAND SIZE

CLASSES; otherwise the STAND SIZE CLASS is either 0 or 6 depending on the characteristics of the stand. If at least 1/3 of crown cover is made up of STAND SIZE CLASSES = 2, 3, 4, and 5

(combined), the accessible forested condition will be classified in one of these STAND SIZE

CLASSES based on which of these STAND SIZE CLASSES has the most crown cover. If less than 1/3 of the crown cover is made up of STAND SIZE CLASSES = 2, 3, 4, and 5 (combined), classify the accessible forested condition as a STAND SIZE CLASS = 1, if adequate cover is present.

If no other condition class defining variables are different between accessible forest conditions, map on differences in STAND SIZE CLASS only for the following combinations:

Between Nonstocked (STAND SIZE CLASS = 0) or Chaparral (STAND SIZE CLASS = 6) and any stocked forest land (STAND SIZE CLASS = 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5);

Between STAND SIZE CLASS = 1 and STAND SIZE CLASS = 3, 4, and 5;

Between STAND SIZE CLASS = 2 and STAND SIZE CLASS = 4 and 5; or

Between STAND SIZE CLASS = 3 and STAND SIZE CLASS = 5.

STATUS

Record the code that best describes the degree of evidence of artificial regeneration which occurred in the condition.




Values:

0 Natural Present stand shows no clear evidence of artificial regeneration.

Includes unplanted, recently cut lands.

1 Artificial Present stand shows clear evidence of artificial regeneration.

31


April 2000

The instructions in section 2.1 and 2.3 apply when delineating, within accessible forest land, contrasting conditions based on differences in REGENERATION STATUS.

For a forest land condition to be delineated and/or classified as artificially regenerated, the condition must show distinct evidence of planting or seeding. If it is difficult to determine whether or not a stand has been planted or seeded, then use code 0. If no distinct boundary exists within the sampled (fixed-radius) area on any subplot, then do not recognize separate conditions. In many regions of the West, trees are not planted in rows, and planted stands do not differ in physical appearance from natural conditions. In these cases, there is no need to differentiate conditions based on stand origin.

DENSITY

Record a code to indicate the relative tree density classification. Base the classification on the number of stems/unit area, basal area, tree cover, or stocking of all live trees in the condition which are not overtopped, compared to any previously defined condition class TREE DENSITY.

The instructions in section 2.1 and 2.3 apply when delineating, within accessible forest land, contrasting conditions based on differences in TREE DENSITY.

Codes 2 and higher are used ONLY when all other attributes used to delineate separate mapped condition classes are homogenous, i.e. when a change in density is the ONLY difference within what would otherwise be treated only as one forest condition. Otherwise, code 1 for all condition classes. Codes 2 and higher are usually, but not always, used to demarcate areas that differ from an adjacent area due to forest disturbance, e.g., a partial harvest or heavy but not total tree mortality due to a ground fire. Mapping on density should only be done when the less-dense condition is 50% or less as dense as the denser condition.

Do not distinguish between low stocked stands or stands of sparse and patchy forest.




Values:

1

2

3

Initial density class

Density class 2 - density different than 1

Density class 3 - density different than 1 and 2

In order to qualify as a separate condition based on density, there MUST be a distinct, easily observed change in the density of an area's tree cover or basal area.

Examples of valid contrasting conditions defined by differences in tree density are forest land conditions with the same type, origin, stand size, ownership, and reserved status, but:

• the eastern half of an otherwise homogeneous, 20 ac stand has many trees killed by a bark beetle outbreak, or

• one portion of a stand is partially cut over (with 40 sq. ft basal area per ac) while the other portion is undisturbed (with 100 sq. ft basal area per ac).

ANCILLARY (NON-MAPPING) VARIABLES

32


April 2000

Record the OWNER CLASS code that best corresponds to the ownership (or the managing

Agency for public lands) of the land in the condition class. Conditions will NOT be mapped based on changes in owner class. If multiple owner classes within a group occur on a single condition class, record the owner class closest to the plot center.




Values:

Owner Classes within Forest Service Lands (Owner Group 10):

13

Forest

Grassland

Other Forest Service

Owner Classes within Other Federal Lands (Owner Group 20)

21

22

23

24

National Park Service

Bureau of Land Management

Fish and Wildlife Service

Departments of Defense/Energy

Owner Classes within State and Local Government lands (Owner Group 30)

31 State

32

33

Local (County, Municipality, etc.)

Other Non Federal Public

Owner Classes within Private lands (Owner Group 40)

41 Corporate

42 Non Governmental Conservation / Natural Resources Organization

- examples: Nature Conservancy, National Trust for Private Lands, Pacific

Forest Trust, Boy Scouts of America, etc.

43 Unincorporated Partnerships / Associations / Clubs – examples: Hunting

Clubs that own, not lease property, recreation associations, 4H, etc.

44 Native American (Indian)

45 Individual

2.4.8 PRIVATE OWNER INDUSTRIAL STATUS

Record the code identifying the status of the owner with regard to being considered industrial as determined by whether or not they own and operate a primary wood processing plant. A primary wood processing plant is any commercial operation which originates the primary processing of wood on a regular and continuing basis. Examples include: pulp or paper mill, sawmill, panel board mill, post or pole mill, etc. Cabinet shops, “mom & pop” home-operated businesses, etc., should not be considered as industrial plants. If any doubt exists with the determination by the field crew about the owner’s industrial status due to name, commercial plant size, type plant, etc., choose code 0 below.

NOTE : Unit or State headquarters may have to maintain a list of recognized industrial owners within a State for crews to use when making these determinations.

33


April 2000

When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (CONDITION STATUS = 1) when the owner group is private (OWNER GROUP 40)



Values:

0 Land owned by industrial owner with a wood processing plant

2.4.9 ARITFICIAL REGENERATION SPECIES

Record the species code of the predominant tree species for which evidence exists of artificial regeneration in the stand. This attribute is ancillary; that is, contrasting condition classes are never delineated based on variation in this attribute.

When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (CONDITION STATUS = 1) with evidence of artificial regeneration (REGENERATION STATUS = 1)




2.4.10 STAND AGE

Record the average total age, to the nearest year, of the trees (plurality of all live trees not overtopped) in the predominant STAND SIZE CLASS of the condition, determined using local procedures. Record 000 for non-stocked stands.

An estimate of STAND AGE is required for every forest land condition class defined on a plot.

Stand age is usually highly correlated with stand size and should reflect the average age of all trees that are not overtopped. Unlike the procedure for Site tree age, estimates of stand age should estimate the time of tree establishment (e.g., not age at the point of diameter measurement). Note: For planted stands, estimate age based on the year the stand was planted

(e.g., do not add in the age of the planting stock).

To estimate STAND AGE, select two or three dominant or codominant trees from the overstory.

If the overstory covers a wide range of tree sizes and species, try to select the trees accordingly, but it is not necessary to core additional trees in such stands. The variance associated with mean stand age increases with stand heterogeneity, and additional cores are not likely to improve the estimate. Core each tree at the point of diameter measurement and count the rings between the outside edge and the core to the pith. Add in the number of years that passed from germination until the tree reached the point of core extraction to determine the total age of the tree. Unless more specific information is provided at training or by the unit, add 5 years to all eastern species, 5 years to western hardwoods, and 10 years to western softwoods. Assign a weight to each core by visually estimating the percentage of total overstory trees it represents.

Make sure the weights from all cores add up to 1.0, compute the weighted average age, and record. For example, if three trees aged 34, 62, and 59 years represent 25 percent, 60 percent, and 15 percent of the overstory, respectively, the weighted stand age should be:

(34 x 0.25) + (62 x 0.60) + (59 x 0.15) = 55 years.

In some cases, it may be possible to avoid coring trees to determine age. If a stand has not been seriously disturbed since the previous survey, simply add the number of years since the previous inventory to the previous STAND AGE. In other situations, cores collected from site trees can be used to estimate STAND AGE.

If a condition class is nonstocked, assign a STAND AGE of 000.

34


April 2000

If all of the trees in a condition class are of a species which, by regional standards, can not be bored for age (e.g., mountain mahogany, tupelo) record 998. This code should be used in these cases only.

If tree cores are not counted in the field, but are collected and sent to the office for the counting of rings, record 999.



MQO: +/- 10%, at least 95% of the time

Values: 000 to 997, 998, 999

2.4.11 DISTURBANCE 1

Record the code corresponding to the presence of the following disturbances. Disturbance can connote positive or negative effects. The area affected by any natural or human-caused disturbance must be at least 1.0 ac in size. Record up to three different disturbances per condition class from most important to least important as best as can be determined. This attribute is ancillary; that is, contrasting conditions are never delineated based on variation in this attribute.

For initial forest plot establishment (initial grid activation or newly forested plots), the disturbance must be within the last 5 years. For remeasured plots recognize only those disturbances that have occurred since the previous inventory.

The disturbance codes below require "significant threshold" damage, which implies mortality and/or damage to 25 percent of individual trees in the condition class.




Values:

Code Definition

00 None - no observable disturbance

10 Insects

20 Disease

30 Weather other than the following:

31 ice

32 wind (includes hurricane, tornado)

33 flooding

34 drought

40 Fire (from crown and ground fire, either prescribed or natural) fire

42 crown

50 Domestic animal/livestock (includes grazing)

60 Wild animal other than the following:

61 beaver (includes flooding caused by beaver)

62 porcupine

63 deer/ungulate

64 bear (CORE OPTIONAL)

65 rabbit (CORE OPTIONAL)

70 Human - Any significant threshold human-caused damage not described in the

DISTURBANCE codes listed above or the TREATMENT codes listed below.

35


April 2000

80 Other natural - Any significant threshold natural damage, not described in the

DISTURBANCE codes listed above.

2.4.12 DISTURBANCE YEAR 1

Record the year in which DISTURBANCE 1 occurred. If the disturbance occurs continuously over a period of time, record 9999.

When collected: When DISTURBANCE 1 > 00



Values: Since the previous plot visit, or the past 5 years for plots visited for the first time


If a stand has experienced more than one disturbance, record the second disturbance here. See

DISTURBANCE 1 for coding instructions.


Record the year in which DISTURBANCE 2 occurred. See DISTURBANCE YEAR 1 for coding instructions.


If a stand has experienced more than two disturbances, record the third disturbance here. See

DISTURBANCE 1 for coding instructions.


Record the year in which DISTURBANCE 3 occurred. See DISTURBANCE YEAR 1 for coding instructions.

2.4.17 TREATMENT 1

Record the code corresponding to the presence of one of the following treatments since the last inventory cycle or within the past 5 years. The area affected by any treatment must be at least 1.0 ac in size. Record up to three different treatments per condition class from most important to least important as best as can be determined. This attribute is ancillary; that is, contrasting conditions are never delineated based on variation in this attribute.

For initial forest plot establishment (initial grid activation or newly forested plots), the treatment must be within the last 5 years. For remeasured plots recognize only those treatments that have occurred since the previous inventory.




Values:

Code Definition

00 None - No observable treatment.

10 Cutting - The removal of one or more trees from a stand.

36


April 2000 practices clearly intended to prepare a site for either natural or artificial regeneration.

50% stocked with live trees of any size. resulted in a stand at least 50% stocked with live trees of any size.

50 Other silvicultural treatment - The use of fertilizers, herbicides, girdling, pruning or other activities (not already listed above) designed to improve the commercial value of the residual stand.

2.4.18 TREATMENT YEAR 1

Record the year in which TREATMENT 1 occurred.

When collected: When TREATMENT 1 > 00



Values: Since the previous plot visit, or the past 5 years for plots visited for the first time

2.4.19 TREATMENT 2

If a stand has experienced more than one treatment, record the second treatment here. See

TREATMENT 1 for coding instructions, code 00 if none.


Record the year in which TREATMENT 2 occurred. See TREATMENT YEAR 1 for coding instructions.

2.4.21 TREATMENT 3

If a stand has experienced more than two treatments, record the third treatment here. See

TREATMENT 1 for coding instructions, code 00 if none.


Record the year in which TREATMENT 3 occurred. See TREATMENT YEAR 1 for coding instructions.

2.4.23 PHYSIOGRAPHIC CLASS

Record the code that best describes the PHYSIOGRAPHIC CLASS of the condition; land form, topographic position, and soil generally determine physiographic class. As a rule of thumb, look over the annular plot area to determine physiographic class, but always use your best judgment when assessing any condition level variables.




Values:

37


April 2000

Xeric Sites that are normally low or deficient in moisture available to support vigorous tree growth. These areas may receive adequate precipitation, but experience a rapid loss of available moisture due to runoff, percolation, evaporation, etc.

Tops - Ridge tops with thin rock outcrops and considerable exposure to sun and wind.

Slopes - Slopes with thin rock outcrops and considerable exposure to sun and wind. Includes most steep slopes with a southern or western exposure.

Sands - Sites with a deep, sandy surface subject to rapid loss of moisture following precipitation. Typical examples include sand hills, sites along the beach and shores of lakes and streams, and many deserts.

Mesic Sites that have moderate but adequate moisture available to support vigorous tree growth except for periods of extended drought. These sites may be subjected to occasional flooding during periods of heavy or extended precipitation.

21 Flatwoods - Flat or fairly level sites outside flood plains. Excludes deep sands and wet, swampy sites.

Uplands - Hills and gently rolling, undulating terrain and associated small streams. Excludes deep sands, all hydric sites, and streams with associated flood plains.

23 Moist Slopes and Coves - Moist slopes and coves with relatively deep, fertile soils.

Often these sites have a northern or eastern exposure and are partially shielded from wind and sun. Includes moist mountain tops and saddles.

24 Narrow Flood plains/Bottomlands - Flood plains and bottomlands less than 1/4-mile in width along rivers and streams. These sites are normally well drained but are subjected to occasional flooding during periods of heavy or extended precipitation.

Includes associated levees, benches, and terraces within a 1/4 mile limit. Excludes swamps, sloughs, and bogs.

25 Broad Flood plains/Bottomlands - Flood plains and bottomlands 1 mile or wider in width along rivers and streams. These sites are normally well drained but are subjected to occasional flooding during periods of heavy or extended precipitation.

Includes associated levees, benches, and terraces within a 1 mile limit. Excludes swamps, sloughs, and bogs with year-round water problems within the 1 mile limit.

Hydric Sites that generally have a year-round abundance or over-abundance of moisture. Hydric sites are very wet sites where excess water seriously limits both growth and species occurrence.

31 Swamps / Bogs - Low, wet, flat forested areas usually quite extensive that are flooded for long periods of time except during periods of extreme drought.

Excludes cypress ponds and small drains.

38


April 2000

33 defined stream channel. These areas are poorly drained or flooded throughout most of the year and drain the adjacent higher ground.

Bays and wet pocosins - Low, wet, boggy sites characterized by peaty or organic soils. May be somewhat dry during periods of extended drought. Examples include sites in the Lake States with lowland swamp conifers or the Carolina bays in the southeast US.

2.4.24 PAST NONFOREST / INACCESSIBLE LAND USE

Record and map on this attribute ONLY when a condition classified at last inventory as nonforest is now accessible forest land. The area that has changed is a new, separate condition class.

Instructions in Sections 2.1 and 2.3 apply. When classifying these cases, select the classification that, within the sampled area, indicates what the majority of this changed area was at the time of previous inventory.

Example: During the previous inventory, subplot 2 was classified as entirely nonforest land. The other subplots sampled accessible forest land. At that time, 55 percent of the area on subplot 2 was pasture, and 45 percent was cropland. (Note: these two nonforest classes were not actually mapped, but rather the entire subplot represented a condition class that was simply classified as nonforest land.)

At revisit, 60 percent of subplot 2, including all that was pasture within the subplot, is found planted to pines and is now forest land. The other subplots remained forest land. The portion of subplot 2 that changed from nonforest to forest is mapped and recorded as a new condition class. This "new" forest land should not be considered part of the original forest land condition class(es) sampled on the other subplots. Because it is a condition that changed from nonforest to forest, the attribute "Past nonforest land use" must be coded; the appropriate classification is pasture, the majority nonforest use -- at last inventory -- within the mapped portion of this new condition class.

Sampled area that shifts from access-denied, hazardous, outside-the-sample, or other uses to accessible forest land are treated in like manner. Codes 40, 91, 92, 93, and 94 apply.

When collected: Previous CONDITION STATUS not equal to 1, current CONDITION STATUS =

1



Values: land - Land managed for crops, pasture, or other agricultural use. The area must be at least 1.0 ac in size and 120.0 ft wide. Use the 10 code only for cases not better described by one of the following:

11 Cropland

12 Pasture (improved through cultural practices) farmland

14 Orchard

15 Christmas tree plantation

39


April 2000

20 Rangeland - Land primarily composed of grasses, forbs, or shrubs. This includes lands vegetated naturally or artificially to provide a plant cover managed like native vegetation and does not meet the definition of pasture. The area must be at least 1.0 ac in size and 120.0 ft wide.

30 Developed - Land used primarily by humans for purposes other than forestry or agriculture. Use the 30 code only for land not better described by one of the following:

31 Cultural: business, residential, and other places of intense human activity.

32 Rights-of-way: improved roads, railway, power lines, maintained canal

33 Recreation: parks, skiing, golf courses

40 Other - Land parcels greater than 1.0 ac in size and greater than 120.0 ft wide, that do not fall into one of the uses described above. Examples include undeveloped beaches, barren land (rock, sand), noncensus water, marshes, bogs, ice, and snow. sampled - Land areas that are not sampled. Use the 90 code only for land not better described by one of the following: water: meets definition of Census water.

92 Denied

93 Hazardous: land could not be safely accessed by crews.

94 Not in the sample: area outside the population of interest, e.g., land in

Mexico or Canada.

2.4.25 PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE

Record this attribute when area sampled and classified at last inventory as accessible forest land is now nonforest land. The area that has changed is a new, separate condition class. It should not be considered part of any nonforest land condition class(es) sampled during the previous inventory that may still be present. Instructions in Sections 2.1 and 2.3 apply. When classifying these cases, select the classification that, within sampled area, indicates what the majority of this changed area is now if more than one nonforest classes are present. Use the codes and classifications listed in 2.4.24; note that the 90 codes will not apply.

(CORE OPTIONAL) - Record the PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE for all nonforest conditions (CONDITION STATUS 2), regardless of past condition. Use the codes and classifications listed in 2.4.24.

When collected: CORE: SAMPLE KIND = 2, Previous CONDITION STATUS = 1, current

CONDITION STATUS not equal to 1

CORE OPTIONAL: current CONDITION STATUS = 2



Values: Same as 2.4.24

2.4.26 NONFOREST YEAR

Record the estimated year that a previously accessible forest land condition class was converted to a nonforest condition. This variable will be used to apportion tree growth on trees any trees which were included in the condition when it was forest land. Record the year in which the conversion took place. In most cases, all trees in a given condition class will be assigned the

40


April 2000 same nonforest year. If it can be determined that a tree died before the land was converted to a nonforest use, mortality year is also required.

When collected: SAMPLE KIND = 2, Previous CONDITION STATUS = 1, current CONDITION

STATUS not equal to 1


MQO: +/- 1 years, 70% of the time for remeasurement cycles of 5 years

+/- 2 years, 70% of the time for remeasurement cycles of > 5 years

Values: 1999 or higher

41


April 2000

3.0 BOUNDARY

Boundary reference data are used to remeasure plots and to compute the area for the condition classes sampled on a plot. Record all boundaries between condition classes that occur within the sampled (fixed-radius) area on subplots and microplots (and optionally annular plots).

Boundaries outside sampled (fixed-radius) areas are not referenced.

In addition to the recording procedures described herein, sketch maps of condition class boundaries onto the pre-printed plot diagrams on field tally sheets.

PROCEDURE

Reference, within the sampled area on each microplot, subplot, and annular plot, the approximate boundary of each condition class that differs from the condition class at a subplot center. Trees selected on these fixed-radius plots are assigned to the actual condition in which they lie regardless of the recorded approximate boundary.

Boundary referencing is done by recording azimuths and distances from subplot center to the reference points (Figures 7 and 8). Each boundary is marked by a maximum of three points - two where the boundary intersects the subplot circumference, and one "corner" point between the two end points, if necessary. Only the corner point requires a distance, since the distance from the center to the circumference is always equal to the fixed plot radius.

Figure 7. How to measure a straight boundary on a microplot, subplot, or annular plot.

43


April 2000

Figure 8. How to measure a boundary with a corner on a subplot or annular plot.

Microplot boundaries are referenced to the microplot center, and annular plot boundaries are referenced to the subplot center in the same manner described for subplots. Note that the larger the plot, the greater likelihood of a need for a boundary corner to record boundaries that are not straight lines.

Refer to Sections 2.1 and 2.3 for general mapping guidelines. The following additional rules apply when referencing a boundary within a subplot, microplot, or annular plot:

1. When a boundary between accessible forest land and nonforest land or between two contrasting accessible forest land condition classes is clearly marked, use that feature to define the boundary. Examples of clear demarcation are a fence line, plowed field edge, sharp ridge line, and water's edge along a stream course, ditch, or canal.

2.

3.

When a boundary between forest land and nonforest land is not clearly marked by an obvious feature, the boundary should follow the nonforest side of the stems of the trees at the forest edge.

When a boundary between two contrasting forest land condition classes is not clearly marked, map along the stems of the contrasting condition. When the boundary between two contrasting forest land condition classes is separated by a narrow linear inclusion

(creek, fire line, narrow meadow, unimproved road), establish the boundary at the far edge, relative to subplot center, of the inclusion.

4. When a plot is remeasured, the crew will examine the boundaries referenced at last inventory. If no change has occurred, the current crew will retain the boundary data that were recorded at last inventory. If a boundary has changed, or a new boundary is present, or the previous crew made an obvious error, record new or updated boundary data. Delete boundaries that are no longer distinct.

44


April 2000

5. Although individual MQOs are specified for the azimuths and distances, in practice a crew will be considered ‘correct’ when the difference in areas as mapped by the original crew and by the QA crew is less than 10% of the subplot or microplot area. This allows for slight variations in azimuths or distances due to the approximate nature of our mapping procedures.

DATA

Record the appropriate values for each boundary mapped on the subplot, microplot, or annular plot as follows:

3.2.1 SUBPLOT

Record the code corresponding to the number of the subplot.

When collected: All boundaries



Values: subplot subplot subplot subplot

3.2.2 PLOT plot.

TYPE

Record the code to specify whether the boundary data are for a subplot, microplot, or annular




Values:

2 Microplot

3 Annular plot boundary (coded only when annular plots are taken)

3.2.3 BOUNDARY

Remeasurement (SAMPLE KIND = 2) locations only. Record the appropriate code to indicate the relationship between previously recorded and current boundary information.

When collected: SAMPLE KIND = 2, All boundaries



Values:

0

1

2

3

No change - boundary is the same as indicated on plot map by a previous crew.

New boundary, or boundary data has been changed to reflect an actual on-theground physical change resulting in a difference from the boundaries recorded.

Boundary has been changed to correct an error from previous crew.

Boundary has been changed to reflect a change in variable definition.

45


April 2000

Record the CONDITION CLASS NUMBER of the condition class that contrasts with the condition class located at the subplot center (for boundaries on the subplot or annular plot) or at the microplot center (for boundaries on the microplot), e.g., the condition class present on the other side of the boundary line.




Values: 1 to 9

AZIMUTH

Record the azimuth from the subplot, microplot, or annular plot center to the farthest left point

(facing the contrasting condition class) where the boundary intersects the subplot, microplot, or annular plot circumference.



MQO: +/- 10 degrees, at least 90% of the time

Values: 001 to 360

3.2.6 CORNER

Record the azimuth from the subplot, microplot, or annular plot center to a corner or curve in a boundary. If a boundary is best described by a straight line between the two circumference points, then record 000 for CORNER AZIMUTH (000=none).




Values: 000 to 360

3.2.7 CORNER

Record the horizontal distance, to the nearest 1 ft, from the subplot, microplot, or annular plot center to a boundary corner point.

When collected: All boundaries when CORNER AZIMUTH > 000


MQO: +/- 1 ft, at least 90% of the time

Values: microplot subplot

1 to 7 ft

1 to 24 ft annular plot 1 to 59 ft

AZIMUTH

Record the azimuth from subplot, microplot, or annular plot center to the farthest right point

(facing the contrasting condition) where the boundary intersects the subplot, microplot, or annular plot circumference.




Values: 001 to 360

46


April 2000

4.0 SUBPLOT

Each subplot is described by a series of area parameters relating to topographic features and existing cover type. These data also relate to the microplot, since the microplot is contained within the subplot perimeter. If the subplot center cannot be accessed, do not collect and record data on the subplot.

4.1 SUBPLOT

Record the code corresponding to the number of the subplot.

When Collected: All subplots




4.2 SUBPLOT CENTER CONDITION

Record the CONDITION CLASS NUMBER of the condition class at the subplot center.

When collected: All subplots



Values: 1 to 9

4.3 MICROPLOT CENTER CONDITION

Record the CONDITION CLASS NUMBER of the condition class at the microplot center.

When collected: All microplots where subplot center is CONDITION STATUS = 1, 2, 3, 7



Values: 1 to 9

SLOPE

Record the angle of slope across the subplot to the nearest 1 percent. SUBPLOT SLOPE is determined by sighting the clinometer along a line parallel to the average incline (or decline) of each subplot. This angle is measured along the shortest pathway down slope before the drainage direction changes. To measure SUBPLOT SLOPE, Observer 1 should stand at the uphill edge of the subplot and sight Observer 2, who stands at the downhill edge of the subplot.

Sight Observer 2 at the same height as the eye-level of Observer 1. Read the slope directly from the percent scale of the clinometer.

If slope changes gradually across the subplot, record an average slope. If slope changes across the subplot but the slope is predominately of one direction, code the predominate slope percentage rather than the average. If the subplot falls directly on or straddles a canyon bottom or narrow ridge top, code the slope as follows:

• If the subplot falls directly between two side hills, code the average slope of the side hill(s).

47


April 2000

• If the subplot falls on a canyon bottom or on a narrow ridge top, but most of the area lies on one side hill, code the slope of the side hill.

When collected: All subplots with an accessible forest land condition class (CONDITION

STATUS = 1)



Values: 000 to 155

Record the aspect across the subplot, to the nearest 1 degree. SUBPLOT ASPECT is determined along the direction of slope for land surfaces with at least 5 percent slope in a generally uniform direction. SUBPLOT ASPECT is measured with a hand compass along the same direction used to determine slope. If aspect changes gradually across the subplot, record an average aspect. If aspect changes across the subplot but the aspect is predominately of one direction, code the predominate direction rather than the average.

If the subplot falls on or straddles a canyon bottom or narrow ridge top, code aspect as follows:

• Code the aspect of the ridge line or canyon bottom.

• If the subplot falls on a canyon bottom or on a narrow ridge top, but most of the area lies on one side hill, code the aspect of the side hill.


STATUS = 1)



Values:

000 no aspect, slope < 5 percent

001 1 degree

002 2

.

.

.

.

360 360 degrees, due north

DEPTH

Record to the nearest 0.1 ft the average approximate depth of water or snow covering the subplot at the time of data collection. This variable is used to indicate subplots where some variables

(e.g., seedling count, total heights) may be measured with less certainty due to conditions at the time of measurement.


STATUS = 1)

Field width: 2 digits (x.y)

MQO: +/- 0.5 ft at the time of measurement (no MQO after initial date of visit)

Values: 0.0 to 9.9

4.7 SUBPLOT/ANNULAR PLOT STATUS

Indicate whether or not this subplot currently has at least one accessible forested condition class.

In regions measuring the CORE OPTIONAL annular plot, indicate whether or not this annular plot currently has at least one forested condition class.

When collected: All forested Phase 3 plots

48


April 2000



Values:

0 No accessible forest land condition class

1 At least one accessible forest land condition class

4.8 SUBPLOT/ANNULAR PLOT CONDITION LIST (CORE OPTIONAL)

This is a listing of all condition classes located within the 24.0-ft radius around the subplot center.

In regions measuring the CORE OPTIONAL annular plot, this is a listing of all condition classes located within the 58.9-ft radius around the annular plot center. A maximum of four conditions is permitted at any individual subplot / annular plot. If a condition class has already been defined at a previously completed subplot / annular plot, use the same condition class number whenever that condition is encountered. Define new condition classes as they are encountered. If more than one condition class is listed here, boundary data are required. If only one condition class is listed, this condition is automatically assigned to the subplot center and microplot center. If less than four condition classes occur on this subplot, complete the remainder of this field with zeros.

For example, if condition 1 is the only condition class on a subplot, record 1000.

When collected: All forested Phase 3 plots




49


April 2000

5.0 TREE AND SAPLING DATA

Trees at least 5.0 inches in diameter are sampled within the subplot. ‘Tally trees’ are defined as all live and standing dead trees in accessible forest land condition classes encountered on the subplot the first time a subplot is established, and all trees that grow into a subplot thereafter.

These data yield information on tree growth, mortality, removals; coarse woody debris; wildlife habitats; forest structure and composition; biomass; and carbon sequestration.

Trees with a diameter at least 1.0 in but less than 5.0 in, termed saplings, are sampled within the microplot. ‘Tally saplings’ are defined as all live saplings in accessible forest land condition classes encountered the first time a microplot is established, and all saplings that grow into each microplot thereafter are included until they grow to 5.0 in or larger, at which time they are tallied on the 24.0 ft subplot and referenced (new azimuth and distance taken) to the subplot center.

For multi-stemmed western woodland species, a cumulative DRC is used to compute diameter as described in Sections 5.9 and 5.9.2.

Trees are alive if they have any living parts (leaves, buds, cambium) at or above the point of diameter measurement, either diameter at breast height (DBH) or diameter at root collar (DRC).

Trees that have been temporarily defoliated are still alive.

Once tallied, dead trees over 5.0 in diameter are tracked until they fall down. Working around dead trees is a safety hazard - crews should exercise extreme caution! Trees that are deemed unsafe to measure should be noted as such and left alone.

To qualify as a standing dead tally tree, dead trees must be standing (LEAN ANGLE = 0 or 1) with no part of the bole touching the ground, at least 4.5 ft tall and be at least 5.0 inches in diameter. Broken portions of trees that are completely separated from their base are not treated as separate trees. For western woodland species (Appendix 4) with multiple stems, a tree is considered down if more than 2/3 of the volume is no longer attached or upright; do not consider cut and removed volume.

Whether live or dead, standing trees do not have to be self-supported. They may be supported by other trees.

High stumps (trees that have been cut) do not qualify as standing dead trees.

Begin tallying trees at an azimuth of 001 degrees from subplot center and continue clockwise around the subplot. Repeat this sequence for trees on the microplot and again on the annular plot.

The following elements are recorded for all tally trees and tally saplings:

5.1 SUBPLOT

Record the subplot number where the tree occurs.

When Collected: All live and dead tally trees > 1.0 in DBH/DRC




51


April 2000

5.2 TREE RECORD NUMBER

Record a code to uniquely and permanently identify each tree on a given subplot. The TREE

RECORD NUMBERS must be unique within a subplot – being unique is more important than being sequential. In general, work clockwise from azimuth 001 to 360, and work outwards from subplot center to subplot edge. On remeasured plots, use the tree number assigned at the previous visit. Saplings tallied on microplots will retain their initially assigned tree number if they grow to tree size. Missed trees will be assigned the next available tree number. DO NOT renumber all plot trees in order to assign a more “correct” tree number to a missed tree.

Numbers assigned to trees that are subsequently found to be extra will be dropped and not reused.

If TREE RECORD NUMBERs are not assigned in the field, record 000.

NOTE: If this is a Phase 3 plot, match the trees on this point to the hard copy list provided.

Record the three-digit FHM tree number assigned to each standing tree. If the tree has grown into the plot since the previous field visit (not on the list), record 000.

When Collected: All live and standing dead tally trees > 1.0 in DBH/DRC



Values: 000, 001 to 999

Record the CONDITION CLASS NUMBER in which each tree is located. Often, a referenced boundary is approximate, and trees selected for tally are assigned to the actual condition in which they lie regardless of the recorded approximate boundary (Figure 9).




Values: 1 to 9

52


April 2000

Pine

Plantation

Upland

Hardwoods

Figure 9. Ragged CONDITION CLASS boundary and tree condition class designation.

5.4 AZIMUTH

Record the AZIMUTH from the subplot center (for trees > 5.0 in DBH/DRC) or the microplot center (for trees ≥ 1.0 in and < 5.0 in DBH/DRC), sight the center of the base of each tree with a compass. Sight to the geographic center for multi-stemmed western woodland species. The geographic center is a point of equal distance between all tallied stems for a given woodland tree.

Record AZIMUTH to the nearest degree. Use 360 for north.




Values: 001 to 360

Record the measured HORIZONTAL DISTANCE, to the nearest 0.1 ft, from the subplot center

(for trees > 5.0 in DBH/DRC) or microplot center (for trees ≥ 1.0 in and < 5.0 in DBH/DRC) to the pith of the tree at the base. For all multi-stemmed western woodland trees (woodland species indicated in Appendix 4), the HORIZONTAL DISTANCE is measured from subplot or microplot center to the "geographic center" of the tree. The geographic center is a point of equal distance between all tallied stems for a given woodland tree.


Field width: 3 digits (xx.y)

MQO: Microplot: +/- 0.2 ft, at least 90% of the time

Subplot: +/- 1.0 ft, at least 90% of the time

Annular plot: +/- 3.0 ft at least 90% of the time

Values: Microplot: 00.1 to 6.8

Subplot: 00.1 to 24.0

Annular plot: 00.1 to 58.9

53


April 2000

5.6 TREE

Record a current TREE STATUS for each tallied tree; this code is used to track the status of sample trees over time: as they first appear, as ingrowth, as they survive, and when they die or are removed. This information is needed to correctly assign volume information to the proper component of volume change.

When Collected: All live and dead tally trees > 1.0 in DBH/DRC



Values:

The following codes (1-2) are used on new, replacement, and remeasured plots:

2 Dead

remeasured plot – a tree that died due to causes other than direct human activity related to harvesting, silviculture or nonforest land clearing

The following codes (3-7) are only used on remeasured (SAMPLE KIND = 2) plots:

3 Removal - a tree that has been cut or killed by direct human activity related to harvesting, silvicultural activity or land clearing. The tree may or may not have been utilized. Only code trees killed by fire as removals if it was a prescribed burn.

4 Missed live tree - live at time of previous inventory, live now.

5 Missed mortality tree - live at time of previous inventory, dead now.

6 Missed dead tree - dead at time of previous inventory, dead now. history - tree is not presently in the sample. Tree was incorrectly tallied at the previous survey, was physically moved off the plot (natural causes such as a landslide), or currently is not tallied due to definition or procedural change.

Note: For microplot trees (saplings) which become trees, crews must collect new azimuth and distance information from the subplot center.

ANGLE

Record the code that describes the angle of lean of the tree. Trees supported by other trees or by their own branches are considered standing.

When Collected: CORE: All live and standing dead tally trees > 5.0 in DBH/DRC

CORE OPTIONAL: All live and standing dead tally trees > 1.0 in DBH/DRC



Values:

0

1

2

Standing (less than 45 degrees of lean)

Standing (more than 45 degrees of lean but not touching the ground)

Down (some part of the bole touching the ground)

54


April 2000

5.8 SPECIES

Record the appropriate SPECIES code from the list in Appendix 4. If you encounter a species not listed in Appendix 4 and are not sure if it should be tallied as a tree, consult your Field

Supervisor. If the species cannot be determined in the field, tally the tree, but bring branch samples, foliage, cones, flowers, bark, etc. to your supervisor for identification. If possible, collect samples outside the subplots from similar specimens and make a note to correct the SPECIES code later. Use the generic SPECIES code only when you encounter a tree where you know tree species but the species is not on the species list.



MQO: No errors for genus 100% of the time, no errors for species at least 95% of the time


5.9 DIAMETER

Record the actual diameter for each tallied tree to the last whole 0.1 in. Diameter is either diameter at breast height (DBH) or diameter at the root collar (DRC). Species requiring DRC are noted in Appendix 4 by “w”.

Each unit will apply methods that allow remeasurement of diameter (DBH or DRC) at the same point on the tree bole at successive visits. Valid methods include measuring distance from the ground to point of diameter, or marking the point of measurement with an aluminum nail, a scribe, crayon mark, or paint spot. If scribing is used, the mark should not penetrate the cambium. If a mark or nail is used, the diameter should not be taken until the mark or nail is in place. Do not scribe or nail trees less than 3.0 inches in diameter.

Do not nail or scribe tree species, such as aspen, that are highly susceptible to damaging agents introduced by these practices.

Remeasurement trees:

The diameter measurement must be taken at the same point on the tree as the previous measurement, if possible. The point of diameter measurement should not be moved unless the crew cannot physically remeasure that point (e.g., forks converge, tree buried by mudslide).

If there was an obvious recording error in the previous measurement (e.g., past crew measured

31.0 but recorded 13.0), crews should estimate and record the appropriate past diameter using local procedures.

For trees on the 24.0 ft radius subplot, measure single-stemmed trees 5.0 inches in diameter or larger, and multi-stemmed western woodland trees with a cumulative DRC of at least 5.0 in or larger. For multi-stemmed western woodland trees, include all stems 1.0 inches in diameter and larger, and at least 1.0 ft in height. (See formula in Section 5.9.2 to compute DRC.)

For trees on the 6.8 ft radius microplot, measure single-stemmed trees between 1.0 inch and 4.9 inches in diameter, and multi-stemmed western woodland trees with a cumulative DRC between

1.0 inch and 4.9 inches in diameter. For multi-stemmed western woodland trees, include all stems 1.0 inch in diameter and larger, and at least 1.0 ft in height. (See formula in Section 5.9.2 to compute DRC.)


Field width: 4 digits (xxx.y)

55


April 2000

MQO: +/- 0.1 in per 20.0 in of diameter on trees with a measured diameter, at least 95% of the time. For example: a tree with a diameter of 41.0 in would have a tolerance of plus or minus 0.3 in


5.9.1 DIAMETER AT BREAST HEIGHT (DBH)

For trees requiring diameter at breast height, measure DBH at 4.5 ft above the ground unless one of the special DBH situations listed below is present. Figures 10-18 show the proper use of the diameter tape.

Special DBH situations:

1. Tree with butt-swell or bottleneck: Measure these trees 1.5 ft above the end of the swell or bottleneck if the swell or bottleneck extends 3.0 ft or more above the ground (Figure

10).

1.5’

Diameter point

Figure 10. (1) Tree with swelled butt

4.5’

Diameter point

4.5 ft, consider the tree as one tree (Figure 11).

Measure the diameter below the swell, as near as possible to 4.5 ft above the ground on the uphill side. If the point of pith separation is below 4.5 ft above the ground, but above 1.0 ft, consider each fork a separate tree (Figure 12). For diameter measurement, measure each fork at 3.5 ft above the point of pith separation, or as near as possible to this point.

4.5’

3.0’ or more tree

3.5’

Pith intersection

Figure 11. (2) Forked

Figure 12. (2) Two trees

4.5’

56


April 2000

3. Tree with irregularities at DBH: On trees with swellings

(Figure 13), bumps, depressions, branches (Figure

14), etc. at DBH, diameter will be measured immediately above the irregularity at the place it ceases to affect normal stem form.

4.5’

Diameter point

Figure 13. (3) Tree with swelling

Diameter point

4.5’

4. Tree on slope: Measure diameter at 4.5 ft from the ground along the bole on the uphill side of the tree (Figure 15).

Figure 14. (3) Tree with branch

4.5’

Figure 15. (4.) Tree on a slope tree: Measure diameter at 4.5 ft from the ground along the bole. The 4.5 ft distance is measured along the underside face of the bole (Figure 16).

57

4.5’

DBH

Figure 16. (5) Leaning tree


April 2000 tree: On trees with turpentine face extending above 4.5 ft, estimate the diameter at 10.0 ft above the ground and multiply by 1.1 to estimate DBH outside bark.

7. Independent trees that grow together: Continue to treat them as two trees.

8. Diameter on trees missing a portion of bark or bole at the point of diameter measurement is measured and recorded to the nearest 0.1 in as the tree actually exists

(e.g., do not "reconstruct" the bole) (Figure 17).

Figure 17. (8) Tree with broken stem

9. Live windthrown tree: Measure from the top of the root collar along the length to 4.5 ft (Figure 18).

Root

Collar

Figure 18. (9) Tree on the ground

4.5’

5.9.2 DIAMETER AT ROOT COLLAR (DRC)

For species requiring diameter at the root collar (refer to Appendix 4), measure the diameter at the ground line or at the stem root collar, whichever is higher. For these trees, treat clumps of stems having a unified crown and common root stock as a single tree; examples include mesquite, juniper, and mountain mahogany. Treat stems of woodland species such as Gambel oak and Rocky Mountain maple as individual trees if they originate below the ground. For multistemmed trees, compute and record a cumulative DRC (see below); record individual stem diameters and a stem status (live or dead) on a separate form or menu as required.

DRC: Before measuring DRC, remove the loose material on the ground (e.g.

,litter) but not mineral soil. Measure just above any swells present, and in a location so that the diameter measurements are reflective of the volume above the stems (especially when trees are extremely deformed at the base).

Stems must be at least 1.0 ft in length and 1.0 inch in diameter to qualify for measurement; stems that are missing due to cutting or damage must have previously been at least 1.0 ft in length.

Whenever DRC is impossible or extremely difficult to measure with a diameter tape (e.g., due to thorns, extreme number of limbs), stems may be estimated and recorded to the nearest 1.0-in class.

Additional instructions for DRC measurements are illustrated in Figure 19.

58


April 2000

2 Computing and Recording DRC: For all tally trees requiring DRC, with at least one stem

1.0 inch in diameter or larger at the root collar, DRC is computed as the square root of the sum of the squared stem diameters. For a single-stemmed DRC tree, the computed

DRC is equal to the single diameter measured.

Use the following formula to compute DRC:

DRC = SQRT [SUM (stem diameter2)]

Round the result to the nearest 0.1 in. For example, a multi-stemmed woodland tree with stems of 12.2, 13.2, 3.8, and 22.1 would be calculated as:

DRC = SQRT (12.22 + 13.22 + 3.82 + 22.12)

= SQRT (825.93)

= 28.74

= 28.7

Figure 19. How to measure DRC in a variety of situations.

59


April 2000

60


April 2000

CHECK

Record this code to identify any irregularities in diameter measurement positions (e.g., abnormal swellings, diseases, damage, new measurement positions, etc.) that may affect use of this tree in diameter growth/change analyses.




Values:

0 Diameter measured accurately

1 Diameter

2 Diameter measured at different location than previous measurement

(remeasurement trees only)

5.11 PERCENT ROTTEN/MISSING CULL

Record the percent rotten or missing cubic-foot cull for all live tally trees > 5.0 in DBH/DRC

(CORE) and all standing dead tally trees > 5.0 in DBH/DRC (CORE OPTIONAL).

When Collected: CORE: All live tally trees > 5.0 in DBH/DRC

CORE OPTIONAL: All live and standing dead tally trees > 5.0 in DBH/DRC



Values: 0 to 99

Record the percentage of rotten and missing cubic-foot volume, to the nearest 1 percent. When estimating volume loss (tree cull), only consider the cull on the merchantable bole/portion of the tree, from a 1-ft stump to a 4-inch top. Do not include any cull estimate above actual length. For western woodland species, the merchantable portion is between the point of DRC measurement to a 1-inch DOB top.

Rotten and missing volume loss is often difficult to estimate. Refer to supplemental disease and insect pests field guides and local defect guidelines as an aid in identifying damaging agents and their impact on volume loss. Use your best judgment and be alert to such defect indicators as the following:

• Cankers or fruiting bodies.

• Swollen or punky knots.

• Dull, hollow sound of bole (use regional standards).

• Large dead limbs, especially those with frayed ends.

• Sawdust around the base of the tree.

Field Category Field % rot

0 0-9

Calculated % rot

0

1

2

3

10-39 25

40-74 50

Rot and missing cull is coded based on estimates of hollowness (based on hollow sound, or openings at base or on the bole), and visible indicators of fungi. Start from the most severe indicators (code 3) and work your way down. Use the volume tables to assess the contribution of

61


April 2000 rotten or damaged areas to total merchantable tree volume. Note that most cedar species have some cull in the butt log. code 3:

• Conks along entire bole, or 75% or more of the merchantable bole is rotten.

• Phellinus ignarius conk on hardwood.

• Echinodontium tinctorum or Phellinus pini conks present and spread along 60% or more of the bole.

• Polyporus amarus rot, conk, or shot hole cup present on incense cedar - Tree is a hardwood 200 yrs old and any rot is present - Juniper with any cull present code 2:

• Western hemlock with any conks.

• Douglas-fir with any conks other than Phellinus pini or Polyporus schweinitzii .

• Other conifers with conks other than Polyporus schweinitzii

• Quinine conk present.

• Echinodontium tinctorium or Fomes officionalis conks present code 1:

• Douglas-fir with Phellinus pini present.

• Conifers (other than western hemlock) with Polyporus schweinitzii

• Presence of indicators not listed above and bole is at least 10 percent rotten.

Record the TOTAL LENGTH of the tree, to the nearest 1.0 ft from ground level to the tip of the apical meristem. For trees growing on a slope, measure on the uphill side of the tree. If the tree has a broken or missing top, estimate what the total length would be if there were no missing or broken top. Forked trees should be treated the same as unforked trees.

When Collected: P2 CORE - All live and standing dead tally trees > 5.0 in DBH/DRC

P2 CORE OPTIONAL - All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 in DBH/DRC and all standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 in DBH/DRC

P3 - All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 in DBH/DRC and all standing dead tally trees > 5.0 in DBH/DRC


MQO: +/- 10% of true length, at least 90% of the time

Values: 005 to 400

5.13 ACTUAL LENGTH – For trees with broken or missing tops. Record the ACTUAL LENGTH of the tree to the nearest 1.0 ft from ground level to the highest remaining portion of the tree still present and attached to the bole. If the top is intact, this item may be omitted. Forked trees should be treated the same as unforked trees.

When Collected: P2 CORE - All live and standing dead tally trees (with broken or missing tops) >

5.0 in DBH/DRC

P2 CORE OPTIONAL - All live tally trees (with broken or missing tops) 1.0 –

4.9 in DBH/DRC

62


April 2000

P3 - All live and standing dead tally trees (with broken or missing tops) 1.0 –4.9 in DBH/DRC

P3 - All live and standing dead tally trees (with broken or missing tops) > 5.0 in

DBH/DRC



Values: 005 to 400

5.14 LENGTH

Record the code that indicates the method used to determine tree lengths.

When Collected: P2 CORE - All live and standing dead tally trees > 5.0 in DBH/DRC

P2 CORE OPTIONAL - All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 in DBH/DRC and all standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 in DBH/DRC

P3 - All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 in DBH/DRC and all standing dead tally trees > 5.0 in DBH/DRC



Values:

1 Total and actual lengths are field measured with a measurement instrument

(e.g., clinometer, relascope, tape)

2 Total length is visually estimated, actual length is measured with an instrument

3 Total and actual lengths are visually estimated

CLASS

Rate tree crowns in relation to the sunlight received and proximity to neighboring trees (Figure

20). Base the assessment on the position of the crown at the time of observation. Example: a formerly suppressed tree which is now dominant due to tree removal is classified as dominant.

When Collected: All live tally trees > 1.0 in DBH/DRC



Values:

Grown: Trees with crowns that received full light from above and from all sides throughout most of its life, particularly during its early developmental period.

2 Dominant: Trees with crown extending above the general level of the crown cover and receiving full light from above and partly from the sides. These trees are taller than the average trees in the stand and their crowns are well developed, but they could be somewhat crowded on the sides.

Also, trees whose crowns have received full light from above and from all sides during early development and most of their life. Their crown form or shape appears to be free of influence from neighboring trees.

3 Co-dominant: Trees with crowns at the general level of the crown canopy.

Crowns receive full light from above but little direct sunlight penetrates their sides. Usually they have medium-sized crowns and are somewhat crowded from

63


April 2000 the sides. In stagnated stands, co-dominant trees have small-sized crowns and are crowded on the sides.

4 Intermediate: Trees that are shorter than dominants and co-dominant, but their crowns extend into the canopy of co-dominant and dominant trees. They receive little direct light from above and none from the sides. As a result, intermediates usually have small crowns and are very crowded from the sides.

5 Overtopped: Trees with crowns entirely below the general level of the crown canopy that receive no direct sunlight either from above or the sides.

2 5 3 2 4 33 3

2 5 2 1

Figure 20. Examples of CROWN CLASS definitions.

5.16 UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN RATIO (P2 – CORE OPTIONAL, P3 – CORE)

Refer to P3 field guide Section 12, Crown Condition Classification.

5.17 COMPACTED CROWN RATIO

Record the COMPACTED CROWN RATIO for each live tally tree, 1.0 in and larger.

COMPACTED CROWN RATIO is that portion of the tree supporting live foliage and is expressed as a percentage of the actual tree height. To determine COMPACTED CROWN RATIO, ocularly transfer lower live branches to fill in large holes in the upper portion of the tree until a full, even crown is visualized.

When Collected: All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 in DBH/DRC



Values: 00 to 99

DAMAGE

Record up to two different damages per tree. Damage is characterized according to three attributes: location of damage, type of damage, and severity of damage. Damages must meet severity thresholds (defined in section 5.18.3, DAMAGE SEVERITY) in order to be recorded.

The tree is observed from all sides starting at the roots. Damage signs and symptoms are prioritized and recorded based on location in the following order: roots, roots and lower bole,

64


April 2000 lower bole, lower and upper bole, upper bole, crownstem, and branches recorded as location code 0 (for no damage), or DAMAGE LOCATION 1-9.

Within any given location, the hierarchy of damage follows the numeric order of DAMAGE TYPE possible for that location. The numeric order denotes decreasing significance as the code number goes up, i.e., DAMAGE TYPE 01 is more significant than DAMAGE TYPE 25. A maximum of two damages are recorded for each tree. If a tree has more than two damages that meet the threshold levels, the first two that are observed starting at the roots are recorded.

When multiple damages occur in the same place, the most damaging is recorded. For example, if a canker, DAMAGE TYPE 02, meets the threshold and has a conk growing in it, record only the canker. Another example: if an open wound meets threshold and also has resinosis, record only the open wound.

5.18.1 DAMAGE LOCATION 1

Record the location on the tree where DAMAGE TYPE 1 is found (Figure 23). If the same damage continues into two or more locations, record the appropriate code listed below, or if the combination of locations does not exist (damage extends from crownstem to roots), record the lowest location that best describes the damage (see Figure 24). Multiple damages may occur in the same location, but record the higher priority damage (lower code number) first. If the damages are coincident (a conk within a canker), record only the higher priority damage.

Figure 23. Location codes for damage.

65


April 2000

Figure 24. The damage runs from stump to crownstem.

Code here should be 02 (roots and "stump" and lower bole) which represents the lowest locations of this multilocation damage.

The “base of the live crown” is defined as the horizontal line which would touch the lowest part of the foliage, excluding branches towards the base of the tree which are less than 1.0 inch or more than 5 ft from the rest of the crown. See Section 5.16 (UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN RATIO) for more details.

When Collected: CORE: All live tally trees > 5.0 in DBH/DRC

CORE OPTIONAL: All live tally trees > 1.0 in DBH/DRC


MQO: +/- 1 location class, at least 80% of the time

66


April 2000

Values:

1 Roots (exposed) and stump (12 inches in height from ground level)

2 Roots, stump, and lower bole

3 Lower bole (lower half of the trunk between the stump and base of the live crown)

4 Lower and upper bole

5 Upper bole (upper half of the trunk between stump and base of the live crown)

6 Crownstem (main stem within the live crown area, above the base of the live crown)

7 Branches (>1 in at the point of attachment to the main crown stem within the live crown area)

8 Buds and shoots (the most recent year’s growth)

9 Foliage

5.18.2 DAMAGE TYPE 1

Record the first damage type observed that meets the damage threshold definition in the lowest location. Damage categories are recorded based on the numeric order that denotes decreasing significance from damage 01 - 31.

When Collected: All tally trees where DAMAGE LOCATION 1 > 0



Values: gall: Cankers may be caused by various agents but are most often caused by fungi. The bark and cambium are killed, and this is followed by death of the underlying wood, although the causal agent may or may not penetrate the wood. This results in areas of dead tissue that become deeper and wider, or galling (including galls caused by rusts), on roots, bole, or branches. Due to the difficulty in distinguishing some abnormal swellings (e.g., burls) from classic galls and cankers, all are recorded as damage 01. A canker may be:

Annual (enlarges only once and does so within an interval briefer than the growth cycle of the tree, usually less than one year),

Diffuse (enlarges without characteristic shape or noticeable callus formation at margins), or

Perennial (enlarges during more than one year - often has a target appearance).

2 Conks, fruiting bodies, and signs of advanced decay: Fruiting bodies on the main bole, crownstem, and at the point of the branch attachment are signs of decay. "Punky wood" is a sign of decay and is evidenced by soft, often moist, and degraded tissue.

67


April 2000

Cavities into the main bole that are oriented in such a way that they act as catchment basins for water are signs of decay. Bird cavities are signs of decay.

Rotten branches or branches with conks are not indicators of decay unless the threshold is met (>20% of branches are affected).

Rotting stumps associated with coppice regeneration (e.g., northern pin oak, maple) are excluded from coding. wounds: An opening or series of openings where bark has been removed or the inner wood has been exposed and no signs of advanced decay are present. Improper pruning wounds that cut into the wood of the main stem are coded as open wounds, if they meet the threshold; those which leave the main stemwood intact are excluded.

4 Resinosis or gummosis: The origin of areas of resin or gum (sap) exudation on branches and trunks.

5 Cracks and seams: Cracks in trees are separations along the radial plane. When they break out to the surface they often are called frost cracks. These cracks are not caused by frost or freezing temperature, though frost can be a major factor in their continued development. Cracks are most often caused by basal wounds or sprout stubs, and expand when temperatures drop rapidly. Seams develop as the tree attempts to seal the crack, although trees have no mechanism to compartmentalize this injury.

Lightning strikes are recorded as cracks when they do not meet the threshold for open wounds.

11 Broken bole or roots (less than 3 ft from bole): Broken roots within 3 ft from bole either from excavation or rootsprung for any reason. For example, those which have been excavated in a road cut or by animals.

Stem broken in the bole area (below the base of the live crown) and tree is still alive.

12 Brooms on roots or bole: Clustering of foliage about a common point on the trunk.

Examples include ash yellows witches' brooms on white and green ash and eastern and western conifers infected with dwarf mistletoes.

13 Broken or dead roots (beyond 3 ft): Roots beyond 3 ft from bole that are broken or dead.

20 Vines in the crown: Kudzu, grapevine, ivy, dodder, etc. smothers tree crowns. Vines are rated as a percentage of tree crown affected.

21 Loss of apical dominance, dead terminal: Mortality of the terminal of the crownstem caused by frost, insect, pathogen, or other causes.

22 Broken or dead: Branches that are broken or dead. Branches with no twigs are ignored and not coded as dead. Dead or broken branches attached to the bole or crownstem outside the live crown area are not coded. 20% of the main, first order portion of a branch must be broken for a branch to be coded as such.

23 Excessive branching or brooms within the live crown area: Brooms are a dense clustering of twigs or branches arising from a common point that occur within the live crown area. Includes abnormal clustering of vegetative structures and organs. This includes witches' brooms caused by ash yellows on green and white ash and those caused by dwarf mistletoes.

68


April 2000

24 Damaged buds, foliage or shoots: Insect feeding, shredded or distorted foliage, buds or shoots >50% affected, on at least 30% of foliage, buds or shoots. Also includes herbicide or frost-damaged foliage, buds or shoots.

25 Discoloration of foliage: At least 30% of the foliage is more than 50% affected. Affected foliage must be more of some color other than green. If the observer is unsure if the color is green, it is considered green and not discolored.

31 Other: Use when no other explanation is appropriate. Specify in comments section of

PDR for "tree notes." Code 31 is used to maintain consistency with the Phase 3 crown damage protocols.

Legal Combinations of DAMAGE TYPE by DAMAGE LOCATION:

For each of the following location codes, possible damage codes and damage definitions are presented. Minimum damage thresholds are described in Section 5.17.3, DAMAGE SEVERITY.

Location 1: Roots and stump

01

02

03

04

05

11

Canker, gall -- exceeds 20% of circumference of stump

Conks, fruiting bodies, and signs of advanced decay -- any occurrence

Open wounds -- exceeds 20% of circumference of stump

Resinosis or gummosis -- origin of flow width exceeds 20% of circumference of stump

Cracks and seams -- any occurrence

Broken bole or roots less than 3 ft from bole -- any occurrence

12

13

Brooms on roots or bole -- any occurrence.

Broken or dead roots -- exceeds 20% of roots, beyond 3 ft from bole, broken or dead

31 Other

Location 2: Roots, stump, and lower bole

01 Canker, gall -- exceeds 20% of circumference of stump

02

03

04


Open wounds – exceeds 20% at the point of occurrence, or for the portion in root zone, 20% of the circumference of stump

Resinosis or gummosis -- origin of flow width exceeds 20% at the point of

05

11 occurrence, or for the portion in root zone, 20% of circumference of stump.

Cracks and seams - any occurrence


12

13

Brooms on roots or bole - -any occurrence.

Broken or dead roots -- exceeds 20% of roots, beyond 3 ft from bole, broken or dead

31 Other

Location 3: Lower bole

01 Canker, gall -- exceeds 20% of circumference at the point of occurrence

02

03

04


Open wounds -- exceeds 20% of circumference at the point of occurrence

Resinosis or gummosis -- origin of flow width exceeds 20% of circumference at the point of occurrence

05

11

Cracks and seams -- any occurrence


12 Brooms on roots or bole -- any occurrence

31 Other

69


April 2000

Location 4: Lower and upper bole -- same as lower bole.

Location 5: Upper bole - same as lower bole.

Location 6: Crownstem

01

02

Canker, gall -- exceeds 20% of circumference of crownstem at the point of occurrence


03

04

Open wounds - exceeds 20% of circumference at the point of occurrence -- any occurrence

Resinosis or gummosis -- origin of flow width exceeds 20% of circumference at the point of occurrence

05

21

Cracks and seams -- all woody locations -- any occurrence.

Loss of apical dominance, dead terminal -- any occurence

31 Other

Location 7: Branches >1 in at the point of attachment to the main or crown stem

01

02

Canker, gall -- exceeds 20% of circumference on at least 20% of branches

Conks, fruiting bodies and signs of advanced decay -- more than 20% of

03

04

05

20 branches affected

Open wounds -- exceeds 20% of circumference at the point of occurrence on at least 20% of branches

Resinosis or gummosis -- origin of flow width exceeds 20% of circumference at the point of occurrence on at least 20% of branches

Cracks and seams -- all occurrences, and on at least 20% of branches

Vines in the crown -- more than 20% of live crown affected

22

23

Broken or dead -- more than 20% of branches affected within the live crown area

Excessive branching or brooms -- more than 20% of branches affected

31 Other

Location 8: Buds and shoots

24 Damaged buds, shoots or foliage - more than 30% of buds and shoots damaged more than 50%.

Location 9: Foliage

24 Damaged buds, shoots or foliage - more than 30% of foliage damaged more than

25

50%.

Discoloration of foliage - more than 30% of foliage discolored more than 50%.

31 Other.

5.18.3 DAMAGE SEVERITY 1

Record a code to indicate the amount of affected area (above threshold) in DAMAGE LOCATION

1 recorded for TREE DAMAGE 1. Severity codes vary depending on the type of damage recorded.

When Collected: All tally trees where DAMAGE LOCATION 1 > 0



Values: The codes and procedures for SEVERITY 1 values are defined for each DAMAGE TYPE

1.

DAMAGE TYPE Code 01 -- Canker, gall

70


April 2000

Measure the affected area from the margins (outer edges) of the canker or gall within any 3-ft vertical section in which at least 20% of circumference is affected at the point of occurrence. For location 7, and location 1, 20% of branches and roots beyond 3 ft, respectively, must be affected, then record in 10% classes. See Figure 25.

Severity classes for code 01 (percent of circumference affected):

Classes Code

20-29 2

30-39 3

40-49 4

50-59 5

60-69 6

70-79 7

80-89 8

90-99 9

Figure 25. A canker which exceeds threshold. Since 40% of circumference is visible from any side, and since over half the visible side is taken up by the canker, it obviously exceeds the 20% minimum circumference threshold.

DAMAGE TYPE Code 02 -- Conks, fruiting bodies, and signs of advanced decay

Severity classes for code 02: None . Enter code 0 regardless of severity, except for roots > 3 ft from the bole, or number of branches affected - 20%

DAMAGE TYPE Code 03 -- Open wounds

71


April 2000

The damaged area is measured at the widest point between the margins of the exposed wood within any 3-ft vertical section in which at least 20% of the circumference is affected at the point of occurrence. For location 7, and location 1, 20% of branches and roots beyond 3 ft, respectively, must be affected, then record in 10% classes. See Figure 26.

Severity Classes for code 03 (percent of circumference affected):

Classes Code

20-29 2

30-39 3

40-49 4

50-59 5

60-69 6

70-79 7

80-89 8

90-99 9

Figure 26. Multiple damage in "stump" and lower bole.

A=approximately 40% of tree circumference; B=portion of tree circumference affected by damage; C=vertical distance within one meter; D=midpoint of occurence at which circumference is measured.

DAMAGE TYPE Code 04 -- Resinosis or gummosis

Resinosis or gummosis is measured at the widest point of the origin of the flow width in which at least 20% of the circumference is affected at the point of occurrence. For location 7, and location 1, 20% of branches and roots beyond 3 ft, respectively, must be affected, then record in

10% classes.

Severity classes for code 04 (percent of circumference affected):

72


April 2000

Classes Code

20-29 2

30-39 3

40-49 4

50-59 5

60-69 6

70-79 7

80-89 8

90-99 9

DAMAGE TYPE Code 05 -- Cracks and seams

Severity class for code 05

Record "0" for the lowest location in which the crack occurs. For location 7, and location 1, 20% of branches and roots beyond 3 ft, respectively, must be affected, then record in 10% classes.

DAMAGE TYPE Code 11 -- Broken bole or roots less than 3 ft from bole

Severity classes for code 11: None. Enter code 0 regardless of severity.

DAMAGE TYPE Code 12 -- Brooms on roots or bole

Severity classes for code 12: None. Enter code 0 regardless of severity.

DAMAGE TYPE Code 13 -- Broken or dead roots

At least 20% of roots beyond 3 ft from bole that are broken or dead.

Severity classes for code 13 (percent of roots affected):

Classes Code

20-29 2

30-39 3

40-49 4

50-59 5

60-69 6

70-79 7

80-89 8

90-99 9

DAMAGE TYPE Code 20 -- Vines in crown

Severity classes for code 20 (percent of live crown affected):

73


April 2000

Classes Code

20-29 2

30-39 3

40-49 4

50-59 5

60-69 6

70-79 7

80-89 8

90-99 9

DAMAGE TYPE Code 21 -- Loss of apical dominance, dead terminal

Any occurrence ( > 1%) is recorded in 10% classes as a percent of the crownstem affected. Use trees of the same species and general DBH/DRC class in the area or look for the detached portion of the crownstem on the ground to aid in estimating percent affected. If a lateral branch has assumed the leader and is above where the previous terminal was, then no damage is recorded.

Severity classes for code 21:

Classes Code

01-09 0

10-19 1

20-29 2

30-39 3

40-49 4

50-59 5

60-69 6

70-79 7

80-89 8

90-99 9

DAMAGE TYPE Code 22 -- Broken or dead branches ( > 1in above the swelling at the point of attachment to the main or crown stem within the live crown area)

At least 20% of branches are broken or dead.

Severity classes for code 22 (percent of branches affected):

Classes Code

20-29 2

30-39 3

40-49 4

50-59 5

60-69 6

70-79 7

80-89 8

90-99 9

DAMAGE TYPE Code 23 -- Excessive branching or brooms

At least 20% of crownstem or branches affected with excessive branching or brooms.

74


April 2000

Severity classes for code 23 (percent of area affected):

Classes Code

20-29 2

30-39 3

40-49 4

50-59 5

60-69 6

70-79 7

80-89 8

90-99 9

DAMAGE TYPE Code 24 - Damaged buds, shoots or foliage

At least 30% of the buds, shoots or foliage (i.e., chewed or distorted) are more than 50% affected.


Classes Code

30-39 3

40-49

50-59

60-69

70-79

80-89

90-99

4

5

6

7

8

9

DAMAGE TYPE Code 25 - Discoloration of Foliage

At least 30% of the foliage is more than 50% affected.

Severity classes for code 25 (percent affected):

Code

30-39

40-49

50-59

60-69

70-79

80-89

90-99

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

DAMAGE TYPE Code 31 -- Other


None. Enter code 0 regardless of severity. Describe condition in tree notes.

Examples are shown in Figures 27-33.

75


April 2000

Figure 27. Examples of damage coding.

76


April 2000


77


April 2000

Figure 29. Examples of damage coding.

78


April 2000


79


April 2000


80


April 2000


81


April 2000


82


April 2000

Procedures to Record Multiple Occurrences of the Same Damage

Damage codes 01 (canker), 03 (open wounds), and 04 (resinosis/gummosis) must meet a threshold of 20 percent of the circumference at the point of occurrence, within any 3-ft section.

Multiple cankers or open wounds which are directly above one another pose no more threat to long term tree survival than would a single damage incidence of the same width. However, should multiple damages be located horizontally within any 3-ft section, the translocation of water and nutrients would be significantly affected. The widths of each individual damage are added and compared as a percent, to the total circumference at the midpoint of the 3-ft section (Figure

24).

Procedures to Measure Circumference Affected

A practical approach is to observe every face of the "stump", bole, or crownstem. About 40% of the circumference of a face can be observed at any one time. The damage is measured horizontally between the margins. If the cumulative area affected within a 3-ft section exceeds

1/2 of any face, then the 20% minimum threshold has been met. The percent of the circumference affected by damage is then estimated in 10% classes. If in doubt, measure the damage and circumference at the widest point of occurrence on the bole with a linear tape, and determine the percent affected.

5.18.4 DAMAGE LOCATION 2

Record the location on the tree where TREE DAMAGE 2 is found. Follow the same procedures as for DAMAGE LOCATION 1.

5.18.5 DAMAGE TYPE 2

RECORD the second damage typeobserved that meets the damage threshold definition in the lowest location. Follow the same procedures as for DAMAGE TYPE 1.

5.18.6 DAMAGE SEVERITY 2

Record the amount of affected area (above threshold) in DAMAGE LOCATION 2 recorded for

DAMAGE TYPE 2. Follow the same procedures as for DAMAGE SEVERITY 1.

5.19 CAUSE OF DEATH

Record a cause of death for all trees that have died or been cut since the previous survey. If cause of death cannot be reliably estimated, record unknown/not sure.

When Collected: All TREE STATUS = 1 at time 1 and TREE STATUS = 2 or 3 at time 2



Values:

20 Disease

30 Fire damage

50 Weather

60

70

80

90

Vegetation (suppression, competition, vines/kudzu)

Unknown/not sure/other (include notes)

Human-caused damage (cultural, logging, accidental damage, etc.)

Physical (hit by falling tree)

83

Record the estimated year that remeasured trees died or were cut. For each remeasured tree that has died or been cut since the previous inventory, record the 4-digit year in which the tree died. Mortality year is also recorded for trees on land that has been converted to a nonforest land use, if it can be determined that a tree died before the land was converted.

When Collected: All TREE STATUS = 1 at time 1 and TREE STATUS = 2 or 3 at time 2


MQO: +/- 1 year, 70% of the time for remeasurement cycles of 5 years

+/- 2 years, 70% of the time for remeasurement cycles of > 5 years

Values: 1995 or higher

5.21 DECAY

Record for each standing dead tally tree, 5.0 inches in diameter and larger, the code indicating the trees stage of decay.

When Collected: All standing dead tally trees > 5.0 in DBH/DRC


MQO: ±1 class, at least 90% of the time

Values: Use the following table for guidelines:

1

2

Decay stage

(code)

Limbs and branches

All present

Few limbs, no fine branches

3 Limb only

Top

Pointed 100

% Bark

Remaining

Sapwood presence and condition

*

Intact; sound,

Heartwood condition

Sound, hard,

* incipient decay, hard, original color original color

Sound at base, May be broken advanced decay, fibrous, firm incipient decay in outer edge of upper bole, hard, light to to soft, light brown

Broken Variable Sloughing; fibrous, soft, reddish brown

Incipient decay at base, advanced light to reddish brown decay throughout upper bole, fibrous, hard to firm,

4

5

Few or no stubs

None

Broken Variable Sloughing; cubical, soft, reddish to reddish brown

Advanced decay at base, sloughing from upper bole, dark brown

Broken Less than 20 Gone fibrous to cubical, soft, dark reddish brown

Sloughing, cubical, soft, dark brown,

OR fibrous, very soft, dark reddish brown, encased in hardened shell

* Characteristics are for Douglas-fir. Dead trees of other species may vary somewhat. Use this only as a guide.

84


April 2000


April 2000

Record the code to identify cut trees that have been removed from the site.

When Collected: All TREE STATUS = 3



Values:

0

1

Not utilized - can still be found on the site

Utilized – some portion of the tree cannot be found on site, assumed to have been removed

5.23 LENGTH TO DIAMETER MEASUREMENT POINT(CORE OPTIONAL)

Record this item when tree diameter measurement locations are not monumented. For those trees measured directly at 4.5 ft above the ground, leave this item blank. If the diameter is not measured at 4.5 ft, record the actual height from the ground, to the nearest 0.1 in, at which the diameter was measured for each tally tree, 1.0 in DBH and larger. Leave this item blank for western woodland species measured for diameter at root collar.

When Collected: CORE OPTIONAL: All live and dead tally trees (except western woodland species) > 1.0 in DBH


MQO: +/- 0.3 ft, at least 90% of the time

Values: 0.1 – 15.0

5.24 PERCENT ROUGH CULL (CORE OPTIONAL)

For each live tally tree 5.0-in DBH/DRC and larger, record the percentage of sound, dead cubicfoot volume to the nearest 1 percent. When estimating volume loss (tree cull), only consider the cull on the merchantable bole/portion of the tree, from a 1-ft stump to a 4-inch top. For western woodland species, the merchantable portion is between the pont of DRC measurement to a 1inch DOB top. Refer to local defect guidelines as an aid in determining cull volume for various damages such as fire, frost crack, etc.

When Collected: CORE OPTIONAL: All live tally trees > 5.0 in DBH/DRC



Values: 00 to 99

5.25 MISTLETOE CLASS (CORE OPTIONAL)

Rate all live conifer species, except juniper species, > 1.0 in diameter for dwarf mistletoe

( Arceuthobium spp.) infection. Use the Hawksworth six-class rating system: divide the live crown into thirds, and rate each third using the following scale (Figure 34):

0 No visible infection

1

2

Light infection -- < 50 percent of the total branches infected

Heavy infection -- > 50 percent of the total branches infected

Sum the three individual ratings to obtain and record a total mistletoe class (0 to 6) for the tree.

When Collected: CORE OPTIONAL: All live conifer (except juniper) tally trees > 1.0 in DBH/DRC


MQO: +/- 1 class, at least 90% of the time

Values: 0 to 6

85


April 2000

Figure 34. Example of the Hawksworth six-class rating system.

NOTES

Record notes pertaining to an individual tree as called for to explain or describe another variable.

When collected: All live and dead tally trees > 1.0 in DBH/DRC

Field width: Alphanumeric character field

MQO: N/A

Values: English language words, phrases and numbers

86


April 2000

6.0 SEEDLING

Stocking and regeneration information are obtained by counting seedlings within the 6.8 ft radius microplot located 90 degrees and 12.0 ft from each subplot center within each of the four subplots. Conifer seedlings must be at least 6.0 inches in length and less than 1.0 in at

DBH/DRC in order to qualify for tallying. Hardwood seedlings must be at least 12.0 inches in length and less than 1.0 in at DBH/DRC in order to qualify for tallying. For western woodland species, each stem on a single tree must be less than 1.0 inch in DRC. Seedlings are counted in groups by species and condition class, up to 5 individuals per species. Counts beyond 5 are coded as 6. Species are coded in order from most abundant to least abundant when SEEDLING

COUNT is coded as 6. Only count seedlings occurring in accessible forest land condition classes.

NUMBER

Use the procedures outlined in Section 4.1.

When Collected: All counts of seedlings

6.2 SPECIES




MQO: No errors for genus at least 90% of the time, no errors for species at least 85% of the time


CLASS



6.4 SEEDLING

Record the number of seedlings of each species, by condition class. Count up to 5 individuals by species; code 6 if there are more than 5 individuals of any given species in any given condition class. Code species in order from most abundant to least abundant when SEEDLING

COUNT is coded as 6.

When Collected: Each accessible forest land condition class on each microplot



Values:

0 None

1 to 5 Exact count

6 More than 5 individuals by species by condition class.

87


April 2000

7.0 SITE TREE INFORMATION

Site trees are a measure of site productivity expressed by the height to age relationship of dominant and co-dominant trees. If suitable site trees are available, site tree data are required for every accessible forest land condition class defined on a plot. An individual site tree may be used for more than one condition class where differences in condition classes are not the result of differences in site productivity. For example, when different condition classes are caused solely due to differences in reserved status, owner class, and/or disturbance-related differences in density (e.g., heavily thinned vs. unthinned), a site tree may be used for more than one condition class. When in doubt, do not use a site tree for more than one condition class.

7.1 SITE TREE SELECTION

Select at least 1 site tree for each accessible forest land condition class; select tree from a species common to the condition class being sampled, based on regional or local tree species selection criteria (Appendix 5 lists preferred site tree species by region). Select trees off the subplot where possible. Use only trees that have remained in a dominant or co-dominant crown position throughout their entire life span. If possible, trees should be 5.0 inches in diameter, or larger, and at least 20 years old. Trees that are visibly damaged, trees with ring patterns that exhibit signs of suppression, and trees with rotten cores should be rejected. If there are no acceptable site trees, record that in the plot notes and leave this section blank.

7.2 SITE TREE DATA VARIABLES

7.2.1 CONDITION CLASS LIST

List all CONDITION CLASSES that the site index data from this tree represent.

When Collected: All site trees



Values: 1 to 9 or 10000 to 98765

7.2.2 SPECIES

Use the same procedures described in Section 5.8 (Appendix 5 lists preferred site tree species by region).


7.2.3 DIAMETER

Use the same procedures described in Section 5.9.


7.2.4 SITE TREE LENGTH

With a clinometer or other approved instrument, measure the total length of the site tree from the ground to the top of the tree. Record to the nearest 1.0 ft. SITE TREE LENGTH must be measured; no estimates are permitted on site trees.




Values: 001 to 999

89


April 2000

7.2.5 TREE AGE AT DIAMETER

Record the tree age as determined by an increment sample. Bore the tree at the point of diameter measurement (DBH/DRC) with an increment borer. Count the rings between the outside edge of the core and the pith. Do not add years to get total age.



MQO: +/- 5 years, at least 95% of the time

Values: 001 to 999

7.2.6 SITE TREE NOTES

Record notes pertaining to an individual site tree.

When collected: All site trees as necessary

Field width: alphanumeric character field

MQO: N/A

Values: English language words, phrase and numbers

90


April 2000

8.0 NONFOREST/DENIED ACCESS/HAZARDOUS PLOTS

8.1 OVERVIEW

This section describes field procedures for attempted, field-visited nonforest, denied access, and hazardous plots. These plots are of interest from the standpoint that they may once have been forest, or that they may revert to forest or become accessible in the future. Thus, they are monitored to account for lands that move into and out of the forest land base. Only basic plot identification data are recorded on these plots.

A plot is considered nonforest if no part of it is currently located in forest land (CURRENT PLOT

STATUS = 1). A plot is inaccessible if access is prevented to the entire plot by the land owner or because of some hazardous situation.

No ground plots are established at nonforest or inaccessible sample locations. If a forest plot has been converted to nonforest or becomes inaccessible, the previous data are reconciled and an attempt is made to visit the plot during the next inventory. If a nonforest plot becomes forest or access is gained to a previously inaccessible plot, a new forest ground plot is installed. All nonforest and inaccessible plots are visited if there is any reasonable chance that they might include some forest land condition class.

8.2 PROCEDURE

Trees on previously forest land plots will be reconciled at data processing. There is a distinction between plots that have been clearcut, and plots that have been converted to another land use.

A clearcut plot is considered to be forest land until it is actively converted to another land use.

The procedures in this section do not apply to clearcuts unless and until the land is converted to a nonforest use. Additional information concerning land use classifications is contained in

Section 2.3.

In cases where a plot is inaccessible, but obviously contains no forest land, assign the plot to the appropriate nonforest land use. Access-denied and hazardous land uses are utilized only if there is a possibility the plot contains forest.

It is not necessary to establish or maintain any starting points, witness trees, boundaries, etc., on nonforest or inaccessible plots.

8.3 DATA

8.3.1 STATE


When Collected: All Nonforest/Denied Access/Hazardous plots.

8.3.2 COUNTY



NUMBER



91


April 2000

KIND



VERSION

Use the same procedures described in Section 1.5

8.3.6 CURRENT



8.3.7 QA STATUS (CORE OPTIONAL)



8.3.8 CREW TYPE (CORE OPTIONAL)



COORDINATES

Use the same procedures described in Section 1.18 to collect the following data items:

1.18.3 GPS UNIT

1.18.4 GPS SERIAL NUMBER

1.18.5 COORDINATE SYSTEM

1.18.6 LATITUDE

1.18.7 LONGITUDE

1.18.8 UTM ZONE

1.18.9 EASTING (X) UTM

1.18.10 NORTHING (Y) UTM

1.18.12 AZIMUTH TO PLOT CENTER

1.18.13 DISTANCE TO PLOT CENTER

1.18.14 GPS ELEVATION

1.18.15 GPS ERROR

1.18.16 NUMBER OF READINGS

8.3.8 CONDITION STATUS 1

Record the CONDITION STATUS at the center of Subplot 1. Use the same procedures described in Section 2.2.

When Collected: All Nonforest/Denied Access/Hazardous plots

8.3.9 CONDITION STATUS 2 (CORE OPTIONAL)

Record the CONDITION STATUS at the center of Subplot 2. Use the same procedure described in Section 2.2

When collected: All Nonforest/Denied Access/Hazardous plots

92


April 2000







8.3.12 PLOT-LEVEL NOTES


8.3.13 P3 HEXAGON NUMBER


8.3.14 P3 PLOT NUMBER


93


April 2000

9 FOREST HEALTH MONITORING OZONE INDICATOR

9.0 QUICK REFERENCE PDR SCREENS

Ozone indicator data are recorded on portable data recorders (PDRs). Each of the tables below corresponds to a PDR screen or portion of a screen that includes ozone measurement variables.

The tables serve as a quick reference for the Tally screens by indexing the Subsections in this chapter where the variables on each screen are defined. An "x" in one of these tables means that the variable is prompted for Sample Kind 1, on the FIA Phase 3 grid, and the field crew is required to complete that field.

For a written summary of the Tally Procedures, Definitions, and Codes for the ozone measurement variables refer to subsection 9.1.4. The PDR Field Manual also provides a selfguided tour of the PDR screens for the ozone indicator.

Table 9-1. Plot Identification Screen (Subsection 9.1.4 and 9.6)

Measurement

Variables

BioSite Availability

Bio Site Status

PDR

Prompt

(BioSite)

(NewSite)

Sample Kind

1

X

X

Sub

1

Section

9.6.2

9.1.4

Plot Moisture

Plot Size

First Species

Number of Plants

Second Species

Number of Plants

Third Species

Number of Plants

(PlotWet)

(PlotSiz)

(Spec1)

(#Plant1)

(Spec2)

(#Plant2)

(Spec3)

(#Plant3)

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

9.1.4

9.1.4

9.6.3

9.1.4

9.6.3

9.1.4

9.6.3

9.1.4

Table 9-2. Bioindicator Plot Identification Screen(Subsection 9.1.5 and 9.6) 1

Measurement PDR Sample Kind Sub Section

Variables

BioSite Availability

Bio Site Status

Plot Size

Plot Status

Elevation

Aspect

Terrain Position

Soil Depth

Soil Drainage

BioSite Disturbance

Prompt

(BioSite)

(NewSite)

(PlotSiz)

(PltStat)

(Elev)

(Aspct)

(TerrPos)

(SoilDep)

(SoilDrn)

(Disturb)

1 x x x x x x x x x x

9.6.2

9.1.3

9.1.3

9.1.3

1.18.14

4.5

-

9.1.3

9.1.3

9.1.3

Table 9-3. Plot Notes Screen (Subsection 9.1.4and 9.6.5)

1

Measurement

Variables

Remarks1

PDR

Prompt

(Rem1)

Sample Kind

1 x

Sub Section

9.1.4

95


April 2000

96


April 2000

Table 9-4. Bio Species Screen (Symptom Scoring, Subsection 9.6.5)

1

Measurement

Variables

Species

Amount of Injury

Severity of Injury

PDR

Prompt

(Species)

(Amount)

(Severty)

Sample Kind

1 x x x

Sub Section

9.6.3

9.6.4

9.6.4

1

Note: The variables in Table 9-1 appear on the Tally Plot Identification screen for Phase 3 plots. The variables in Table 9-2, 9-3, and 9-4 appear when the Bioindicator Option is selected from the Tally main menu for Phase 3 plots.

97


April 2000

9.1 OVERVIEW

Air pollutants, such as ground-level ozone, are known to interact with forest ecosystems. Ozone is the only regional gaseous air pollutant that is frequently measured at known phytotoxic levels (Cleveland and Graedel, 1979; Lefohn and Pinkerton, 1988). Ozone pollution has been shown to have an adverse effect on tree growth and alter tree succession, species composition, and pest interactions (Forest Health and Ozone, 1987; Miller and Millecan, 1971; Smith, 1974). In addition, we know that ozone causes direct foliar injury to many species (Skelly et al., 1987; Treshow and Stewart, 1973). We can use this visible injury response to detect and monitor ozone stress in the forest environment. This approach is known as biomonitoring and the plant species used are known as bioindicators (Manning and Feder, 1980). In the enhanced FIA Program, ozone bioindicator plants are used to monitor changes in air quality across a region, and to assess the relationship between ozone air quality and Phase 2 / Phase 3 indicators of forest condition (e.g., growth increment and dieback).

A useful bioindicator plant may be a tree, a woody shrub, or a nonwoody herb species. The essential characteristic is that the species respond to ambient levels of ozone pollution with distinct visible foliar symptoms that are easy to diagnose. Field studies and/or fumigation experiments have identified ozone sensitive species and characterized the ozone specific foliar response for both eastern (Davis and

Umbach, 1981; Duchelle and Skelly, 1981; Krupa and Manning, 1988) and western (Richards et al.,

1968; Mavity et al., 1995; Brace, 1996) bioindicators. Foliar injury symptoms include distinct patterns of coloration, often associated with accelerated senescence.

This section describes procedures to select on-plot sites for ozone biomonitoring close to the FIA

Phase 3 ground plots, and to evaluate ozone injury on the foliage of sensitive plant species. Ozone sites off the FIA grid may also be established in different physiographic or political regions (e.g., States or

USFS regions) to improve the regional assessment of this indicator. These off-plot evaluations are done using the same methodology as the on-plot activities and are just as important.

9.1.1 SCOPE AND APPLICATION

The scope of this indicator is national, but procedures are amended regionally as needed, particularly with regard to suitable sites and target species. Other variables, such as number of species, number of plants, and methods of scoring are standardized nationally. The procedures, reporting, and assessment goals were developed with the following considerations:

1. Keeping the evaluation of ozone indicator plants close enough to the FIA Phase 3 grid to allow links between phytotoxic levels of ozone on the sensitive species and other on-plot indicators;

2. Keeping estimated errors for the ozone indicator measurements below 10%; and

3. Addressing seasonal variability in ozone injury. We know that ozone injury must reach an undefined threshold within a leaf before the injury becomes visible to the human eye, and then tends to be cumulative over the growing season until fall senescence masks the symptoms.

NOTE: There are certain regions of the country where ambient ozone concentrations, during the growing season, routinely exceed levels that are known to injure sensitive plants. Other regions have relatively clean air. In regions with poor air quality, the crew data underscore the extent and severity of ozone pollution in our national forests. In cleaner regions, the emphasis must be on establishing a baseline for the ozone indicator. In this regard, field crews collecting mostly zeros for the ozone injury variables are making a significant contribution to the national FIA data base.

98


April 2000

9.1.2 SUMMARY OF METHOD

Crew procedures include the selection of a suitable site for symptom evaluation, identification of one to three known ozone-sensitive species at the site, and identification of ozone injury on the foliage of up to 30 plants of each species . Each plant is evaluated for the percentage of injured area and severity of injury on a five point scale. Field crews record information on the location and size of the opening used for biomonitoring and record injury amount and severity ratings for each plant.

In the East, to eliminate problems with seasonal variability in ozone response, all foliar evaluations are conducted during a four week window towards the end of the growing season. In the West, due to differences in growing season, topography, target species, and other regional factors that influence plant response to ozone, there is no abbreviated evaluation window for this indicator. Field crews will collect foliar injury data from the first to the last day of the field season.

Foliar injury data are also collected from off-plot ozone sites established in each state by Regional

Cooperators. These supplementary ozone sites are standardized for certain site characteristics that influence ozone uptake by sensitive plants (Heck, 1968; Krupa and Manning, 1988). They are intended to provide ozone injury information under optimal conditions of field exposure and to improve the regional responsiveness of the ozone indicator.

Voucher specimens (pressed leaves with symptoms) are collected for each species for proper symptom identification. For each voucher, injury type and location codes are recorded to fully describe the injury observed in the field. Additional quality control measures include field audits and remeasurement of 10% of the biomonitoring sites.

No specialized safety precautions are necessary to complete the field work for the ozone indicator.

9.1.3 INTERFERENCES

Primary interferences to consider are the possible lack of suitable bioindicator plants on the Phase 3 grid, and/or environmental conditions at the plot that may render the plants not susceptible to ozone. For example, low rainfall or droughty soils at some locations may reduce rates of gas exchange in the plants so that they are less susceptible to pollutants in the air. In addition, plots may fall on dry south-facing slopes or exposed ridgetops where the target bioindicator plants do not grow. Establishing off-plot sites helps address these issues. Ozone is a regional pollutant, affecting broad geographical areas. Thus, the data on ozone injury collected at an off-plot site conducive to the growth of bioindicator plants can be used to assess the potential for ozone injury on the Phase 3 ground plots within the same physiographic region.

The other serious consideration is discriminating ozone foliar injury symptoms from other abiotic or biotic foliar injuries. The target bioindicator species were selected on the basis of their susceptibility to ozone and on the development of distinct injury symptoms characteristic of “ classic ” foliar ozone injury.

However, the recognition of ozone injury symptoms in the field is not an exact science, and many other foliar injury symptoms can be mistaken for ozone injury. This issue is addressed in the regional training sessions on the recognition of ozone injury and other mimicking symptoms. Crews are also instructed to collect voucher specimens of both known and suspected ozone injury in the field to send to the Western

Regional Trainer for verification.

9.1.4 SUMMARY OF TALLY PROCEDURES, DEFINITIONS, AND CODES

From the Tally Main Menu, the program prompts crews to indicate if a forested or nonforested plot has a suitable site for biomonitoring. If so, crews are prompted to provide information on plot size, species, and plant counts (Table 9-1). Crews are also prompted to complete additional PDR screens accessed from Tally Main Menu, Bioindicator Plants Option.

99


April 2000

The Bioindicator Plot Identification Screen (Table 9-2) includes a record of plot status (on or off-plot) and detail on site characteristics that influence ozone injury expression. The Plot Notes Screen (Table 9-3) prompts crews to add additional information that will help interpret the injury results and/or assist subsequent crews collecting data at the same location. The Bio Species Screen (Table 9-4) prompts crews for injury amount and severity codes on a plant by plant basis. This screen includes a pop-up menu which keeps a running total of numbers of plants and species evaluated by the field crews.

Additional help screens may be accessed for any variable, from any of the 3 screens presented under

Tally, Bioindicator Plants Option.

Measurement codes are defined as follows:

BIOSITE AVAILABILITY (BioSite)

Specify whether or not the plot has a suitable site for biomonitoring.

Code Definition

0

1

A bioindicator site is not available at this plot.

A site is available.

BIOSITE STATUS (NewSite)

Specify whether or not the biosite is new (located and mapped for the first time this year).

Code Definition

0 This site is not new; It was located and mapped in some previous year.

1 This site is new. (This includes new, replacement sites for established Phase 3 plots.)

PLOT MOISTURE (PlotWet)

Specify the predominant soil and/or site moisture characteristics where the bioindicator species are found. If conditions vary markedly across the site, describe this in the plot notes and draw it in on the biosite map.

Code Definition

1

2

3

Wet or damp. Examples include riparian zones and wet or damp areas along a stream, meadow, or bottom land.

Moderately dry. Examples include grassland or meadow, and North or East facing slopes.

Very dry. Examples include exposed rocky ledges, desert, and some alpine areas.

PLOT SIZE (PlotSiz)

Estimate and record the size of the opening used for biomonitoring.

Code Definition

1

2

3

4

Greater than 1.2 hectares (3 acres).

0.2 to 1.2 hectares (1/2 to 3 acres).

Less than 0.2 hectare (1/2 acre).

Under forest canopy; no opening.

PLOT STATUS (PltStat)

Specify whether the biomonitoring site is on-plot or off-plot.

Code Definition

1

2

Standard field plot (on-plot).

Bioindicator site is more than 3 miles from the phase 3 ground plot (off-plot).

100


April 2000

FIRST, SECOND, and THIRD SPECIES (Spec1, Spec2, Spec3)

Record the three digit code that identifies each species on site. Codes for the bioindicator species are listed on the help screen for this variable. The list is prioritized for species selection; the top three species are the top priority for choice of species. A bioindicator plant that is also a tree species has the same code as that presented in the FIA Phase 2 Field Manual.

NUMBER OF PLANTS (#Plant1, #Plant2, #Plant3)

Estimate and record the number of plants of each species on site.

Code Definition

1 Fewer than 10 plants of this species are available on site for evaluation.

2 10 or more plants of this species are available.

ELEVATION, ASPECT, and TERRAIN POSITION are coded and defined exactly as presented in the FIA

Phase 2 Field Manual.

Note: For all site variables, specify the predominant elevation, aspect, terrain position, soil depth, soil drainage, and disturbance where the bioindicator species are found. If conditions vary markedly across the site, or by species, then describe this in the plot notes or on the site map. On the PDR, specify the elevation, aspect, terrain position, soil depth, soil drainage, and disturbance for the highest priority species (Subsection 9.6.2) found on the site.

SOIL DEPTH (SoilDep)

Specify whether or not bedrock is exposed on the biomonitoring site.

Code Definition

1

2

Bedrock not exposed

Bedrock exposed

SOIL DRAINAGE (SoilDrn)

Characterize and record the soil drainage on the biomonitoring site.

Code Definition drained

2 Wet

BIOSITE DISTURBANCE (Disturb)

Specify whether there is evidence of any recent or significant disturbance to the monitoring site, man-made or natural. If so, describe it in the plot notes.

Code Definition

0

1

2

No recent or significant disturbance.

Evidence of overuse. Examples include any human activity causing obvious soil compaction, erosion, or contamination.

Other. Examples include significant natural disturbance such as fire, wind, flooding, etc.

101


April 2000

SPECIES (Species)

Record the three digit code that identifies each species on site. Codes for the bioindicator species are listed on the help screen for this variable. A bioindicator plant that is also a tree species has the same code as that presented in the FIA Phase 2 Field Manual. Species codes may be entered in the order they are encountered as the field crew walks through the site evaluating plants. A pop-up menu keeps a running total of numbers of plants and species evaluated.

AMOUNT OF INJURY (Amount)

Estimate and record the percentage of leaves on the plant with ozone injury symptoms relative to the total number of leaves on the plant. The percent scale code and definitions are presented in Subsection

9.6.4.

SEVERITY OF INJURY (Severity)

Estimate and record the mean severity of symptoms on injured foliage. The percent scale code and definitions are presented in Subsection 9.6.4.

REMARKS1 and REMARKS2 (Rem1, Rem2)

Record any information on site characteristics, safety, plant location, injury patterns, recent rainfall amounts, etc., that will assist subsequent crews visiting the site or help interpret the results.

9.2 SAMPLE COLLECTION, PRESERVATION, AND STORAGE

Leaf samples are collected by field crews, cooperators, and all QA staff. They are to be placed in a small plant press immediately after removal from the selected plant. This is to preserve the integrity of the leaf sample and the injury symptoms until they can be verified by the National Indicator Advisor. A data sheet identifying the field crew and plot location is to be filled out and mailed with each sample.

9.3 EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES

• A large diameter, 10X hand lens for close examination of plant leaves for ozone injury

• Reference photographs and laminated leaf samples to aid in symptom identification.

• A small plant press with cardboard inserts to store leaves with ozone injury until they can be mailed in for symptom validation.

• Stamped, addressed envelopes for mailing the leaf vouchers to the Western Regional Trainer.

• Stiff paper or cardboard for protecting the leaf vouchers in the mailing envelopes.

• Flagging: for temporary marking of sites or sample plants.

• Field data sheets (3): One for documenting the amount and severity ratings for each plot in the event of a PDR failure; one for preparing the location map of the suitable sites for the permanent plot file; and one for recording information about the pressed leaf samples for quality control purposes (see Appendix 9.B).

102


April 2000

9.4 CALIBRATION AND STANDARDIZATION

The field crew foresters are trained and tested in site selection, species and symptom identification and the quantification of foliar injury symptoms.

9.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

The National Ozone Advisor and one or more individuals in each region assume quality control responsibilities for the field season. Regional Advisors meet during a preseason session to refine methods and establish a unified approach to training, audits, and debriefing. Their responsibilities include:

(1) training and certifying the State trainers and/or field crews as needed for their region, (2) documenting hot audits of the field crews, (3) overseeing the field crew refresher session held just prior to the evaluation window for this indicator (East only), (4) validating the ozone injury symptom recorded by the field crews and cooperators, (5) assisting in the field with remeasurement procedures for symptom quantification, and (6) conducting a debriefing session for the indicator.

9.5.1 TRAINING

Each field crew member is trained and tested for familiarity with the site selection, species selection, and data collection procedures, and their ability to recognize ozone injury and discriminate against mimicking symptoms. The Regional Trainer or Field Supervisor is available to answer questions and provide retraining as needed throughout the field season.

9.5.2 FIELD AUDITS / REMEASUREMENTS

Field crew supervisors audit the field crews and remeasure a subsample of the on-plot biosites linked to the Phase 3 ground plots in each region. Auditing procedures cover species selection, symptom identification, and quantification of injury, as well as foliar sample collection, preservation and shipment.

9.5.3 VOUCHER SPECIMENS

Field crews, cooperators, and all QA staff collect leaf samples on the ozone biomonitoring sites

(on or off plot) according to procedures outlined in Subsection 9.6.5. These voucher specimens are pressed and mailed to the Western Regional Trainer for validation of the ozone symptom. If

QA staff and regular field crews happen to be evaluating the same site at the same time, they collect and mail separate vouchers.

103


April 2000

9.5.4 MEASUREMENT QUALITY OBJECTIVES

Table 9-5 lists measurement quality objectives for the ozone indicator.

Table 9-5. Measurement Quality Objectives

Plot Level Reporting Data Quality

Variables

Bioindicator species

For each species:

No. stems evaluated

No. stems injured

Amount of injury

Severity of injury

Symptom verified(TS)

Symptom verified(FS)

*

*

Units species code number

Ratio

5 classes

5 classes yes or no yes or no

Limits

+/- 1 species

+/- 10 percent

+/- 10 percent

90% @ +/- 1 class

90% @ +/- 1 class

90% agreement

100% agreement

* TS = Training Session; FS = Field Session

Regional Advisors and Field Supervisors who are certified for the ozone indicator have the authority to implement whatever corrective action is needed in the field (e.g., retraining and retesting).

9.5.5 METHOD PERFORMANCE

Method performance is determined through analyses of the quality control data collected at the training sessions and during the field season.

Results of the field audits and remeasurement activities are used to assess the ability of the field crews to meet measurement quality objectives for site selection, identification of bioindicator species, number of stems evaluated, number of stems injured, and amount and severity of injury. Voucher leaf samples are also used to assess measurement quality for identification of the ozone injury symptom. If the measurement quality objectives are not met, the data will not be used.

9.5.6 COMMUNICATIONS

Any questions arising during the field season that cannot be answered by the Field Supervisor or

State Coordinator, should be directed to the National Indicator Advisor for the ozone indicator or to the

Western Regional Trainer. If field crews try and are unable to reach the National Advisor or the Western

Regional Trainer they may call the Regional Advisors for the North Central States, as indicated below.

Keep in mind that Advisors may be in the field and, therefore, unavailable for phone calls during normal work-day hours. Messages left on answering machines should clearly identify who you are and when, where, and how to return your call. Please, be aware of differences in time zones and use email, if possible.

104


April 2000

National Advisor (East and West):

Gretchen Smith Phone: (413) 545-1680

Holdsworth Hall (978) 544-7186 (< 7am + > 7pm)

University of Massachusetts

Department of Forestry and Wildlife Management

Amherst, MA 01003-0130

e-mail: gcsmith@forwild.umass.edu

Western Regional Trainer:

Pat Temple Phone: (909) 680-1583

USDA Forest Service

PSW Experiment Station

4955 Canyon Crest Drive

Riverside, CA 92506

e-mail: ptemple/psw_rfl@fs.fed.us

or: temple_p_j@compuserve.com

Regional Advisors for the North Central Region:

Ed Jepsen Phone: (608) 266-3538

Wisconsin Department of Natural Resources

101 South Webster Street

Madison, WI 53707

e-mail: jepsee@dnr.state.wi.us

Teague Prichard Phone: (608) 264-8883

(same as above)

e-mail : pricht@dnr.state.wi.us

9.6 PROCEDURE

NOTE: In the following discussion, use of the word "plot" refers to the permanent FIA Phase 3 Grid. Use of the word "site" refers to the open area used for the ozone indicator evaluations that may be on-plot or off-plot.

The primary objective of the field crew procedures for the ozone indicator is to establish an ozone biomonitoring site at each FIA Phase 3 ground plot . These sites will be used to detect and monitor trends in ozone air pollution injury on sensitive species. Procedures include the selection of a suitable site for symptom evaluation, identification of three known ozone-sensitive species at the site, symptom identification and scoring on the foliage of 30 plants of each of three species, and the collection of voucher leaf samples. If three species cannot be found at a site, a lesser number of species is still evaluated. If 30 plants of each species cannot be found at the site, a lesser number (between 10 and 30) is still evaluated. Each individual plant with ozone injury is scored for amount and severity of injury.

Plants used for the selection of leaf vouchers are also evaluated for injury location and type. If a plant does not have ozone injury, it is still tallied with zeros for the amount and severity measurements. A data sheet and map , identifying key characteristics of the bioindicator site, is prepared for each plot. If a plot has no bioindicator site, this information is recorded on the PDR.

In the following discussion, it should be noted that site selection procedures depend on whether crews are establishing new Phase 3 plots or revisiting established plots. However, procedures for

105


April 2000 species and plant selection, symptom identification and scoring, and collection of leaf samples for verification of the ozone symptom are the same for all crews.

9.6.1 SITE SELECTION ON PLOT

States in the Interior West (INT) and West Coast (WC) Regions, that are establishing the FIA Phase

3 grid for the first time, complete the site selection procedures described below at each Phase 3 ground plot visited by the crews during the field season. States in the INT and WC Regions with established sites are strongly encouraged to select and map new sites as needed throughout the field season, but the focus of the field activities should be on symptom quantification.

Crews are given maximum flexibility to select the bioindicator evaluation site that, in their judgement, provides the best opportunity for quality data collection. A crew locates and maps the largest, most easily accessible opening that is within three miles (4.8 km) of the Phase 3 ground plot and more than

100 feet (30 m) from an improved road. The crew is not expected to measure distance or elevation, but to use the numbers given as general guidelines in the site selection process. There are no minimum plot size or distance requirements, but a site must contain at least ten individuals of at least one bioindicator species to be evaluated for ozone injury.

NOTE : In many parts of the West, the forested landscape is characterized by large natural openings.

Often, in these open forests, biosites overlap the FIA Phase 3 ground plot. Sites may also be located along the vehicle access route to the plot or within walking distance of the course-to-plot (or whatever alternate course may have been established to access the Phase 3 plot). In forests that are less open, examples of suitable openings include old logging sites and abandoned pasture or farmland where you are reasonably certain that soil/site conditions are stable and free of chemical contaminants.

State and county parks and wildlife areas also provide good ozone sites. Avoid open areas where plants are obviously stressed by some other factor that could mimic the ozone response. Do not select a site under a high-tension power line or on or near an active or reclaimed landfill. No more than 30 minutes should be spent locating the bioindicator evaluation site.

The best site is the largest, easily accessible open area with the most ozone indicator species. The site is described as an open area because this is the usual case, but there may be some instances where the appropriate number of bioindicator plants are found under the canopy. The term "open" is defined as

<40 percent crown closure, or where the woody vegetation is sparse or not overhead. Easy access means the site is easy to get to, easy and safe to walk around in, and relatively close to the Phase 3 ground plot. If you find more than one opening, then select the wettest site. If it is difficult to judge relative wetness, or if there is no significant difference in wetness between sites, then select the site with more than one species. If there is only one species present, then select the site with the most plants.

Remember that the only site requirement is that there be at least 10 plants of one ozone sensitive species on site.

NOTE : A biosite that is close to the FIA ground plot has the same value as a biosite located some distance away. It is preferable to collect data from a good site with high plant counts and characteristics that are conducive to bioindicator plant growth, without regard to distance from the plot, then to collect data from a very dry or highly disturbed site. Ozone is a regional pollutant, affecting large geographic areas. Thus, data from more distant sites can still be used to assess the potential for ozone injury at associated plots.

Once an evaluation site has been located, a permanent map is made by the crew, which will be used by audit, and regular crews in subsequent visits to the plot (see Figure 9-1). This bioindicator site map is filed along with the corresponding tree-tally plot file, so that it is readily available to whoever needs it.

NOTE: Experienced crews, familiar with the territory surrounding the FIA Phase 3 ground plot are encouraged to look off-plot for the best biomonitoring sites. Off-plot sites are, by definition, more than 3

106


April 2000 miles (4.8 km) from the Phase 3 ground plot. An off-plot site is preferable to no site and to an on-plot site with low species and plant counts, or that otherwise barely meets the site selection guidelines. The best off-plot sites are large open areas, greater than 1.2 hectares (3 acres), containing 3 or more indicator species with soil and site conditions that favor injury (e.g., low drought potential and minimal disturbance).

107


April 2000

Figure 9-1. Example of a well-drawn map showing the location of the biosite and the approximate location of the bioindicator species and other key landmarks. Road names and North arrow are also included.

9.6.1.1 NEW PLOTS

Site selection procedures begin either in-office, with a review of the plot photos, or in the field if no suitable opening is visible on the plot photos. Ideally, candidate sites are visited prior to the beginning of the field season by a reconnaissance team. If this is not possible, site selection occurs at the time of plot establishment. A plot without a suitable site (less than the minimum number of plants or species) is not directly evaluated for this indicator.

The following table may be used as a decision guide for site selection:

DECISION TABLE

Access:

First Choice = Best Site Second Choice

Easy access with no Easy access; little or no

Third Choice

Easy access; some

Size of opening:

Site Moisture:

Plant Numbers: disturbance to site

> 3 acres (1.2 ha)

Wet or damp area, e.g., riparian zone, meadow or bottom land. No obvious soil compaction.

Greater than 15 plants of 3 or more species disturbance

Between 0.5 to 3 acres

Moderately dry area ,e.g., grassland or NE facing slope

> 25 plants of 1 species

> 15 plants of 2 species disturbance

< 0.5 acres or closed canopy

Very dry, exposed or rocky area; shallow or compacted soils

< 15 plants of 1 or more species

108


April 2000

(minimum = 10 plants)

When site selection occurs at the time of plot establishment, crews screen candidate sites along the vehicle access route and course-to-plot, keeping in mind the characteristics of a preferred site as described above. Final site selection and mapping occurs as the last plot activity on the way back to the vehicle. This allows the crew to select the best site for evaluation after viewing all the possibilities.

NOTE: The bioindicator site information that is included on the PDR plot identification screen can be entered after the tree tally data have been collected and as the last entry before pushing the "plot done" key.

Once a bioindicator site is selected, the field crew records the estimated size of the site opening and other key site characteristics identified on the PDR or data sheet. The crew then maps the location of the site relative to the Phase 3 ground plot or some other obvious and permanent marker. Directions to the site, noting road names and distances, are included as needed. Crews should also mark the approximate location of plant groupings (bioindicator species) that may be used for evaluation (see

Subsection 9.6.2) on the site map.

9.6.1.2 ESTABLISHED PLOTS

Procedures for crews in the INT and WC Regions that have established Phase 3 ground plots with associated bioindicator sites, are as follows: At the beginning of the field season, the Field Crew

Supervisor provides each crew with a list of plots in their jurisdiction that have established biomonitoring sites. If a crew visits a Phase 3 plot that lacks an ozone site, they should make every effort to locate and map a new site for that plot location. If the crew visits a Phase 3 plot with an established site, they should make every effort to locate and map a new and better site for that plot location if the mapped site does not meet the criteria for a best site as described above. The best site is the largest, easily accessible opening, with the most ozone indicator species. Site selection and replacement are an on-going responsibility of the Phase 3 crews from the beginning to the end of the field season.

Once the site selection procedures are complete, field crews operating in States with established sites must complete the species selection, plant selection, and symptom quantification procedures described below.

NOTE: Experienced crews are encouraged to look for and establish off-plot biomonitoring sites, especially in undersampled areas of their State or region. Crews must provide approximate latitude and longitude for all newly established off-plot sites.

9.6.2 SPECIES SELECTION

At the selected bioindicator site, the crew evaluates 30 individuals of three bioindicator species .

If three species cannot be found at the site, then a lesser number of species is still evaluated. If 30 plants of each species cannot be found at the site, a lesser number (between 10 and 30) is still evaluated. A list of species is provided to the field crews for each region. Crews are encouraged to select from the top of the list down when several species are found at the same site. However, species with 30 or more individual plants should be a first priority for choice of species. Key identifying characteristics of each species are provided in the Appendix 9.A.

109


April 2000

Field crews record the species code number for each selected species in the PDR or on the data sheet. The target species and codes for each region are:

Interior Region

Code

122

746

924

351

905

Red alder

Ninebark

2

2

965

960

961

Definition

Ponderosa pine

1

Quaking aspen

Scouler ’ s willow

Huckleberry

Blue elderberry

Red elderberry

Scientific Names

Pinus ponderosa

Populus tremuloides

Salix scouleriana

Pinus jeffreyi

Alnus rubra

Physocarpus malvaceus

Vaccinium membranaceum

Sambucus cerulea

Sambucus racemosa

909 Skunk

907

968

1

969

Western wormwood

Evening Primrose

Mountain snowberry

2

Pinus ponderosa var.

scopulorum (WY, CO)

Pinus jeffreyi (NV); Alnus rubra (ID)

Rhus trilobata

Artemesia ludoviciana

Oenothera elata

Symphoricarpos oreaphilus

110


April 2000

West Coast Region

Code

122

746

924

818

Definition

Ponderosa pine

Quaking aspen

Scouler ’

1 s willow

California black oak 2

116 Jeffrey

351

905

Red alder

Ninebark

Pacific Ninebark (WC)

3

906

965

960

961

Huckleberry

Blue elderberry

Red elderberry

Scientific Names

Pinus ponderosa

Populus tremuloides

Salix scouleriana

Quercus kelloggii

Pinus jeffreyi

Alnus rubra

Physocarpus malvaceus

Physocarpus capitatus

Vaccinium membranaceum

Sambucus mexicana

Sambucus racemosa

909 Skunk

907

908

969

Western wormwood

Mugwort

Snowberry

Rhus trilobata

Artemisia ludoviciana

Artemisia douglasiana

Symphoricarpos spp

1

Pinus ponderosa var. ponderosa

2

This species is only found in southern Oregon and California.

3 WC = this species is only found west of the Cascades .

9.6.3 PLANT SELECTION

After site and species selection, the next task is to contiguously sample a minimum of 10, and preferably 30 individual plants of each species. Thirty plants of a target species must be sampled if they are available on site. In fact, crews are strongly encouraged to evaluate 150 plants at each site (30 plants of five species), if possible. The value of the bioindicator data increases significantly with increased numbers of plants evaluated. This is true even if the crew records 30 consecutive zeros on three different species.

NOTE: The borders of some biomonitoring sites are difficult to determine and crews may be uncertain how much ground area to cover to complete the plant selection procedures. Specific guidelines are not set because the constraints on crew time and resources vary considerably from one state to the next.

Time and safety concerns should take priority. Each crew must make every effort to maximize the number of plants and species evaluated for ozone injury at each plot location.

The following procedures help the crews to collect the bioindicator data in as systematic (i.e., unbiased) a way as possible.

1. Identify a starting point for plant selection. This point should be mapped on the site data sheet so that audit and regular crews evaluate roughly the same population of plants in subsequent visits to the plot.

2. Move away from the starting point, towards the center of the opening .

3. Begin locating individuals in a sweeping pattern , selecting plants that are growing under the same or similar growing (microhabitat) conditions. Do not skip plants with little or no injury. the (high sunlight exposure) and avoid suppressed and shaded individuals. Plants along the edge of an opening may be used if, in your judgment, they receive direct sunlight for three to four hours each day.

111


April 2000

5. Avoid plants under 12 inches in height or so tall that you cannot see or touch at least half of the crown area.

6. Evaluate the foliage that you can see and touch on 30 plants of each species in the opening.

7. Record the amount and severity of injury for each plant evaluated (with or without symptoms) on the PDR or data sheet.

NOTE: A pop-up menu keeps track of the plant counts by species. You can tabulate more than three species and a limited sample number of 30 plants per species. Stop when the pop-up display indicates you have tabulated 30 plants of at least 3 species, or when no additional plants can be found on site.

NOTE: Some plants spread vegetatively. This means that neighboring plants are often genetically identical. To avoid repeat sampling of clonal material , take several steps between each plant selected for evaluation. Use a systematic approach to select individual plants. For example, select the plant closest to your left side then take two steps and select the plant closest to your right side and repeat. (A comparable systematic approach should be applied to all evaluated species to minimize bias in the plant selection process.) If it is difficult to distinguish individual plants or stems, use an approximate 2-foot square area to represent a single plant.

112


April 2000

9.6.4 SYMPTOM IDENTIFICATION AND SCORING

The bioindicator species selected for each region are those that have been determined through field and laboratory studies to be highly sensitive to ozone air pollution. However, within a species, differences in genetics between individuals result in differential sensitivities to ozone. This means that you often find an individual of a species with severe air pollution injury growing immediately adjacent to another individual of the same species with few or no symptoms.

In addition to genetics, the age of the leaves (position on the stem, branch, or rosette) affects a plant's susceptibility to ozone air pollution. In general, leaves at 75% full expansion are the most sensitive and tend to show symptoms most definitively toward the center of the leaf. Older leaves show symptoms more widespread over the leaf surface, while younger leaves show symptoms more commonly near the leaf tip. If leaves on one branch are affected, then leaves at a similar leaf position on another branch should be affected, especially for branches on the same side of the plant under similar environmental conditions (sun or shade leaves).

All of the western bioindicator species, except ponderosa and Jeffrey pine, have broad leaves.

When scoring foliar symptoms on these broad-leafed plants , check for the following characteristics of ozone injury:

• Symptoms are more severe on mid-aged and older leaves. New leaves will have no or very little injury.

• Symptoms are most likely confined to the upper leaf surface, and are typically visible as tiny purple-red to black spots (stippling).

• Check leaves covering each other. Overlapped leaves will have no injury on the bottom leaf.

• There will be some uniformity to size and shape of the lesions (stippling) on a leaf.

• Later in the growing season, stippling may be associated with leaf yellowing or premature senescence. Check the ground for fallen leaves.

On ponderosa and Jeffrey pine, the most common needle symptom is chlorotic mottle. When scoring foliar symptoms on pines , check for the following characteristics of ozone injury:

• Symptoms are visible as diffuse yellow areas (chlorotic mottle) without sharp borders between green and yellow zones, on older needles. Not all needles in a fascicle will be uniformly affected.

• Chlorotic mottle is rarely seen on current-year needles except in high-ozone areas. On young needles it may appear more olive than yellow.

• Older needles that are directly exposed to sunlight may show the most severe chlorotic mottle.

However, almost all exposed branches on a plant will be affected to some degree.

• Premature needle drop frequently occurs on ozone-injured pines, even on trees that do not show other ozone injury symptoms. Check for missing older annual whorls and for large numbers of needles on the ground. Live crowns may appear small and thin.

NOTE: Missing whorls on ponderosa pine should not be recorded as ozone injury without reliable evidence of other foliar injury symptoms, such as chlorotic mottle.

113


April 2000

Each plant (broadleaf and conifer) with ozone injury is evaluated for the percent of the plant that is injured and the average severity of injury . For each plant located, the percent-age of injured area and the severity of injury are both rated on a scale of 0 to 5 (see below). Both amount and severity estimates are confined to the exposed portion of the plant. If a plant does not have injury, it is still tallied with zeros for these measurements. For broad-leaved species, the amount and severity estimates are based on injury to the upper surface area of the leaves. For the pine species, examine all needle surfaces including the under sides, particularly if the needles have large amounts of winter fleck (NOT an ozone injury symptom) on the upper surfaces.

Percent Scale for Injury Amount : Estimate and record the percentage of leaves (or needles) on the plant with ozone injury symptoms relative to the total number of leaves (or needles) on the plant.

CODE DEFINITION

0 No injury; the plant does not have any leaves/needles with ozone symptoms.

1

2

3

4

1 to 6 percent of the leaves/needles have ozone symptoms.

7 to 25 percent of the leaves/needles are injured.



5 >75 percent of the leaves/needles have ozone symptoms.

Percent Scale for Severity of Injury : Estimate and record the mean severity of symptoms on injured foliage.

CODE DEFINITION

3

4

5

0

1

2

No injury; the plant does not have any leaves/needles with ozone symptoms.

On average, 1 to 6 percent of the leaf area of injured leaves/needles have ozone symptoms.




On average, >75 percent of the leaf area of injured leaves/needles have ozone symptoms.

NOTE: Red and blue elderberry have compound leaves. Use the whole leaf, not each leaflet, to estimate injury amount and severity.

NOTE: The percent scale for ozone injury evaluations has a long history of application in plant disease research. The scale utilizes break points that correspond to the ability of the human eye to distinguish gradations of healthy and unhealthy leaf tissue.

Proceed as follows:

1. Record the injury amount and the injury severity ratings for each plant on the PDR or data sheet.

2. Use the notes section on the PDR or data sheet to add other information that will help interpret the results (e.g., below average rainfall for the area).

3. Collect a voucher leaf sample (three leaves of each injured species evaluated at each location) and mail them to the Western Regional Trainer using the guidelines presented in Subsection

9.6.5.

NOTE: Foliar symptoms are easiest to see under overcast skies. Bright sun will make it difficult to see the ozone stipple or chlorotic mottle. Stand so that you reduce the glare on the leaf/needle surface. Long periods without rain will inhibit symptom development even on the most sensitive plants. If you are experiencing below average rainfall for your area, please note this in the PDR or on the data sheet.

114


April 2000

9.6.5 COLLECTION OF LEAF SAMPLES

The voucher leaf samples (leaves and/or needles) are a critical aspect of the data collection procedures as they provide the necessary validation of the ozone injury symptom observed in the field by the field crews. Crew data that do not include a voucher leaf sample are removed from the FIA database.

A voucher leaf sample must be collected for each injured species evaluated on the bioindicator site. For example, if a field crew records ozone injury on California black oak, Scouler = s willow, and ninebark then a minimum of one voucher (3 leaves) from each of the three species (9 leaves in all ) is collected and mailed to the Western Regional Trainer. In this example, three voucher data sheets (one for each species) must be filled out and mailed with the leaf samples.

NOTE : The recognition of ozone injury symptoms in the field is not an exact science, and many other foliar injury symptoms can be mistaken for ozone injury. Crews are encouraged to collect voucher specimens of both known and suspected ozone injury in the field to send to the Western Regional

Trainer for verification.

9.6.5.1 FIELD COLLECTION

For each injured, broad-leaved species , the voucher consists of three leaves that clearly show the ozone injury symptom. Ideally, these are three leaves with high amounts of foliar injury symptoms. If this is not possible, send whatever leaf sample is available even if it's only one leaf with faint symptoms. Cut the leaf at the petiole with hand clippers or a sharp knife.

For pine species with ozone injury, the voucher consists of two small branches (small terminal or lateral branch containing the full complement of needles) with obvious chlorotic mottle. If this is not possible, collect whatever needle sample(s) are available.

If the leaves/needles are wet when you cut them, shake off any excess moisture and pat dry. The samples do not have to be completely dry at this point. Place the samples into the plant press you were provided at training. Each leaf or branch sample is placed in the press so that it does not overlap another leaf. Include a small label with each leaf sample you place into the plant press that identifies which plot the sample came from and the date. Labels are provided for this purpose. Record the information on the labels with indelible ink and then wrap them around the petiole (or stem) of one leaf per sample so that the backsides stick together and will not slip off the leaf. If you forget to take the plant press with you into the field, then place the leaves and accompanying label between pages of a notebook, or otherwise keep as flat as possible.

NOTE: Blue and red elderberry have compound leaves. Select the whole leaf (not individual leaflets) when preparing a voucher sample.

9.6.5.2 DATA COLLECTION

The plants from which the leaf vouchers are selected must be evaluated by the field crews for injury location and injury type . This information, together with the visible injury symptoms on the leaf samples, will be used to validate the ozone injury data observed and recorded in the field by the field crews. The injury location and type codes are recorded on the upper half of the voucher data sheet as follows:

115


April 2000

INJURY LOCATION for Broad-leaved Species : Specify the leaf age or position of the leaves with ozone injury.

Code Definition

1 >50% of the injured leaves are younger leaves. Younger leaves are usually located towards the branch tip (e.g., aspen, willow, oak, ninebark, and huckleberry), or top of the plant (e.g., elderberry, wormwood and snowberry).

2 >50% of the injured leaves are midaged or older leaves. Mid-aged and older leaves are located halfway along the branch (e.g., aspen, willow, oak, ninebark, and huckleberry) or main stem of the plant (e.g., elderberry, wormwood, and snowberry), or more towards the base of the branch

3 or stem.

Injured leaves are not concentrated in any one location, leaf age or position. Injury may be spread more or less evenly over the plant or is, otherwise, difficult to describe.

INJURY LOCATION for Pines Specify the leaf age or whorl with ozone injury.

Code Definition

1

2

3

>50% of the injured needles are on the current whorl.

>50% of the injured needles are on whorls 1 year old and older.

Injury is not concentrated on any one needle whorl but is spread more or less evenly along the branch or is, otherwise, difficult to describe.

INJURY TYPE for Broad-leaved Species : Specify the visible injury symptom.

Code

1

Definition

The injury on >50% of the injured leaves is best described as upper-leaf-surface stipple (i.e., tiny purple-red to black spots occurring between the veins). Stippling may be associated with leaf yellowing and leaf drop late in the growing season; When injury is severe, stipples may coalesce

2

3 and appear as uniform discoloration of the leaf surface.

The injury on >50% of the injured leaves is something other than upper-leaf-surface stipple. For example, small white to tan flecks occurring between the veins, or injury that is clearly visible on both leaf surfaces, or a general discoloration of the leaf that resembles early fall coloration.

The visible injury is varied or, otherwise, difficult to describe.

INJURY TYPE for Pines Specify the visible injury symptom.

Code

1

Definition

The injury on >50% of the injured needles is best described as chlorotic mottle i.e., small patches of yellow tissue with diffuse borders and surrounded by apparently healthy (green) tissue.

2

3

Chlorotic mottle may be associated with premature needle drop.

The injury on >50% of the injured needles is something other than chlorotic mottle. For example, winter fleck on the upper surface of the needles, or tipburn (i.e., reddish brown discoloration of the needle tips).

The visible injury is varied or, otherwise, difficult to describe.

NOTE: Not all location and type codes are indicative of ozone injury. Certain combinations of location and type codes, considered with a questionable leaf voucher, may invalidate the injury data. Other combinations provide quality assurance for the injury assessment. Crews should describe any unusual or questionable symptoms on the upper half of the voucher data sheet.

116


April 2000

9.6.5.3 MAILING PROCEDURE

Vouchers may be mailed in bulk at the end of the field season, or earlier, depending on your work schedule. It is very important to mail only dry, pressed leaf samples . Before mailing, make sure you have filled out the upper half of the voucher data sheet. This sheet is filled out on the same day the sample is collected, even if the sample is not mailed on that day. Please comment on the weather or general plot conditions that might help interpret the injury data. For example, "It's been 14 days now without rain," "Every plant showed the same response and it was very obvious," or "This was a highly disturbed site."

NOTE : Crews are encouraged to add information on the biosite location to the voucher data sheet such as the uncoded name of the county or closest town. This helps the Western Regional Trainer map the initial findings from the leaf vouchers and alert FIA/FHM staff to high ozone areas.

The lower half of the voucher data sheet is filled out by the Western Regional Trainer to whom you are sending the sample. Place the voucher data sheet and the leaf sample between two pieces of stiff paper or cardboard before placing into a mailing envelope addressed to the Western Regional Trainer.

Do not tape the leaves or needles to the paper or cardboard . Taped samples often break apart when they are handled, making evaluation difficult. Include as many samples as fit easily into each mailing envelope. There must be a unique voucher data sheet for each sample or species.

NOTE: The Western Regional Trainer will make every effort to provide immediate feedback on the leaf vouchers. To facilitate this, crews must fill in the contact information on the voucher data sheet.

9.6.6 CREW MEMBER RESPONSIBILITIES

1. Although one or two crew members may be trained for this indicator, one person typically takes the lead responsibility for site selection, plant selection, and ozone injury evaluations. All procedures can be successfully completed by one person on the Phase 3 crew .

2. All members of the Phase 3 crew may assist each other in the site selection process. Once a site is selected, one crew member is responsible for mapping the site and the location of bioindicator species on the field data sheet.

3. One crew member is responsible for evaluating the plants and recording the injury scores on the

PDR or data sheet. Other crew members may counsel the evaluating crew member when there is doubt concerning the nature or severity of injury.

4. The crew member that evaluates the plants for injury is responsible for collecting and mailing the voucher sample with air pollution symptoms.

9.6.7 SITE SELECTION OFF-PLOT

In addition to the FIA Phase 3 ground plots that are evaluated by the field crews for this indicator, offplot ozone sites are also established in each region to represent the local plant populations and environmental conditions. Either State Cooperators or the FHM member of the Phase 3 field crew may be responsible for the off-plot procedures. This is not an auxiliary effort, but an integral part of the monitoring activities for this indicator.

Off-plot biomonitoring sites possess attributes of an ideal site for evaluating ozone injury on sensitive species. They are larger than three acres, contain the maximum number of indicator species, and have soil/site conditions with low drought potential and adequate fertility. Whenever possible, these sites are

117


April 2000 located close to weather and air quality monitoring stations. They are evaluated for ozone injury using the same methods as the Phase 3 ozone sites, and during the same time frame.

The site selection criteria for the off-plot sites are as follows:

• >3 acres (1.2 hectares).

• contain the maximum number of indicator species; >30 plants of at least 3 bioindicator species.

• have soil/site conditions that favor injury.

• have low drought potential.

Note: State Cooperators recommend that off-plot sites be located on public land, if possible, to facilitate the annual measurement activities.

Once an off-plot site is selected, proceed as follows:

1. Record the estimated size of the opening and other key site characteristics identified on the PDR or data sheet.

2. On a separate data sheet, map the location of the site relative to some obvious and permanent marker. Directions to the site, including road names and distances, are included. In addition, the approximate latitude and longitude of the site must be recorded.

3. Once the site has been appropriately mapped for easy relocation, begin the species and plant selection procedures. Refer to Subsections 9.6.2 and 9.6.3.

4. Adhere to the guidelines presented in Subsection 9.6.4 for symptom identification and scoring.

5. Voucher leaf samples must be collected, according to guidelines presented in Subsection 9.6.5 and mailed to the Western Regional Trainer.

The off-plot system improves the regional assessment of this indicator. It is expected to minimize uncertainty factors (e.g., the variable soil/site conditions encountered on the FIA Phase 3 ground plots) and ensure the regional responsiveness of the bioindicator data.

118


April 2000

9.7 REFERENCES

Brace, S. 1996. The spatial distribution of ozone in the Mount Rainier national park region. MS Thesis.

University of Washington. 79 p.

Cleveland, W.S. and T.E. Graedel. 1979. Photochemical air pollution in the Northeast United States.

Science 204: 1273-1278.

Davis, D.D., and D.M. Umbach.1981. Susceptibility of tree and shrub species and response of black cherry foliage to ozone. Plant Disease 65:904-907.

Duchelle, S.F.and J.M. Skelly. 1981. Response of common milkweed to oxidant pollution in the

Shenandoah National Park in Virginia. Plant Disease 65: 661-663.

Forest Health and Ozone . 1987. ed: C. Hakkarienen. EPRI, EA-5135-SR. Special Report.

Horsefall, J.G. and E.B. Cowling.1978. Pathometry: the measurement of plant disease, pp. 119- 136. In:

J.G. Horsefall and E.B. Cowling (eds.), Plant Disease, an Advanced Treatise, Vol II. Academic Press,

New York, 436 pp.

Krupa, S.V., and W.J. Manning. 1988. "Atmospheric ozone: formation and effects on vegetation,"

Environ. Pollut. 50:101-137.

Lefohn, A.S. and J.E. Pinkerton. 1988. High resolution characterization of ozone data for sites located in forested areas of the United States. JAPCA 38(12):1504-1511.

Manning, W.J., and W.A. Feder. 1980. Biomonitoring Air Pollutants with Plants, Applied Science Publ.

Ltd., London, 142pp.

Mavity, E., D. Stratton, and P.Barrang. 1995. Effects of ozone on several species of plants which are native to the western United States. USDA Forest Service Center for Forest Environmental Studies. Dry

Branch, GA. 12 p.

Miller, P.R. and A.A. Millecan. 1971. Extent of oxidant air pollution damage to some pines and other conifers in California. Plant Disease Reporter 55(6):555-559.

Richards, B.L. Sr., O.C. Taylor, and F.G.Edmunds, Jr. 1968. Ozone needle mottle of pines in southern

California. JAPCA 18:73-77.

Skelly, J.M., D.D. Davis, W. Merrill, E.A. Cameron, H.D. Brown, D.B. Drummond and L.S. Dochinger.

1987. Diagnosing Injury to Eastern Forest Trees . USDA Forest Service and Penn State Univ. 122pp.

Smith, W.H. 1974. Air pollution - Effects on the structure and function of the temperate forest ecosystem.

Environ. Pollut. 6:111-129.

Treshow, M. and D. Stewart. 1973. Ozone sensitivity of plants in natural communities. Biol. Conservation

5:209-214.

119


April 2000

9.8 ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

The National Advisor for the ozone indicator wishes to thank the individuals within FIA and FHM, as well as those outside the Forest Service that took the time to review this training section and offer suggestions for improvement and essential information to complete the guide. Special thanks to Pat

Temple for his contributions to the text and to Pat, Dan Duriscoe, John Pronos, David Karnosky, Robert

Kohut, and Dave Peterson who provided slides demonstrating ozone injury symptoms on the target bioindicator species for the western FIA/FHM regions.

120


April 2000

Appendix 9.A Key Identifying Characteristics of the Ozone Bioindicator Species

1. Ponderosa Pine is a large tree, up to 70 meters in height. Young tree bark is often thin and dark brown to black.

Older tree bark is thick becoming yellow-red to cinnamon red and forming plates which slough off freely. Needles in bundles of three, 12-26 cm in length, not glaucous and yellow-green in color. Buds are resinous with red-brown scales and dark-hairy. Cones with a prickle at the tip of each scale. May be confused with Jeffrey pine which differs by having non-resinous, light-brown buds, and grayish blue-green glaucous needles.

2. Jeffrey Pine is a smaller tree than ponderosa pine, with darker cinnamon-red bark that may be tinged with lavender on old trunks. Needles in bundles of three, 12-25 cm in length, blue-green, and somewhat twisted. Crushed needles and twigs have a violet-like or pineapple odor. Buds are never covered with resin droplets. Cones with a prickle at the tip of each scale. May be confused with ponderosa pine.

3. Quaking Aspen is a medium sized tree up to 36 meters in height. Bark is smooth, greenish-white. Buds shiny but not resinous. Leaf petiole is strongly flattened. The leaf blade is broadly ovate (almost round) with a tapering tip and finely toothed margins, upper surface smooth, lower surface covered with a bloom. Aspen could be confused with black cottonwood which differs in its resinous buds, rough bark and round leaf petioles.

4.

Scouler's Willow is a small tree or shrub up to 10 meters in height. Leaf blade is 3-10 cm in length, narrowly elliptic with the widest portion toward the tip, entire to irregularly toothed margins, lower surface smooth, upper surface shiny. This willow is NOT restricted to riparian zones. It can be easily confused with a number of other willow species. The combination of leaves widest toward the tip (mostly rounded ends and narrowly tapered bases) and the tolerance for upland (drier) habitats makes this willow relatively easy to identify.

5. California Black Oak is a deciduous tree up to 25 meters in height. Bark becoming deeply furrowed, dark graybrown to black. Leaves bright green and smooth on the upper surface, dull green and finely hairy on the lower surface, deeply lobed, tips of lobes with 1-4 teeth. Fruit is an acorn with the cup hairy on the inside. May be confused with Oregon white oak which differs by having rounded lobes and the acorn cap without hair inside.

6. Pacific Ninebark is a deciduous shrub 2-4 meters in height. Leaves alternate, 3 or 5 lobed (maple-like), 4-8 cm long, serrate, dark green and smooth above, paler and hairy below. Twigs red to grayish brown, splits longitudinally into long strips. Flowers small, white, borne in a cluster, stems hairy. Very similar to ninebark (see below) which is generally smaller, in drier habitats, and with densely hairy ovaries.

7. Ninebark is an erect, loosely branched shrub with maple-like leaves and shreddy bark. May be up to 2 meters in height. Leaves and flowers similar to Pacific ninebark except the ovaries are densely hairy. May be confused with

Douglas maple which has opposite leaves, or sticky currant, which has leaves that are sticky to the touch. Often associated with ponderosa pine and Douglas-fir forests at low to mid-elevation.

8. Huckleberry is an erect shrub 0.9 to 1.5 m high. Leaves 2.5 to 5.0 cm long, half as wide, thin and pale green on both surfaces, smooth or occasionally minutely hairy, margins toothed, apex and base both acute. Fruit deep purple to black round berry around 6 mm diameter. Twigs slender, green and ridged. Found on dry to moist sites, sun or shade. Similar, and often found with oval-leaved huckleberry which has entire (smooth) rather than toothed leaves.

9.

Blue Elderberry is a tall deciduous shrub, sometimes tree-like, up to 6 meters in height. Twigs with a soft pith inside. Leaves opposite, pinnately compound, the 5-9 leaflets sharply serrate and strongly uneven at the base.

Flowers small, white, flat-topped cluster. Fruit a blue-black berry covered with a white powdery bloom. This species could be confused with red elderberry which differs by having flowers in a spike and red-purple fruit. Found mostly on moist, well-drained sites in the sun; sea level to 9,000 ft.

10. Red Elderberry is a tall deciduous shrub, sometimes tree-like, up to 6 meters in height. Twigs with a soft pith inside. Leaves opposite, pinnately compound, the 5-7 leaflets sharply toothed and often uneven at the base. Flowers small, white, and clustered into a long spike. Fruit is a berry, most often red in color but sometimes purplish-black or yellow. Similar to blue elderberry which has a flat-topped flower cluster and a blue-black berry.

11. Western Wormwood is an aromatic perennial herb, 0.3 to 1.0 meter in height. Leaves mostly 3-11 cm long, variable in shape but most often with 3-5 narrow lobes, white hairy beneath, sometimes above as well. Flowers small and arranged in a loose, narrow flower cluster, 5-30 cm long. May be confused with Douglas' wormwood which has wider leaves and is usually found in moister habitats. Also similar to Riverbank wormwood which occurs only near streams and outwash areas.

121


April 2000

12. Mugwort is a large perennial herb 0.5 to 1.5 meters tall, usually found in large colonies in wet areas, ditches, or drainages. Leaves are evenly-spaced, 1 to 10 cm long, the upper leaves are narrowly elliptical, the lower widely oblanceolate, often coarsely 3 to 5 lobed near the leaf tip, 2 to 3 cm wide, green above, covered with dense white hair beneath. Differs from western wormwood in having wider lower leaves and in its generally damp habitat.

13. Evening Primrose is a large biennial with elliptical leaves up to 25 cm long in a dense rosette the first year. The large (>1m) flowering stalk with long red-tinged elliptical leaves and large bright yellow four-petaled flowers forms in the second year. Both the leaves and stem are densely hairy, and the hairs often have red, blister-like bases.

Usually found in moist, sunny habitats, like seeps or meadows.

14. Mountain Snowberry is a shrub, 0.5 to 1.5 meters in height with a solid brown pith. Bark: shreddy, brownish.

Young twigs: hairy. Leaves opposite, elliptical, 1.0 to 3.5 cm long and half as wide. Flowers (May-June) tubularshaped, the petals white with a pink tube. Fruit a white berry. Common snowberry differs by having non-tubular flowers and a hollow pith. Trailing snowberry is a trailing shrub with non-tubular flowers; and Utah honeysuckle has larger leaves and a solid white pith.

15. Red Alder is a deciduous tree up to 20 meters tall with dark green leaves 6 to 12 cm long. The leaves are coarsely toothed, with smaller teeth on the leaf margins, and the leaf veins are also tightly inrolled. Red alder is a common tree in damp situations and is a frequent colonizer of clearings, especially following clearcuts in coniferous forests.

16. Skunk bush is a small, diffusively-branched shrub, 0.5 to 1 meter tall. The tips of the branches often droop down almost to ground level. The leaves are alternate, compound, with three leaflets, each of which is 3-lobed. The leaves resemble those of poison oak, but the leaflets of skunkbush are smaller, more hairy, and much more deeply-lobed.

The leaves of skunkbush also emit a strong, ill-scented odor when crushed. However, if unsure, DO NOT crush the leaves of a shrub with three leaflets to determine the odor. Skunkbush is usually found on dry, open, brushy hillsides, while poison oak prefers damp or shaded forested areas and riparian habitats. Skunkbush is found throughout the southwest, from California and Arizona north to Colorado and Idaho.

122


April 2000

Appendix 9.B Data Sheets

OZONE BIOINDICATOR PLANTS - 2000

Site Characteristics

ST CTY HEXAGON MO DAY TALLY 1 TALLY 2

√ Please put a checkmark beside the correct information.

Plot size: Terrain position:

_____ > 3.0 acres ___ 1 = top & upper slopes

_____ 0.5 to 3.0 acres

_____ < 0.5 acres

___ 2 = midslope (uniform angle

___ 3 = bench (level)

___ 4 = lower slope (concave)

___ 5 = flatland (not related to slope)

___ 6 = bottom land (occasional flooding)

___ 7 = forested wetlands

Elevation: __________

Record elevation in feet or meters.

Aspect: __________

Record aspect to nearest degree, except: code 000 = no aspect (slope < 5%); code 360 = north aspect

Soil

____ well-drained ____ bedrock not exposed

____ wet ____ bedrock exposed

____ excessively dry

Disturbance:

____ no recent or significant disturbance

____ evidence of overuse (e.g., soil compaction, logging, grazing, landfill, powerlines, etc.)

____ other (e.g., natural disturbance: fire, wind, flooding, etc.)

Plot Moisture:

____ Wet or damp. Examples include riparian zones and wet or damp areas along a stream, meadow, or bottom land.

____ Moderately dry. Examples include grassland or meadow, and north or east facing slopes.

____ Very dry. Examples include exposed rocky ledges, desert, and some alpine areas.

New Site:

____ This site is not new; It was located and mapped in some previous year.

____ This is a new site; (includes new and replacement sites for Phase 3 crews)

Comments: [Include information on additional species in the area, safety, directions, or site characteristics that might be useful to subsequent field crews.]

123


April 2000


Foliar Injury Data

Record species code number from list below (choose up to 3):

122 Ponderosa Pine 116 Jeffrey Pine 746 Quaking Aspen 924 Scouler ’ s Willow

818 California Black Oak 906 Pacific Ninebark

905 Ninebark 965 Huckleberry 960 Blue Elderberry 961 Red Elderberry

907 Western Wormwood 908 Mugwort 968 Evening Primrose

969 Snowberry 909 Squawbush 909 Skunkbush

Use the codes (percent injury scale, 0-5) below:

0 = No injury; 1 = 1-6%; 2 = 7-25%; 3 = 26-50%; 4 = 51-75%; 5 = >75%

Record the percent of the leaves/needles injured relative to the total leaf number (amt).

Record the average severity of symptoms on the injured leaves/needles (sev).

Species

Code

Species

Code

Species

Code

Plan t amt sev Amt sev amt sev

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

Notes:

Plot Type

__Phase 3;on plot

__Phase 3; off plot

__QA/Remeasurement

125

ST CTY


April 2000

OZONE BIOINDICATOR PLANTS 2000

HEXAGON MO DAY TALLY 1 TALLY 2

Map of the Bioindicator Site Location

Please include the following information on the map: Location of the site relative to the Phase 3 ground plot or some other obvious and permanent marker; road names and distance as needed; North arrow; starting point for plant selection; approximate location of plant groupings used for evaluation.

Attach the original of this map to the corresponding plot data sheet so that it can be used by audit and regular crews in subsequent visits to the plot. Mail a copy to the National Indicator Advisor the year that the site is established .

Off plot sites: Approximate latitude ______ longitude______

126


April 2000


General Information

Preferred site characteristics:

• largest, most easily accessible opening within 3 miles & + 300 feet in elevation of FHM detection monitoring plot

• good soil conditions

• at least 10 individuals of one bioindicator species present

• free from chemical contaminants

Sampling the bioindicator site:

• identify starting point (put on map)

• move towards center of opening

• locate plants in a sweeping pattern

• do not skip plants with little or no injury

• avoid suppressed or shaded plants

• evaluate foliage on each plant for amount and severity of injury

Ozone injury characteristics:

• usually present on mid-aged and older leaves on the upper leaf surfaces

• overlapped leaves will have no injury on the bottom leaf

• spots are uniform in size and shape, most often tiny purple-red to black spots between the veins

• on pine, ozone injury is usually present on older needles as small patches of yellow tissue with diffuse borders, surrounded by green tissue

___________________________________________________________________________

Injury Scale

Amount = Percent of leaves injured relative to the total leaf number.

Severity = Average severity of symptoms on the injured leaves.

0% 6% 25% 50% 75% 100%

0 = 0%

1 = 1-6%

3 = 26-50%

4 = 51-75%

2 = 7-25% 5 = >75%

Leaf images are upper bounds of each rating class for the severity estimates:

127


April 2000


Voucher Leaf Samples

FIELD CREW

ST CTY HEXAGO MO DAY TALLY TALLY

Name, address, and phone number where you can be reached regarding the validation of this sample:

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

Bioindicator species:

Injury location (see codes Sect. 9.6.5.2)

Injury type (see codes Sect. 9.6.5.2)

Notes: [record county and closest town]

___________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________

Mail this sheet with the leaf sample to:

PAT TEMPLE

USDA FS, PSW Experiment Station

4955 Canyon Crest Drive

Riverside, CA 92506

QA/QC PERSON

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

___Positive for ozone symptom ___Negative for ozone symptom

Date validated: Sample condition:

Explanation/Notes:

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Questions? Call your regional bioindicator advisor:

Western Regional Trainer: Pat Temple (909) 680-1583

National (East and West),: Gretchen Smith (413) 545-1680

Lake States: Ed Jepsen (608) 266-3538; Teague Prichard (608) 264-8883

South: Bill Jackson (828) 257-4815

128


April 2000

10 FOREST HEALTH MONITORING LICHEN INDICATOR

10.1 OVERVIEW


The purpose of the lichen community indicator is to use lichen species and communities as biomonitors of change in air quality, climate change, and/or change in the structure of the forest community. Lichen communities are excellent indicators of air quality, particularly long-term averages of sulfur dioxide concentrations (Hawksworth and Rose, 1976; Smith et al., 1993; van Dobben, 1993).

Lichen communities provide information relevant to several key assessment questions, including those concerning the contamination of natural resources, biodiversity, and sustainability of timber production (Figure 10-1). Lichens not only indicate the health of our forests, but there is a clearly established linkage to environmental stressors, as described below.

Figure 10-1. Conceptual model of the lichen community indicator.


The objectives of this task are to determine the presence and abundance of macrolichen species on woody plants in each plot (using the 120-foot radius core of the plot without subplots) and to collect samples to be mailed to lichen experts. Note that the crew member responsible for this task is not required to accurately assign species names to the lichens (that is done later by a specialist) but must be able to make distinctions among species.

The method has two parts which are performed at the same time:

1. Make a collection of voucher specimens for identification by a specialist, the collection representing the species diversity of macrolichens on the plot as fully as possible. The population being sampled consists of all macrolichens occurring on woody plants, excluding the

0.5 m basal portions of trees and shrubs. Include fallen branches in your sampling.

129


April 2000

2. Estimate the abundance of each species. Possible species which you are not sure are different from those already collected should be collected as many times as needed with abundance rated separately for each collection.


This method may be used in any season or weather condition. It should not be used in poor light, however, because the method requires careful discrimination among species in the field. Therefore, it should not be performed within an hour of sunset or sunrise, or during dark, rainy conditions. Another common interference is to have a difficult plot with other crew members who are impatient to leave the plot. Chances are that you will have to wait for them at some point. Remind them of this and proceed with your task, or, if it is a recurrent problem, discuss it with your crew leader to see if you can devise more equitable work loads. Hastily conducted plots are likely to create misleading results in data analysis.

10.1.4 SAFETY

Only minor hazards are associated with the method. Care should be used when removing lichens specimens with a knife or chisel. Always cut away from yourself. The knife must have a locking blade or fixed blade.

Trees should not be climbed to procure specimens.

10.2 SAMPLE COLLECTION, PRESERVATION, AND STORAGE

10.2.1 PROCEDURE

1. The area to be sampled (henceforth the "lichen plot") is a circular area with 120-foot radius centered on the macroplot, excluding the four subplots (see Figure 10-2). The area of the lichen plot is 40715 ft

2

= 0.378 ha = 0.935 acres. = 3782 m

2

(Note: For off-frame applications where subplots have NOT been set up, an equal area is sampled by using a 34.7 m = 114 ft radius circular plot, sampling the whole area within that radius.)

130


April 2000

Figure 10-2. Lichen sampling area. The shaded area is the lichen plot.

2. Record the time sampling begins on the "Plot Data Card" (Section 10.2.3; you will be given a supply of these at the beginning of the field season). Sampling continues for a maximum of two hours or until 10 minutes elapse with no additional species recorded. At least 45 minutes in the East and

Pacific West, and 30 minutes in the Intermountain West must be spent searching the plot, even if very few lichens are present.

3. Take a reconnaissance walk through the lichen plot, locating lichen epiphytes on woody plants and collecting voucher samples and assigning abundances as you go. The following method is suggested. Begin at approximately 100 ft due north from plot center, measuring with your eye to the limiting boundary of 120 ft and continue to the right in a sinuous manner until you reach the perimeter of subplot 3. (The perimeter of the subplot will have been flagged.) The same procedure is followed between subplots 3 & 4 and 4 & 2. The idea behind this approach is that you can scan the whole area but intensely scrutinize selected areas to best represent the diversity on the plot (see item 4 for more details). If time allows, make additional circuits of the plot, searching for substrates or spots that were not visited on the first pass.

4. Lichen species with the following growth forms will be collected: fruticose and foliose (i.e., macrolichens).

• Inspect woody plants (trees and shrubs > 0.5 m tall) within the lichen plot for lichen species.

• Be careful to inspect the full range of substrates and microhabitats available:

• shaded and exposed

• conifers and hard-woods

• branches and twigs on trees

• recently fallen branches, twigs and lichens which obviously fell from above 0.5 m

• shrubs

• trees in particular topographic positions (for example, you would check in a draw or ravine on an otherwise uniform slope, so long as it occurs within the lichen plot).

• Rotten logs or other semi-permanent features of the forest floor should NOT be sampled. Also, decayed stumps should not be sampled.

131


April 2000

5. ABUNDANCE ratings. Record relative abundance within the lichen plot. Relative abundance for each species is estimated as follows:

Code Abundance

1 Rare (< 3 individuals in area)

2

3

Uncommon (4-10 individuals in area)

Common (> 10 individuals in area but less than half of the boles and branches have that species present)

4 Abundant (more than half of boles and branches have the subject species present)

6. Collect a sample (as large as possible) of each possible species and place it in a packet. Label the packet with the HEXID number and date (you can do this at the end of the day), packet number

(sequentially as collected), and record relative abundance. Feel free to revise the abundance rating as collection proceeds. Also record any comments on the outside of the packet. For more details, see "Sample Procurement" below. After completing the task, check each packet to be sure that each one has a HEXID number, date, and abundance code.

7. How to handle uncertainties: The field crew will frequently have uncertainties about the classification of an organism. The following rules for the field crew are designed to put the burden of the responsibility for classification on the specialist, not the field crew.

• When in doubt, assume it is a lichen.

• When the growth form is in doubt, assume it is a macrolichen.

• When species distinctions are in doubt, assume that two different forms are different species.

The purpose of these rules is to encourage the field crew to make as many distinctions in the field as possible. The specialist can later adjust the data by excluding specimens that are not macrolichens and by combining forms that were considered separate by the field crew but are actually the same species. For more information, see the material distributed at your training session.

8. Wrap-up. Complete all fields on the “Plot Data Card.” This information is critical for data analysis, and also assists the specialist, who has never been to the plot and knows nothing of its vegetation and environment.

10.2.2 SAMPLE PROCUREMENT (NOTE PORTABLE DATA RECORDER NOT USED)

1. Use PDR to enter whether or not lichens were collected, and if not, why not.

2. Optimally collect a palm-size sample (about 5-10 cm in diameter) of each fruticose and foliose species. This includes all species that are three-dimensional or flat and lobed. Even minute fruticose and lobate forms should be included. Squamulose species and Cladonia squamules lacking upright stalks should not be included.

• Collecting large samples is the only way to be sure that the specialist can properly name your collections.

3. Place each specimen in a separate voucher packet and label as follows:

• Collection number (coll. no.): number sequentially as collected, or pre/postnumber packets

• Relative abundance. (Feel free to revise this rating as collection proceeds and you become more familiar with the plot.)

132


April 2000

• Often there will be more than one species on a given bark sample. If there is any chance of ambiguity about which species in the packet corresponds with the abundance ration, write a descriptive clarifying phrase, such as “the white one” or “the sorediate one,” on the packet.

Label the packet with an indelible marker, preferably a medium point rolling ball pen (such as “Pilot” brand) with PERMANENT ink. Alternately, you can use regular ballpoint pen (dry packets), waterproof alcohol markers (dry or damp packets), and very soft (#2 or softer) pencils (very damp packets).

4. When finished for the day, or earlier as time allows, label all of the packets from that day with the

Hexagon ID number and the date.

At this time you should add sequential packet numbers if you did not do that in the field. If you are not using a packet template with your name printed on it, fill your name in the “collector” field. Fill in remarks only when needed (e.g., “the sorediate one” or “the yellow one”).

5. Be sure that the "Plot Data Card" (Figure 10-3) is completely filled out.

6. Place all of the specimen packets from a given plot WITH the Plot Data Card. Either bundle with two crossed rubber bands, or place into a single or several paper bags. For each paper bag, record plot

ID code, your name, the date, and “bag#___of___” (total # of bags for that plot). Fold the top of each paper bag closed and secure with a rubber band (no staples, please). The redundancy in all of this labeling may seem unnecessary, but it has proved quite helpful in resolving problems of mislabeled material.

7. Store packets in a dry place until you mail them. Specimens must be thoroughly air dried to avoid fungal decay. If specimens were wet when collected, the individual packets should be spread out and dried inside or in the sun as soon as possible.

Figure 10-3. Plot data card for lichen communities. Complete this form and bundle it with the packets for each plot.

133


April 2000

Lichen Communities Indicator PLOT DATA CARD FHM,

This will be part of the permanent record for this plot. PLEASE COMPLETE IT FULLY!

Hex ID: _____________ Plot No. _____ State: _____ County: ________________

Date: ____________ Crew Member's Name: _______________ Crew code ______

Crew Type _______ QA Status ________ Lichen Project Code _______

Time lichen sampling began:___________ Time lichen sampling ended:____________

Total time spent sampling the plot: ________________

Elevation (ft): _______ Topographic position: Ridgetop Midslope Lowerslope Riparian Flat

Distance to Ocean (PNW/CA only): ____________________________________________

% Cover (on lichen plot): Conifers ___________ Hardwoods _________ Shrubs ____________

Dominant Tree/Shrub Species __________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________

Important substrate species not on subplots _______________________________________________

% of lichen plot forested _______ % gap _______ Recent( <5 yr)? Y N Tall Shrubs? Y N

Size class(es) of 3 largest trees (in.) <10 _____ 10-20 _____ 30-40 _____ >40 _______

Features important for high/low lichen diversity (if any) _______________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________

Sampling issues/problems (weather, etc) ________________________________________________

Other comments _____________________________________________________________________

REMEMBER:

• Record the abundance code on each packet!

• Remember to look for the common species.

• Try to put only one species in each packet.

10.2.3 SAMPLE MAILING

ALWAYS MAIL SPECIMENS USING A MAIL OR PARCEL SERVICE THAT INCLUDES PARCEL

TRACKING. After the first two plots are completed, mail the specimens to the lichen specialist right away.

The purpose of this is to allow immediate feedback to the field crews concerning specimen quality and quantity. Thereafter, mail the samples each week or every other week to the lichen specialist. You should have the name and address of the lichen specialist. In case of doubt, contact: for the West, Peter

Neitlich (907-443-6123 or peter@wmrs.edu); and for the East, Susan Will-Wolf (608-262-2754 or swwolf@facstaff.wisc.edu). Bundles of packets should be packed closely, but without excessive crushing, in sturdy cardboard boxes. Bundles of packets from several plots can be mailed in the same box. Enclose in the box a Lichen Specimen Mailing Form (Figure 10-4) specifying the box's contents.

Extra copies of the Mailing Form can be found in the notebook of lichen training materials under

"Mailings."

134


April 2000

LICHEN SPECIMEN MAILING FORM

Please enclose a copy of this form whenever these specimens are mailed. Keep a copy for your records.

FIELD CREW TO LICHEN SPECIALIST: Date

Sent by: _______________ To: ______________________

Sender's comments: ______________________________________

Received: ______________________________________________

Comments:_____________________________________________

LICHEN SPECIALIST TO STORAGE: Date

Sent by: To:_____________________________

Sender's comments:______________________________________

Received: ______________________________________________

Comments: _____________________________________________

Figure 10-4. Form used for mailing lichen community specimens, one form per box.

CONTENTS

Hex Number State County Collector Notes


10.3.1 EQUIPMENT AND APPARATUS

• Fanny pack (keep your lichen packets and equipment together).

• Locking-blade or fixed-blade knife (ca. 32" blade, recommended: Gerber LST Lockback

Standard). Tie on a piece of flagging so you don't lose the knife.

• 10X hand lens (Bausch & Lomb Hastings Triplet or 23 mm diameter 10X Coddington-Type such as Forestry Suppliers #61502). Hang it around your neck or tie on flagging so you don't lose it.

• Regional guides for lichen identification. Different guides will be needed for different areas:

Northeast, North Central, and Southeast:

• Hale, M.E. 1979. How to Know the Lichens. 2nd Ed. Wm. C. Brown, Dubuque, Iowa.

135


April 2000

Mid-Atlantic

• Flenniken, D. G. 1999. Macrolichens in West Virginia. 2727 Twp. Rd 421, Sugarcreek, OH:

Carlisle Printing

Colorado, Utah, and Nevada:

• McCune, B. and T. Goward. 1995. Macrolichens of the Northern Rocky Mountains. Eureka,

CA: Mad River Press, 208 pp.

• St. Clair, L. L. A Color Guidebook to Common Rocky Mountain Lichens. Available from M. L.

Bean Life Science Museum, 290 MLBM, Brigham Young University, Provo, UT 84602.

California

• Hale, M. E. and M. Cole. 1988. Lichens of California. Berkeley: University of California

Press.

• McCune, B. and L. Geiser. 1997. Macrolichens of the Pacific Northwest. Oregon State

University Press, Corvallis. 386 pp.

Pacific Northwest:

• McCune, B. and L. Geiser. 1997. Macrolichens of the Pacific Northwest. Oregon State

University Press, Corvallis. 386 pp.

Northern Rocky Mountains:

• McCune, B. and T. Goward. 1995. Macrolichens of the Northern Rocky Mountains. Eureka,

CA: Mad River Press, 208 pp.

• Hand pruners (useful for collecting small branch segments).

• 1-inch wide chisel (Northeast and Southeast only; useful for collecting samples from toughbarked hardwoods. You may wish to make a sheath from a piece of cardboard and strapping tape or save the plastic cap that comes on some chisels).

• Number stamp (8 band, size 2) and date stamp (size 2), or an equivalent stamp with both letters and numbers, plus inkpad (for stamping HEXID number and date on packets).

• Watch

10.3.2 CONSUMABLE SUPPLIES

• Specimen packets folded from 8.5" x 11" paper, averaging 30 per plot. (Regions may differ in how packets are provided.) It is best to type/print your name on a master template and use template to make copies. Electronic forms are available.

• Black medium point rolling ball pens (such as “Pilot” brand) with PERMANENT ink, for recording data on packets.

• Alternate writing supplies include regular ballpoint pens (dry packets), waterproof alcohol markers

(dry or damp packets), and soft pencils (#2 or softer - very damp packets).

• Medium size paper bags (#3 - #4 or similar size), one per plot.

• A few #1 or #2 paper bags as backup “packets” on very wet days.

• 6 mailing forms (supplied in Lichen Community Training Manual).

• Large rubber bands (to keep packets together), one box per crew member.


Calibration and Standardization is not applicable in this section.

136


April 2000


Data quality will be measured at (1) post-training certification, (2) field audits, and (3) plot remeasurements. Each of these is discussed briefly below, and at length in the QA Project Plan. (Cline et al., 1994) See also Subsection 10.5.6, "Method Performance," for QA results from recent years.

10.5.1 MEASUREMENT QUALITY OBJECTIVES (MQOS)

Data must be collected within certain standards of quality (Table 10-1). Remeasurements and audits will be conducted during the field season as ways of evaluating data quality. Corrective action (retraining and retesting) will be taken if standards are not met.

Table 10-1. Measurement Quality Objectives and Their Method of Assessment

Precision

Bias

Accuracy

Completeness

MQO

12%

12%

12%

90%

Method of Assessment

Deviation between index scores from repeat measurements of the same plot

Signed deviation from "true" index scores, as determined from expert data. In practice, obtaining 65% or more of the expert's species will yield index scores that meet this MQO

Absolute deviation from "true" index scores, as determined from expert data. In practice, obtaining 65% or more of the expert's species will yield index scores that meet this MQO

Percentage of forested plots with lichen data

Accuracy can be expressed in terms of the percent deviation between index scores of two independent samples of the same lichen plot, one of which is collected by a lichen specialist and is considered the true species composition. "Index scores" in this case tell where a plot falls on a climatic gradient and on an air quality gradient. This percent deviation is calculated as:

100 * (expert's score - trainee's score) / length of the gradient.

The signed deviation expresses bias. The absolute deviation expresses accuracy. These calculations are possible only for those regions that are in the "application phase" of the lichen community indicator, meaning that a gradient model of lichen communities has already been constructed. As of

March 1999, models are available for the southeastern U.S., the northeastern U.S., and Colorado. We have found that if the trainee obtains 65% or better of the specialist's species list, the index scores will mostly fall within 10% of the expert's. Therefore, this 65% figure is used as an operational goal for training, certification, and audits. It is referred to below as our "field MQO", and is used as a readily calculated basis for providing rapid feedback to the crew.

Precision is estimated from remeasurements of the same crew on the same plot. For the lichen community indicator, it is assessed with the percent deviation between index scores, calculated as

100*(trainee's 1st score - trainee's 2nd score)/length of the gradient, where index scores are calculated by applying the regional gradient model.

Another aspect of quality control is making sure that the voucher specimens are adequate, not decomposed, and being received by the lichen specialist. If problems are perceived either by the field crew or the lichen specialist, they should contact each other and/or the indicator lead.

137


April 2000

10.5.2 CERTIFICATION

Only people who have successfully completed lichen training and certification should collect the lichen community data. You are certified by performing the lichen community method on a test plot and meeting the field MQO (65% of the expert's species list). Your trainer completes a form (see QA Plan) that records your score and certification. You will receive supplemental training and retesting if you fail the initial test.

10.5.3 HOT AUDITS

Hot Audits (hot checks) serve two primary purposes: (1) check in with the field crew to see if they are having any difficulties with the method, and (2) documenting the data quality. The first objective is achieved by talking with the crew, observing the method in progress, and providing immediate feedback.

The second objective is met by calculating numerical scores (comparing results to those of the lichen specialist) based on the field crew sampling a plot without interference from the auditor. One or more plots will be examined per audit. The lichen community audit proceeds in four steps. Note that the early steps provide immediate feedback to the crew, but the later steps quantify the data quality with increasing rigor.

1. The auditor asks the crew member if they have questions concerning the method before the sampling begins, then discusses those problems with the crew member. (If time allows the auditor to be present for two plots, the first plot should be done more interactively, with the specialist helping the crew rather than as a test plot.)

2. The auditor then allows the crew member to sample on their own but observing at a distance the manner in which the crew member covers the plot. At the end of the plot, the lichen specialist then quickly assesses the number and quality of specimens and provides immediate feedback on the specimens and other aspects of technique (for example, if the person camps out on one tree and doesn't see a lot of the plot). Normally it is fairly easy for a specialist to judge how well someone is doing, even before the final scores are in.

3. The specialist identifies the lichens, then evaluates the number of species obtained by the crew member as a percentage of the specialist's. These values are reported by the specialist to the indicator lead and crew member as soon as possible. In some cases this can be reported to the crew member in the field, but if time or weather does not allow complete field identifications by the specialist, those figures may be delayed by a week. In the past we have found that if trainees obtain 65% or better of the number of species obtained by the specialist, the plot index scores

(item 4 below) will mostly fall within 10% of the specialist's.

4. After the data are delivered from the specialist to the indicator lead, the species scores for both the crews and the specialists are entered into data files. The indicator lead then calculates plot index scores for each QA plot for both the crews and the specialists. This requires application of the multivariate lichen gradient model for that specific region. Until those models are built for each region, the results cannot be delivered during the field season. The crew's score is then expressed as a deviation from the expert's. This is the most important numerical descriptor of the data quality, because it takes into account the mix and abundance of species.

10.5.4 REMEASUREMENTS

Plot remeasurements are an important part of ensuring comparability between crews and between years. Plot remeasurements will be conducted with cold checks of hex plots by lichen specialists. Crew members will not be aware in advance of which plot(s) will be cold checked.

138


April 2000

10.5.5 DEBRIEFING

We schedule time at the end of the field season to learn from you. This will happen via a questionnaire (see QA plan). In some cases a lichen specialist or their representative will solicit feedback from you in person. Your comments during debriefing are collated and summarized by the indicator lead and become part of the basis for improving the method for next year.


The performance of the method is assessed by evaluating measurement quality objectives (MQOs) for precision, accuracy, and completeness. Our QA results from the 1993 and 1994 seasons are summarized below (Table 10-2). Average accuracy and bias are expressed with respect to index scores on two lichen community gradients. The MQO of 90% completeness was exceeded.

Table 10-2. Summary of 1993-1994 Lichen Community Data Quality. Results are given separately for experts and trainees in the multiple-expert study. Accuracy and bias are both measured as percentages, relative to expert data.

Reference plots

Multiple-expert study, experts

Multiple-expert

2

N

3

3

1

16

Species richness

% of expert Bias

61 -39

95 -5

54 -46

Score on climatic gradient

Acc. Bias

4.4 +2.4

3.6 +3.6

8.0 +8.0

Score on air quality gradient

Acc. Bias

11.1 -10.5

4.7 -4.7

5.0 -5.0 study, trainees

(beginners)

Certifications

Audits

7

15

74

73

-26

-50

2.7

10.3

+2.4

+3.7

2.1

6.0

-2.1

+2.7

1

N = sample size

2

excludes two minimal-effort outliers (see text)

139


April 2000

10.6 REFERENCES

Brodo, I. M. 1991. Lichens of the Ottawa Region. National Museums of Canada.

Dey, J. P. 1978. Fruticose and foliose lichens of the high-mountain areas of the southern Appalachians.

Bryologist 81:1-93.

Hale, M.E. 1979. How to Know the Lichens. 2nd Ed. Wm. C. Brown, Dubuque, Iowa.

Hale, M.E. and M. Cole. 1988. Lichens of California. University of California Press, Berkeley. 254 pp.

McCune, B. 1988. Lichen communities along O

228.

3

and SO

2

gradients in Indianapolis. Bryologist 91: 223-

McCune, B. 1992. Field Key to the Lichens of the Northwest Forests West of the Cascade Crest. Dept.

Botany and Plant Pathology, Oregon State University, Corvallis. 19 pp.

McCune, B. and L. Geiser. 1997. Macrolichens of the Pacific Northwest. Oregon State University Press,

Corvallis. 386 pp.

McCune, B. and T. Goward. 1995. Macrolichens of the Northern Rocky Mountains. Eureka, CA: Mad

River Press. 208 pp.

McCune B. and J. Peck. 1994. Lichen Communities Training Document. Oregon State University,

Department of Botany and Plant Pathology, Corvallis, Oregon.

Smith, C., L. Geiser, L. Gough, B. McCune, B. Ryan, and R. Showman. 1993. Species and communities. Chapter 4 in Lichen as Bioindicators of Air Quality. USDA Forest Service Gen. Tech.

Rep. RM-224. van Dobben, H. 1993. Vegetation as a monitor for deposition of nitrogen and acidity. PhD Dissertation,

Utrecht University, Netherlands. 214 pp. (privately published)

Vitt, D.H., J.E. Marsh, and R.B. Bovey. 1988. Mosses, Lichens and Ferns of Northwest North America.

Lonepine Publishing. 296 pp.

140

141


April 2000


April 2000

11 FOREST HEALTH MONITORING SOIL INDICATOR

11.0 SOIL SAMPLING

11.1 OVERVIEW

This section outlines procedures for measuring soils in the field, sampling soils for laboratory analyses, collecting data that will allow estimation of soil erosion risk, and identifying evidence of soil compaction. Techniques and procedures described here were developed to be used by technicians and scientists who are not trained soil scientists. The objective of soil measurement and sampling is to gather needed information in a time-efficient manner, while minimizing plot disturbance.


The Forest Inventory and Analysis (FIA) Phase 3 soil measurements have been developed to address important issues related to the sustainable management of forests. The following important factors were considered when developing the soils indicator (Santiago Declaration, 1995):

• The soil resource is a basic component of all terrestrial ecosystems. The loss of soil will influence the vitality and species composition of forest ecosystems. Extensive areas of soil erosion can have a major effect on aquatic ecosystems associated with forests, recreational opportunities, potable water supplies and the life span of river infrastructure such as dams.

• Soil organic matter is important for water retention, carbon storage, and soil organisms and is an indication of soil nutrient status. Changes in soil organic matter can affect the vitality of forest ecosystems through diminished regeneration capacity of trees, lower growth rates, and changes in species composition.

• Nitrogen, phosphorus, calcium, magnesium and potassium are important nutrients for forests.

• Nutrient and water availability to forest vegetation is dependent on the physical ability of roots to grow and access nutrients, water and oxygen from the soil. This in turn is dependent on soil texture and structure and can be altered by soil compaction. Subsurface hydrology can also be affected by soil compaction resulting from extensive human activities.

• Air and water pollutants are suspected to have a significant cumulative impact on forest ecosystems by affecting regeneration, productivity, and species composition.

• The accumulation of biomass as living vegetation, debris, peat, and soil carbon (carbon pool) is an important forest function in regulating atmospheric carbon and can be a factor in controlling the amount of carbon entering the world's atmosphere.

Based on these issues, several important monitoring questions have been selected for the Phase 3 soils indicator. These questions have been combined in the following statement.

What is the current status and projected trend in the area and percent of land with forest cover:

• with significant soil erosion?

• with significantly diminished soil organic matter and/or changes in other soil chemical properties?

• with significant compaction or change in soil physical properties resulting from human activities?

• experiencing an accumulation of persistent toxic substances?

• contributing to the total global carbon budget, including absorption and release of carbon?

• with significant changes in the amount of moisture holding capacity, internal drainage and rooting depth of forested soils?

Data needed for the determination of soil erosion risk are derived from the Modified Soil Loss

Equation. Generally this equation requires the following factors for analysis: percent slope, slope length, rainfall factor, vegetation cover, and litter cover. Some of these factors are collected as part of mensuration (percent slope and vegetation cover), some will be obtained from other sources (rainfall

143


April 2000 factor). Data collected from Phase 3 plots will be litter cover, ground vegetation cover, forest floor/ground vegetation depth, litter decomposition, percent bare soil, and slope length. The most important factor is the amount of bare, exposed soil on the plot.

Data needed for the determination of soil organic matter are the amount of total organic carbon from the forest floor and the underlying mineral soil (A & B horizons). The soil nutrient status can be estimated from the analysis of total nitrogen for organic layers, and total nitrogen, plant available (Bray 1) phosphorus, and exchangeable bases (calcium, magnesium and potassium) for mineral soil layers. Data needed for the determination of the risk of soils to compaction during harvesting and other silvicultural activities are depth of litter, soil organic matter, and soil texture. The solubility of toxic substances, particularly aluminum, is determined by the pH of the mineral soil. The amount of nitrogen saturation accompanying air pollution is interpreted from the analysis of total nitrogen and total organic carbon in the soil. The carbon in the soil is determined by the analysis of total organic carbon from the organic and mineral soil samples. Soil organic matter, soil texture, soil compaction and depth to a restrictive horizon are important measurements to help assess the ability of soil to store and transmit water.


The soil measurement procedures consist of two parts - soil erosion and compaction measurements and soil surface measurements and sampling. Soil erosion measurements consist of estimates of the percentage of bare soil, percentage of litter or ground cover, combined depth of litter and ground cover, an evaluation of litter decomposition, and slope length. Soil compaction measurements consist of an estimate of the percentage of soil compaction on each subplot along with a description of the type and evidence of compaction.

Soil samples are collected from the forest floor and underlying surface mineral soil layers. The entire forest floor layer is sampled from a known area (e.g., 0.785 ft 2 or 0.073 m 2 ) after measuring the thickness in four directions. If an organic soil layer has developed below the litter layer and is at least 5 cm thick on one side, it is sampled separately from the litter in the known area. The mineral soil surface is sampled in two layers. Using a soil probe, the first 10 cm layer is sampled. Then the next 10 cm layer is collected as a second sample. The texture of each mineral layer sampled is estimated in the field and characterized as loamy, clayey, sandy, or coarse sandy. An alternative procedure for collecting mineral soil samples is to use a bulk density sampler.

Based upon an evaluation of soil textures and subplot condition classes at the soil sampling locations, a decision is made whether or not to composite soil samples by depth increments. However, no compositing is undertaken in the field for samples collected with the bulk density sampler as each individual sample is needed to provide estimates of bulk density for the soil. Following soil sampling, the depth to any restrictive horizon within the top 50 cm is estimated using a soil probe.


The depth of the litter layer can be changed due to trampling at a measurement site. Care should be taken to identify and flag measurement sites for the forest floor depths on the subplots and soil sampling sites and avoid trampling these locations. Magnetic interference can change compass directions and care should be taken to avoid placing metal objects (e.g., knives, sampling equipment, etc.) near the compass when identifying measurement locations in soil sampling sites or on the subplots.

11.1.4 SAFETY

Only minor hazards are associated with the method. Care should be used when cutting the forest floor. Always cut away from the hand that is holding the sampling frame - never towards it. The knife should have a locking blade or a fixed blade. Take care to avoid hazardous plants or insects.

144


April 2000

11.1.5 DEFINITIONS AND CODES

The portable data recorder (PDR) prompt codes for the Soils Data Screen are found in Table 11-1

The PDR prompt codes for the Erosion Data Screen are found in Table 11-2. The codes for % soil cover

(% bare soil, % litter cover, % ground vegetation cover and % soil compaction) are found in Table 11-3.

Table 11-1. Soils Data Screen

Measurement Variables

Soil Sample Location

Condition Class of Sample Site

Soil Sample Visit Number

Forest Floor Thickness (North)

Litter Thickness (North)

Forest Floor Thickness (East)

Litter Thickness (East)

Forest Floor Thickness (South)

Litter Thickness (South)

Forest Floor Thickness (West)

Litter Thickness (West)

Depth to Restrictive Layer

Texture of Depth 0 - 10 cm

Texture of Depth 10 -20 cm

PDR Prompt

(SampLoc)

(CndCls)

(Visit #)

(FflThkN)

(LitTnkN)

(FflThkE)

(LitTnkE)

(FflThkS)

(LitTnkS)

(FflThkW)

(LitTnkW)

(DepSub)

(Texture1)

(Texture2)

Table 11-2. Erosion Data Screen

Measurement Variables

Percent Bare Soil

Percent Litter Cover

Percent Plant Cover

Combined Ground Plant Cover and Litter Depth (North)

Is Litter Decomposing (North)

Combined Ground Plant Cover

PDR Prompt

(%Soil)

(%Liter)

(%Plant)

(DepthN)

(DecompN)

(DepthW) and Litter Depth (West)

Is Litter Decomposing (West)

Combined Ground Plant Cover and Litter Depth (South)

Is Litter Decomposing (South)

Slope Length

Percent Subplot showing

Compaction

(DecompW)

(DepthS)

(DecompS)

(SlpLen)

(%Compc)

145


April 2000

Table 11-3 Codes for % Soil Cover

Code Definition

00

01

65

70

75

80

45

50

55

60

85

90

95

99

25

30

35

40

05

10

15

20 absent (0%) trace (0 > and <1%)

1-5% cover

6-10%

11-15%

16-20%

21-25%

26-30%

31-35%

36-40%

41-45%

46-50%

51-55%

56-60%

61-65%

66-70%

71-75%

76-80%

81-85%

86-90%

91-95%

96-100%

11.2 SAMPLE COLLECTION, PRESERVATION AND STORAGE

Soil samples are collected from three separate soil sampling sites on the plot located near subplots 2,

3, and 4 (see section 11.6.2.1). The procedures for collecting organic and mineral soil samples are described in detail in section 11.6.2.2 and section 11.6.2.3, respectively. General information regarding obtaining permission to sample, sample labeling, and the forwarding of soil samples to an approved laboratory is provided in the following two sections.

11.2.1 SAMPLE PROCUREMENT

This section discusses the procedures for obtaining soil samples in the field. Several government regulations exist regarding the sampling and mailing of soil samples and these will be discussed.

Detailed procedures for taking, labeling and forwarding soil samples will also be presented.

11.2.1.1 NATIONAL HISTORIC PRESERVATION ACT

The National Historic Preservation Act of 1966 (as amended) provides for the protection of historical and cultural artifacts. Due to the random placement of the Phase 3 monitoring design, a possibility exists that a Phase 3 plot may be located on a site of prehistoric or historical significance. In these situations, soil sampling could have the potential of disturbing an historical site. To prevent this from happening,

Phase 3 soil sampling procedures have been developed to minimize soil disturbance. It is recommended that Phase 3 soil procedures be reviewed for possible effects of soil sampling on historic resources. For

146


April 2000

National Forests, National Parks, and other federal lands, detailed procedures must be followed in obtaining permission to take soil samples. Archeologists or cultural resource specialists in these land management agencies are trained in these procedures and will assist in obtaining permission to sample.

Assistance is also available from State Historic Preservation Programs for state and private lands.

If artifacts are encountered on a Phase 3 plot, do not take soil samples. Make a note in the plot notes on the PDR explaining why soil samples were not taken.

11.2.1.2 SOIL SAMPLING

A cross-section of a soil sampling site is presented in Figure 11-1. The forest floor is sampled as a complete unit using a sampling frame (see section 11.6.2.2). If an organic soil layer at least 5 cm (2 inches) thick on one side is encountered below the litter layer, it is also sampled as a separate complete unit using the sampling frame. If the organic soil is less than 5 cm thick, it is included with the litter sample. Mineral soil samples are obtained from the soil sampling site using soil probes or bulk density samplers (see section 11.6.2.3). Soil samples are taken from the top 10 cm (4 inches) of mineral soil and from the next 10 cm (4 inches) of soil for a total depth of 20 cm (8 inches).

Top View

Side View

litter layer organic layer mineral soil

2

3

W x

N x

1' (30.5 cm) x E

Depth Measurements

1= depth of forest floor

2= depth of litter layer

3= depth to a restrictive layer

4= maximum depth of evaluation (50 cm)

1 forest floor

0 cm

10 cm

20 cm

Figure 11-1. Cross-sectional views of soil sampling sites (top view and side view). restrictive layer

4 soil samples

147


April 2000

Once a soil has been disturbed by soil sampling, this exact site should not be resampled except for

QA purposes (see section 11.5.4). During subsequent visits to a Phase 3 plot, new soil sampling sites will need to be identified in an adjacent area. To accomplish this, a soil sampling line has been established to provide for future visits to Phase 3 plots. The soil sampling sites are spaced at 10 ft (3.05 m) intervals alternating on opposite sides of soil sampling site number 1 (see Figure 11-2).

2

Soil Visit Number

9

4

1

8

9 1

1

Figure 11-2. Soil visit numbers.

8

9

9

7

1

5

3

8

3 1 2 4 6 8

10 ft. (3.05 m)

11.2.1.3 LABELING OF SOIL SAMPLES

A label must be placed on each soil sample bag. Pre-printed labels will be provided to each field crew.

An example label is presented in Figure 11-3.

Hexagon # ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ State ___ ___

Plot # ____

Date Sampled

Soil Visit # ____ mon.-____/day-____/2000

LayerType

Sample Type

Litter

Figure 11-3. Sample soil label.

Organic Mineral 1 Mineral 2 subplot subplot subplot

148


April 2000

The following information is to assist with filling out the labels.

State - The 2-digit FIPS code for the State (see Appendix B). This will be used by the soil analysis laboratory for batching of samples.

Hexagon# - The seven digit hexagon number for the plot. This should be the same as that entered on the PDR.

Plot # - If more than one Phase 3 plot is located within a hexagon, then enter the number of the plot. As usually only one Phase 3 plot is located in each hexagon, this number will normally be “1". As most labels are preprinted, this number may already be on the label.

Soil Visit # - Record the soil visit number as described in Figure 11-2. For the first soil sample from a soil sampling line, this number will be “1". All subsequent visits to a plot will have higher numbers. In 2000, all plots should be “1" as this is the first time these plots have been sampled.

Date sampled - Enter the date of soil sampling on this plot

Crew Type - Three choices are provided for crew type. The explanation of these follows:

1 = regular field crew

2 = QA field crew

3 = regional trainers

4 = national experts

QA Status - Four choices are provided for QA status. The explanation of these follows:

1 = standard field plot

2 = duplicate sample from a standard field plot

3 = duplicate sample from a QA reference plot

4 = training plot

Layer Type - Circle one of the four choices. The choices are:

Organic = organic soil layer between litter layer and mineral soil (must be at least 5 cm thick on one side)

Mineral 1 = 0 -10 cm layer of mineral soil

Mineral 2 = 10 - 20 cm layer of mineral soil

Sample Type - Circle one of these four choices. The choices are:

Composite = Soil sample is a composite sample of a given layer type taken from soil sampling sites on all three subplots

Subplot 2 only = Soil sample is from a soil sampling site adjacent to subplot 2 only



11.2.2 SAMPLE MAILING

The shipment of soil samples across state boundaries is strictly regulated in the United States. Soil movement regulations have developed to stop the spread of agricultural pests such as imported fire ant, corn cyst nematode, golden nematode, witchweed, and Mexican fruit fly. States with these pests include

NY, MD, NC, SC, GA, FL TN, AL, MS, LA, AR, OK, and TX. Any laboratory receiving soil samples from areas with these pests must sign a compliance agreement with the Plant Protection and Quarantine

149


April 2000 program of the USDA Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service. After analysis, all soil samples must be stored or disposed of in a safe manner.

Samples are to be shipped on a weekly basis to the soil laboratory. Do not keep soil samples longer than a week unless they can be stored in a refrigerated area.

All crews will be provided with shipping forms for forwarding soil samples to a laboratory that has been approved to receive soil samples from regulated areas. The shipping forms include a duplicate copy. The original form is to be filled out and sent with the soil samples to the laboratory. The duplicate form is to be mailed immediately to the laboratory in a separate envelope along with a copy of the shipping (tracking) information from the package mail (usually courier) service. This separate mailing will serve to notify the laboratory if a shipment of samples has been misplaced during transport. The tracking information will help the laboratory locate the missing samples.

Ship samples using the most economical rate. There is no need to ship soil samples using expensive overnight delivery rates.


Minimum required equipment is listed below. Field personnel may add equipment as needed to improve efficiency in some areas. For example, in very stony areas, a heavy duty miner's pick can be useful. In areas with a lot of surface roots, soil sampling can be expedited by using a small pair of pruning shears to sever roots.

Required Equipment:

• Compass for locating sampling points.

• Measuring tape -100 ft (30 m) loggers tape for measuring distance to sampling locations.

• Retractable measuring tape (cm intervals) for measuring soil layer depths.

• Soil samplers (tube probe or bulk density samplers) for obtaining mineral soil samples.

• Tile probe (42 in) for measuring depth to a restrictive layer.

• Garden trowel for removing samples.

• Small knife with sharp blade for sampling the forest floor layers.

• Small plastic tarp (1 yd x 1 yd) to use as a working surface.

• Indelible ink markers (black thin-line) for marking sample bags.

• Cleaning cloths or tissues.

• Soil sample bags (9 x 12 in or quart size) for mineral soil samples.

• Soil sample bags (10 x 18 in or gallon size) for forest floor samples (e.g. litter).

• Frame for sampling known area of surface litter material. A small bicycle tire (16 x 2.125 in tire size with an internal diameter of 12 in) has been chosen as the standard size.

• Plastic water bottle for use in "texturing" soil.

• Soil sample labels.

• Flagging for marking soil sample points.

• Back pack for carrying sampling equipment to the field.

• Clear plastic shipping tape to cover labels after they have been filled out.

• Garden gloves.

• Optional: pruning shears.

• Additional bulk density sampling equipment: crescent wrench and universal slip wrench for removing bulk density sampler lids when stuck.


As your compass will be used to identify sampling and measurement locations, it is important to calibrate your compass against known directions (e.g., magnetic north). Prior to going into the field, be

150


April 2000 certain to check your PDR to ensure that it is functioning properly. Include a backup battery with your supplies in case the primary battery fails.


The quality assurance program for the soils indicator must address both field measurements and laboratory measurements. The quality assurance approach for field measurements will be the same as used for all other Phase 3 indicators. Measurement quality objectives (MQOs) are established for each of the measurements. The MQOs are then used during training, certification and auditing to assist with the control of data quality. Periodic remeasurements are undertaken to establish data quality attributes such as precision, bias and comparability.

The quality assurance approach for laboratory measurements is not discussed in detail in this methods guide. To assist with establishing data quality, it is necessary to periodically obtain duplicate soil samples and forward these with the routine samples to the laboratory. The variability in these results is used to estimate data quality for the soil sampling measurement system.


Table 11-4 displays the Measurement Quality Objectives (MQOs) associated with the soil indicator data. The table lists the variable name, reporting units and data quality limits used for quality control activities. The data quality limits establish the minimum frequency that a measurement should be reproduced by a field crew member to within a specified range. For example, an MQO of 90% @ +5 cm is interpreted as 90% of the time field crew measurements should be within a window of plus or minus 5 cm from that measured by a regional trainer, national expert crew, or quality assurance crew.

Table 11-4. Soil Indicator Measurement Quality Objectives

Variable

Forest Floor Thickness

Litter Layer Thickness

Depth to Restrictive Horizon

Field Texture Determination

% Bare Soil

% Litter & Ground Cover

Litter & Ground Cover Depth

Litter decomposition

Slope Length

% compaction

Type of Compaction

Evidence of compaction

Reporting Unit

1 cm

1 cm

1 cm

4 classes

22 classes

22 classes

1 cm

2 classes

1 ft (m)

22 classes

2 classes/ type

2 classes/ evidence

Data Quality Limits

90% @+ 5 cm

90% @+5 cm

90% @+15 cm

80% correct +1 class

75% @ +10% (2 classes)

75% @ +15% (3 classes)

80% @ +20 cm

80% correct

75% @ +30 ft (10 m)

75% @ +15% (3 classes)

75% correct

75% correct

11.5.2 TRAINING AND CERTIFICATION

Field crews are trained to make field measurements as well as take soil samples. After training, field crew members are tested and certified for soil indicator measurements. Each trained crew member must demonstrate the ability to conduct soil measurements within established MQOs. Data collected by trainees and the trainers must be recorded and forwarded to the QA coordinator for archiving.

151


April 2000

11.5.3 HOT CHECKS (AUDITS)

Regional trainer crews conducting hot checks (audits) will observe field crew members to ascertain if prescribed methods are being followed. Independent remeasurements of soil depth measurements

(forest floor, litter layer, depth to restrictive horizon) will be conducted by the experts at the same soil sampling as the standard field crews.

The expert crew will also collect separate soil samples after the standard crew has collected their samples. The forest floor layer(s) is resampled using the sampling frame within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the sampling site where the forest floor layer was sampled originally. The mineral horizon duplicate samples are collected from the soil sampling site after the standard crew has completed their sampling effort.

These samples should be labeled as coming from Crew Type “3", QA Status “2".

11.5.4 REMEASUREMENTS

Remeasurements are necessary to provide estimates of the quality of data. The soil indicator includes both field observations and soil sampling. Since these are different types of activities, they will be treated separately.

Remeasurements of field observations by regional trainer crews occur on routine plots recently visited by a standard field crew (cold checks or hot checks) or on reference plots. All erosion and soil compaction remeasurements can be taken on the subplots as described in the soil measurement methods. Reference plots should be selected with areas of bare and compacted soil to allow for an evaluation of a crew’s ability to make these measurements.

Remeasurements of soil sampling efforts are undertaken by the collection of duplicate soil samples.

Routine field crews must a lso participate in the collection of duplicate soil samples. These samples are collected at the same time as the standard samples. The duplicate samples are collected from all layers

(forest floor, 0 - 10 cm, 10 - 20 cm). The forest floor (e.g., - litter layer) is resampled using the sampling frame on an undisturbed area within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the sampling site where the forest floor was originally sampled. The mineral horizon duplicate samples are collected from the same soil sampling site and in an identical manner to the standard soil samples. Label these samples as coming from Crew Type “1", QA

Status “2".

Routine field crews must take duplicate samples on every tenth forested plot on which soil sampling is done during the field season. If a crew visits less than ten plots, then the crew needs only to take one set of duplicate soil samples. Only two duplicate mineral soil samples need to be collected from a plot. If the mineral soil samples are composited on a plot, also collect composite duplicate soil samples. If the mineral soil samples are not composited, only collect duplicate mineral soil samples from one of the soil sampling sites (e.g., subplot 2, 0 -10 cm and 10 -20 cm).

For cold checks, the regional trainers will collect duplicate soil samples at the sampling site after taking the field observation measurements described above. New forest floor samples (litter, organic soil if present) will need to be taken as close as possible to where the forest floor was originally sampled

(within 5 ft or 1.5 m). Select a site that was not trampled or compacted during the previous sampling.

Label all samples as coming from Crew Type “3", QA Status “2".

11.5.5 DEBRIEFING

Debriefing provides a opportunity for field crews to help improve the soils indicator for subsequent field seasons. Each crew member conducting soil measurements should fill out a soils questionnaire at the end of the field season. Additional verbal comments should be solicited from field crew members if debriefing is conducted with regional trainers in a meeting format.

152


April 2000


Method performance will be determined through the analysis of QA remeasurement data and the comparison of results from duplicate soil samples.

11.6 PROCEDURES

11.6.1 SOIL EROSION AND COMPACTION MEASUREMENTS

Data needed for the determination of soil erosion risk are derived from the Modified Soil Loss

Equation. Generally this equation requires the following factors for analysis: percent slope, slope length, rainfall factor, vegetation cover, and litter cover. Ground vegetation and forest litter can reduce the erosive effect of rainfall by intercepting falling raindrops. The amount of rainfall energy at the soil surface depends of the percent cover and height of these components.

11.6.1.1 SOIL EROSION MEASUREMENTS

The following data screen is used to collect erosion data on each Phase 3 subplot: (see Figure 11-4)

POINT 1 Erosion Data

%Soil .. %Liter .. %Plant .. DepthN ..

DecompN . DepthW .. DecompW . DepthS ..

DecompS . SlpLen .. %Compc ..

Figure 11-4. PDR screen for soil erosion and compaction measurements.

1. Stand in the middle of the subplot and estimate the percent cover of bare soil (without litter), leaf and branch litter (include down woody debris with the litter measurement), and ground vegetation cover (do not include rocks protruding through the soil as bare soil). For purposes of estimating the area, 1% is an area 1.3 m x 1.3 m (4.25 ft x 4.25 ft). The size of the microplot is 8% of the area of the subplot. For each %cover measurement, it is often helpful to divide the subplot into four quadrants, each with a total possible %cover of 25%. For example, if ½ of each quadrant was bare soil, the total

%cover would be (25% x ½) x 4 = 50% cover. Estimate the %cover (e.g., % bare soil) for each quadrant and then add all four quadrants together to obtain a total for the subplot. Once an overall value has been calculated, stand back and look at the entire subplot to consider if this estimate seems reasonable. Evaluate each subplot as point data, i.e., as though it were only 1 condition class. This method is similar to estimating the percent cover of seedlings, ferns, etc. in the microplot.

2. Measure the combined depth of the ground plant cover and forest floor at 3 locations on each subplot. These locations are centered 12 ft (3.66 m) due north, west and south of the subplot center

(Figure 11-5). Consider an area approximately 4 ft (1.2 m) in radius and evaluate the average height in cm. (As with all soil depth measurements, this height measurement must be in cm). First evaluate the depth of the forest floor. If the forest floor depth is equal to or greater than 5 cm, then enter a code of “05" on the PDR. This code is interpreted as meaning that the forest floor is providing adequate protection to the mineral soil and therefore there is no need to evaluate the ground cover depth. However, if less than 5 cm of depth is found for the forest floor, then the average depth of the ground cover must be evaluated. Specific instructions are provided in section 11.11. Please note that if the depth of the ground cover exceeds 99 cm, record the value “99" on the PDR. Ignore any areas of bare soil in the evaluation area and only evaluate the ground cover.

153


April 2000

W

4 ft

X

12 ft

N

X

+

X

4 ft (1.2 m)

12 ft (3.7 m)

12 ft

4 ft

S

Figure 11-5. Location of soil erosion measurements for combined ground plant cover and litter depth.

As you are measuring litter/ground cover depth, note whether the litter is decomposing (i.e., becoming part of the mineral soil) and record as a yes or no on the PDR or data sheet. The purpose of this measurement is to identify if erosion has occurred recently and has been covered by litter fall.

If the litter is being decomposed and incorporated into the soil, then erosion is not likely occurring.

3. Estimate the slope length on each subplot from the subplot center looking up the slope. The slope length is the distance up the slope to a point where runoff would begin to flow towards the subplot center. Examples of how to measure slope lengths are provided in sections 11.9 and 11.10.

The maximum length of slope recorded is 99 ft (32 m). If the slope length exceeds this amount, enter

“99" (or 32 for regions using metric ) on the PDR. Plots with no slope are recorded as zero slope length. If the subplot center is at the top of a knoll or on a flat surface, record the slope length as “0".

11.6.1.2 SOIL COMPACTION MEASUREMENTS

The final entry on the PDR screen for the erosion measurements is an estimate of the % of the subplot area showing evidence of soil compaction. The TALLY program is designed such that when a non-zero value is entered for this measurement, a pop-up screen appears requesting additional information regarding the evidence for compaction and the type of compaction (Figure 11-6).

154


April 2000

POINT 1 Erosion Data

%Soil .. %Liter .. %Plant .. DepthN ..

DecompN . DepthW .. DecompW . DepthS ..

DecompS . SlpLen .. %Compc 01 EvDens .

EvPlaty . EvRut . EvStruc . EvMottl .

EvOther . TyRutTr . TyComTr . TyComAr .

TyOther .

Figure 11-6. PDR screen for soil erosion and compaction measurements when a non-zero value is entered for %Compc (percentage of subplot compacted).

After completing the erosion measurements for a subplot, evaluate the subplot area for evidence of soil compaction such as increased soil density, platy structure, rutting, loss of mineral soil structure or soil mottling. Soil compaction is assessed relative to the conditions of adjacent undisturbed soil. Exclude from your evaluation improved roads as these have previously been described. If you identify an area of the subplot you believe may have been compacted, identify a portion of that compacted area just outside of the subplot for detailed evaluation. The reason for working outside of the subplot is to prevent any disturbance to the subplot area. The following codes are used to describe the evidence for compaction

(these descriptions are also available on help screens on the PDR):

EvDens Evidence of compaction is a noticeable change in density compared to adjacent undisturbed soil. Recognized by a difference in resistance to penetration with a shovel or probe or a resistance to crushing blocks of soil between the thumb and index finger (assuming similar moisture contents).

EvPlaty Evidence of compaction is a coarse platy structure. The soil breaks apart in consolidated plates that are typically 2 inch (1 cm) or greater in thickness. This structure is not evident in adjacent undisturbed soil.

EvRut Evidence of compaction is the formation of impressions or ruts in the soil. The depth criteria for ruts are 2 inches (5 cm) into mineral soil or 6 inches (15 cm) deep from the undisturbed forest litter surface.

EvStruc Evidence of compaction is the loss of normal structure evident in adjacent undisturbed soil.

For example, puddling of soil.

EvMottl Evidence of compaction is the formation of mottles (specks of orange and/or green color) in the soil. These are not evident in adjacent undisturbed soil.

EvOther Evidence of compaction is some other cause not previously listed. (An explanation must be entered in the plot notes).

Once you have determined that an area shows evidence of compaction, estimate the % area of the subplot showing evidence of soil compaction. Follow the same procedures used when estimating the percent cover of bare soil, litter and ground vegetation - remember that 1% of the subplot is an area of

4.25 x 4.25 ft (1.3 m x 1.3 m) - and enter this estimate on the PDR. When the pop-up screen appears, enter a code of “1" for each evidence of soil compaction you identified or a “0" if a particular evidence was not present. Due to differences in how various soils respond to soil compaction events, do not expect to encounter all evidence types on a subplot. However, at least one evidence type must be entered.

Conclude your evaluation with a description of the type of compaction. The following codes are used along with an explanation. Example drawings are also provided (see Figures 11-7 and 11-8). Enter a code of “1" for each type of soil compaction you identify or a “0" if a particular type is not present.

155


April 2000

_

soil surface or

5 cm into the mineral soil

Figure 11-7. Type of compaction is a rutted trail. (adapted from British Columbia

Ministry of Forestry, 1997)

4.25 ft

Compacted

trail area

Figure 11-8. Type of compaction is a compacted trail. Area identified representes 1% of overall subplot area. (adapted from British Columbia Ministry of Forestry, 1997)

156


April 2000

TyRutTr Type of compaction is a rutted trail. Ruts must be at least 2 inches (5 cm) deep into mineral

soil or 6 inches (15 cm) deep from the undisturbed forest litter surface.

TyComTr Type of compaction is a compacted trail (usually the result of many passes of heavy machinery or vehicles).

TyComAr Type of compaction is a compacted area. Examples include the junction areas of skid trails, landing areas, work areas, etc.

TyOther Type of compaction is some other form. (An explanation must be entered in the plot notes).

11.6.2 SOIL SURFACE MEASUREMENTS AND SAMPLING PROCEDURES

11.6.2.1 LOCATION OF SOIL SAMPLING SITES

Soil sampling sites are located on soil sampling lines adjacent to subplots 2, 3, and 4 on the Phase 3 plot (Figure 11-9). The location of a soil sampling site on the soil sampling line is determined by the number of times a plot has previously been sampled (see section 11.2.1.2) or visit number.

Subplot 2

Soil Sampling Line

2

90

Distance between plot center and soil sampling line

Subplot 4

Soil Sampling Line

1

is 90' (27.4 m)

30

Subplot 3

Soil Sampling Line

4

150

3

Figure 11-9. Location of soil sampling lines.

The forest floor layers (litter layer and organic soil layer - if present) are sampled at only one soil sampling site on each plot. The primary location is the soil sampling site associated with subplot 2. If no litter layer is found at the sampling site on subplot 2, proceed to subplot 3. Proceed to subplot 4 if necessary.

Mineral soil samples are taken from three soil sampling sites and composited by depth layers into individual soil samples for analysis. Locate the three soil sampling sites using the following procedure:

157


April 2000

• From the center of Subplot 2 of the Phase 3 plot, measure 30 ft (9.2 m) on an azimuth of 180 degrees or due south. Mark the soil sampling site with flagging. This is soil sampling site for visit

# 1 to the subplot 2 soil sampling line.

• From the center of Subplot 3 of the Phase 3 plot, measure 30 ft (9.2 m) on an azimuth of 300 degrees (northwest). Mark the soil sampling site with flagging. This is the soil sampling site for visit # 1 to the subplot 3 soil sampling line.

• From the center of Subplot 4 of the Phase 3 plot, measure 30 ft (9.2 m) 60 degrees (northeast).

Mark the soil sampling site with flagging. This is soil sampling site for visit #1 for subplot 4 soil sampling line.

During the first visit to a plot for soil sampling, soil sampling site with visit #1 will be used to for soil depth measurements and to collect soil samples. On subsequent visits to a plot, soil sampling sites of numbers 2 or larger will be used (depending on the number of times a plot has previously been sampled).

These location of these soil sampling sites is shown in Figures 11-2 and 11-9).

Proceed to the location of the appropriate sampling site along a soil sampling line. If it appears that a soil sample can be taken, place a small plastic tarp on the ground beside the sampling point. Record the condition class for the soil sampling site on the PDR (see Figure 11-10). Also record the soil visit number

(see Figure 11-2). If the condition class for the soil sample is different from any recorded on the 4 subplots, enter a condition class of “0" in the PDR.

LINE 1 Soils

Sampled? 1 SampLoc 1 CndCls .

Visit# 1 FflThkN .. LitTnkN ..

FflThkE .. LitTnkE .. FflThkS ..

LitTnkS .. FflThkW .. LitTnkW ..

DepSub .. Texture1 . Texture2 .

Figure 11-10 PDR screen for soil sampling site.

If the soil cannot be sampled at that point due to an obstruction such as a boulder, tree, large down woody material, standing water (etc.), the sampling point will need to be relocated. Look in any direction

(preferably along the soil sampling line) for a distance of 5 ft (1.5 m) to find a suitable soil sampling site.

Enter one of the following codes in the PDR to describe whether or not the soil was sampled.

Sampled?

1 Sampled

2 Not sampled: non-forest

The following are for forest conditions:

3 Not sampled: too rocky to sample

4 Not sampled: water or boggy

5 Not sampled: access denied

6 Not sampled: too dangerous to sample

7 Not sampled: obstruction in sampling area

8 Not sampled: broken or lost equipment

9 Not sampled: other - enter reason in plot notes

11.6.2.2 FOREST FLOOR LAYERS

The forest floor consists of the litter layer and decomposed organic soil material overlying the mineral soil. Sample the forest floor organic surface material as follows. Place a sampling frame of known area

158


April 2000 over the sampling point taking care not to compact the litter layer. Locate the points due north, due east, due south and due west on the inside of the soil sampling frame and mark these with small vinyl stake flags. Carefully remove the sampling frame. Beginning at the north flag, measure the thickness of the forest floor in cm from the top of the litter layer to the boundary between the mineral soil and the forest floor. Record this measurement in the PDR. Next, measure the depth of the litter layer component of the forest floor. The bottom of the litter layer can be distinguished as the location that plant parts (such as leaves or needles) are no longer distinguishable due to decomposition. Record this measurement in the

PDR. For some soils, the depth of the forest floor and the litter layer may be the same. Continue to the other three locations (due east, south and west) and record the forest floor and litter layer depths in the

PDR. For locations where bare soil or bedrock material is exposed, enter a “0" cm depth in the PDR.

The next step is to sample the forest floor. However, a decision must be made whether or not to take one complete sample of the forest floor or to split the forest floor sample into two separate samples - a litter layer and an organic soil layer. The criterion for making this decision is that an organic soil layer must be at least 5 cm thick on at least one side of the soil sampling frame before it is collected as a separate sample. In other words, the difference between the forest floor thickness and the litter layer thickness must be at least 5 cm at one of the measuring locations (N, E, S, or W) before a separate organic soil layer is collected. a) Collection of forest floor as one complete layer - Replace the soil sampling frame. Using the sharp knife, carefully cut through the forest floor along the inner surface of the frame to separate it from the surrounding soil. Carefully remove any live forbs, grasses or shrubs and all living above-ground vegetation from the sample area. Using inward scooping motions, carefully remove the entire volume of the forest floor from within the confines of the sampling frame. Discard any woody debris above

1/4 in (0.5 cm) in diameter or about the diameter of a pencil. Also, discard any rocks or pebbles inadvertently collected with the forest floor material. Working over the tarp, place the entire forest floor layer sample into a pre-labeled gallon sample bag. In some areas more than one bag might be required to hold the sample. If so, label the bags with identical information, then add "1 of 2" and "2 of 2" respectively. Make certain the bag is properly labeled and then seal it securely. For the layer type, circle both “litter” and “organic” on the label(s). b) Collection of forest floor as two separate layers - When the forest floor contains decomposed organic soil material at least 5 cm thick, this layer is sampled separately from the litter layer. As with the previous instructions, replace the soil sampling frame after measuring the thickness of the forest floor and litter layers. Using a sharp knife, carefully cut through the forest floor along the inner surface of the frame to separate it from the surrounding soil. Carefully remove any live forbs, grasses or shrubs and all living above-ground vegetation from the sample area. Using inward scooping motions, carefully remove the entire volume of the litter layer from within the confines of the sampling frame remembering that the bottom of the litter layer can be distinguished as the location where plant parts are no longer distinguishable due to decomposition. Discard any woody debris above 1/4 in (0.5 cm) in diameter or about the diameter of a pencil. Working over the tarp, place the litter layer sample into a pre-labeled gallon sample bag. For the layer type, circle “litter” on the label.

Next, collect the decomposed organic soil material into a separate gallon bag. Again, use inward scooping motions to collect the entire volume of material down to the mineral soil surface. Discard any rocks or pebbles that might inadvertently be collected with the organic soil layer. Working over the tarp, place the organic soil layer sample into a pre-labeled gallon sample bag. For the layer type, circle

“organic” on the label.

11.6.2.3 MINERAL SURFACE LAYERS

Two methods for sampling soils are the soil probe method and the bulk density method. Each of these methods will be described separately. Only use one of these methods to collect soil samples.

159


April 2000

11.6.2.3.1 SOIL PROBE SAMPLING METHOD

After removing the forest floor layer(s) from inside the bicycle tire, use a soil tube probe to obtain soil samples from 0-10 and 10-20 cm layers. First insert the soil sampling device into the soil to a depth of 10 cm. Remove this sample and place it into a quart-sized sample bag. For layer type, circle “Mineral1" on the label. Reinsert the sampling device in the same hole and collect an additional sample from the 10-20 cm depth. Remove the soil sample and place it into a separate quart sized sample bag. For layer type, circle “Mineral2" on the label. Repeat this procedure at three other locations in the sampling area and add the soil samples collected to the appropriately labeled soil sample bag.

With soil probes of sufficient length, it may be possible to insert the sampling device directly to a total depth of 20 cm or more. When using this technique, the two soil samples can be separated by depth once the sampling device is removed from the soil. This technique is acceptable only if the soil shows no sign of being compressed within the sampling device. Otherwise, it will be necessary to insert the sampling device two times at the same location to the appropriate depths.

After completing the soil sampling, collect one additional sample from each depth for soil texturing.

Estimate the texture of the 0-10 cm layer as loamy, clayey, sandy or coarse sandy on the PDR. This is a accomplished by adding a small amount of water to the soil and making a small ball of soil between your fingers. If the soil sticks together and can be formed into a ribbon by squeezing the ball between your fingers, record it as being clayey. If the soil will not stay in a ball and has a grainy texture, the texture is either sandy or coarse sandy. Sandy soil may have a fair amount of silt and clay, while coarse sandy soil is nearly all sand with no structure. If the soil sticks together, but ribbons with difficulty, then record the texture as loamy. Repeat the procedure for the 10-20 cm layer and record the result on the PDR.

Insert the tile probe into the center of the sampling area and push it into the soil to identify if a restrictive horizon exists. The maximum depth for testing for a restrictive horizon is 50 cm. A restrictive horizon is defined as a soil condition limiting root growth. This limitation may be physical (hard rock) or chemical (acid layer) or both. If a restrictive layer is encountered within the 50 cm, record the depth to the restrictive horizon in cm. If a restrictive horizon is not encountered, record "50" on the PDR.

Some soils are more difficult to sample than others due to certain soil properties. Certain soils contain a large percentage of rock fragments or pebbles and may be difficult to sample. A trowel or shovel may be needed to collect adequate sample from these soils. Another approach is to use the soil sampling device at a number of locations immediately adjacent to the soil sampling location (within a 5 ft radius) until enough sample can be obtained. The goal is to obtain approximately two handfuls of soil material from each depth.

On occasion, shallow ground water may be close to the surface of the soil. Since it may not be possible to sample these soils with the technique described in this method, make a note on the PDR about why the soil was not sampled.

After completing sampling from the first soil sampling site (associated with subplot 2), proceed to the next soil sampling line (associated with subplot 3). Locate the next soil sampling site and lay the tarp down beside the area to be sampled. Place the soil sampling frame on the soil surface to locate the points for measuring the forest floor and litter depths. Measure the depths as before. Remove the forest floor and place it on the tarp, but do not sample it. Collect samples of the 0-10 cm and 10-20 cm layers using the same procedures used at the first sampling location. For now, place the samples in new sample bags with separate labels. Estimate the texture of both layers recording the texture as clayey, loamy, sandy or coarse sandy. Using the tile probe, evaluate the depth to a restrictive horizon. Replace the forest floor material.

Proceed to the third soil sampling line associated subplot 4. Repeat the procedure followed at the subplot 3 soil sampling site. If all criteria are met for compositing the soil samples from across the plot

(see next paragraph), place the soil samples from subplot 3 and subplot 4 into the bags from subplot 2.

Make certain that only soil samples from the same depths (0-10 cm or 10-20 cm) are mixed together.

160


April 2000

The compositing of soil samples in the field is encouraged to reduce the costs associated with the handling and analysis of separate soil samples. However, three conditions must be met before soil samples can be composited:

All three soil sampling sites must come from the same condition class.

The soil textures encountered at the three soil sampling sites must be similar for each layer.

Only samples from the same soil depth layers are to be combined.

Upon inspection of the plot, a decision can be reached whether or not more than one condition class exists on the three soil sampling sites. If different condition classes are found, keep the samples from the three soil sampling sites separate and note the subplot origin of the samples on the soil sample labels. If very different soil textures are encountered, also treat the soils as separate samples.

Seal the sample bags and make sure they are properly labeled There should be at least three bags as follows:

• One gallon bag with a sample of the soil forest floor layer from soil sampling line associated with subplot 2.

• One quart bag with a composite of three samples taken from the 0-10 cm mineral soil layer at the three soil sampling sites.

• One quart bag with a composite of three samples taken from the 10-20 cm layer at the three soil sampling points.

Be sure to clean all soil sampling equipment before sampling soil on the next plot.

11.6.2.3.2 BULK DENSITY SOIL SAMPLING PROCEDURES

Soil samples for evaluating soil chemical properties and soil bulk density are obtained on Phase 3 plots using 2-in diameter by 8-in length double-cylinder core samplers. The following procedure identifies where to collect soil samples on the plot, how to collect them with the core sampler, and provides suggestions for dealing with problems when sampling.

1. Location: The location of the soil sampling and bulk density measurements during the FY2000 field season is at the visit number 1 location along the soil sampling lines (see section 11.6.2.1).

Diagrams describing the location of these points are found in Figures 11-2 and 11-9.

Collect a forest floor layer sample or samples as described in section 11.6.2.2.

2. Core Sampler with Slide Hammer - Insert two 10 cm brass rings into the core sampler. Screw the lid of the sampler until it is hand-tight. Place the slide hammer onto the screw on the sampler lid and screw the slide hammer onto the sampler with a twisting motion until it is hand-tight against the sampler lid.

Note: All components must be screwed tight and remain tight during sampling. If they are loose, the sampler will be damaged as the force of the hammering motion will distort the threads on the core sampler lid.

Place the core sampler in a vertical position on the exposed mineral soil (where the forest floor has been removed) and begin to drive the sampler into the soil using the slide hammer. Continue driving the sampler into the ground until the top of the sampler is 2.5 cm above the ground surface. At this point, the soil within the inner core should be just reaching the inside of the lid as it is 2.5 cm thick.

161


April 2000

With the slide hammer handle down, rock the sampler back and forth about 1 cm. This motion serves the dual purpose of breaking the soil loose at the bottom of the sampler and making it easier to remove the sampler from the soil. Do not extend the sliding part of the slide hammer upwards to gain additional leverage as this will cause the hammer to bend or break.

Remove the core sampler from the ground by pulling the slide hammer upwards in a smooth vertical motion. It the corer sticks in the soil, remove the core sampler from the ground by reversing the hammering motion of the slide hammer. This hammer motion should also only be vertical. This is not the preferred method of removal as soil tends to fall from the sampler with repeated upward pounding motions.

Once the core sampler has been removed from the soil, check the bottom to assure that an intact core sample has been collected. Remove the slide hammer and the core sampler lid. If either of these sticks, use a crescent wrench and the slip wrench to separate the parts. Invert the sampler and remove the brass rings and soil core as an intact unit over a plastic surface.

With a knife, cut the core at the 10 cm and 20 cm depths using the brass rings as a guide.

Place the contents of each brass ring in soil sampling bags and label the bags according to procedures identified in Section 11.2.1.3. Be careful that all components of the soil cores are placed in the sample bags as the amount of soil found in the soil cores is critical to the calculation of the soil bulk densities.

Dealing with problems : Due to the many different types of soil found in the field, it may be difficult to obtain soil bulk density samples with the above procedures. The following section provides some suggestions to the field crew members on how to overcome these problems. Any additional suggestions would be welcomed to assist future crews using this technique to obtain bulk density samples. a) Problem: core sampler will not penetrate ground to the required 20 cm depth

Suggestion: Core sampler may have been stopped by the presence of a large bolder, rock or bedrock. Remove any soil collected in the sampler during the first attempt at sampling. Move sampler to a different location within the area where the forest floor has been removed or within the available soil sampling area (5 ft each side of the original soil sampling location described above). Test for the presence of an obstruction using a plot stake pin (at least 20 cm in length).

If the same problem exists at this point, move to one other location and attempt to obtain a complete sample one final time. (i.e., - maximum of 3 attempts). If a complete sample from the

0-10 cm depth can be obtained, collect that sample. Otherwise, record on the PDR the reason why a sample was not obtained using the following codes at the entry on the soil sampling screen labeled “Sampled?”.

Remember to record the depth in cm to the restrictive layer on the PDR under the heading of

“DEPSUB”. b) Problem: Sampler penetrates to 20 cm, but a complete core does not come out of soil when sampler is removed.

Suggestions: Experience has shown that certain soil types are not easily removed by the core sampler. These include very sandy soils or wet clayey soil. The evidence of this happening is that an incomplete core will be found within the sampler when it is removed from the ground.

When an incomplete 20 cm core is collected, remove the length of core collected from the sampler.

Measure the length of the collected core. Reinsert the sampler and push it into the soil to an additional depth close to the length of the collected core. Remove the new core from the sampler.

162


April 2000

When placed together, the two cores should exceed 20 cm in length. With a knife, cut the cores at the 10 cm and 20 cm lengths. Replace the additional soil into the soil hole.

11.6.2.4 ORGANIC SOIL SAMPLING

In certain regions of the country, organic soils are found in many forested areas. These soils will require some modifications to the sampling procedures from the mineral soils.

When an organic soil is encountered, the definition of the forest floor will be limited to include only the litter layer due to the large thickness of underlying organic soil. Sample the litter layer as described in section 11.6.2.2.

Collect organic soil samples from the underlying 0-10 cm and 10-20 cm layers. On the soil label, circle “organic” under soil layer and circle the appropriate depths (i.e., 0-10 cm or 10-20 cm). When describing soil texture, enter a “0" on the PDR for organic soil. Evaluate the depth to a restrictive horizon beginning from the base of the litter layer.

11.6.3 LABORATORY ANALYSES

Phase 3 soil samples are analyzed in the laboratory to determine the following:

Mineral and organic soil samples

• pH in water and in 0.01 M CaCl

2

• Total organic carbon

• Total nitrogen

• Exchangeable Ca

• Exchangeable Mg

• Exchangeable K

• Exchangeable Al (low pH soils only)

• Bray I Phosphorus

Litter layer

• Total carbon

• Total organic carbon

• Total nitrogen

Instructions for handling and storing soil samples in the laboratory and for performing required analyses are available in a separate document.

163


April 2000

11.7 REFERENCES

British Columbia Ministry of Forestry. 1997. Soil conservation surveys guidebook. http://www.for.gov.bc.ca/tasb/legsregs/fpc/fpcguide/SOILSURV/soil-toc.htm

Kern, J.S., M.L. Papp, J.J. Lee, and L.J. Blume. 1988. Soil Sampling Manual for the Direct/Delayed

Response Project Mid-Appalachian Soil Survey. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Corvallis,

OR.

NCASI. 1983. Field Study Program Elements to Assess the Sensitivity of Soils to Acidic Deposition

Induced Alterations in Forest Productivity. Technical Bulletin No. 404. National Council of the Paper

Industry for Air and Stream Improvement, Inc., New York.

Ritters, K., M. Papp, D. Cassell, and J. Hazard (eds.). 1991. Forest Health Monitoring Plot Design and

Logistics Study. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC.

Santiago Declaration. 1995. Criteria and indicators for the conservation and sustainable management of temperate and boreal forests: The Montreal process.

Soil and Water Quality: An Agenda for Agriculture. 1993. Committee on Long-Range Soil and Water

Conservation, Board of Agriculture, National Research Council. National Academy Press,

Washington, DC.

United Nations Economic Commission For Europe, Convention on Long-range Transboundary Air

Pollution. 1994. Manual on Methods and Criteria for Harmonized Sampling, Assessment, Monitoring and Analysis of the Effects of Air Pollution on Forests. 3rd ed.

USDA-Soil Conservation Service. 1992c. Soil Survey Manual. Title 430-V-SSM, U.S. Government

Printing Office, Washington, DC.

164


April 2000

11.9 EXAMPLE DATA SHEETS

Soil Data Sheet 1

Phase 3 Soil Sampling Site Measurements

State ____ ____ Hexagon ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___

Plot # ___ Soil Visit # _____

Date _________ Crew Member (s) _________________

___ __________________

1. Information Regarding Soil Sampling Sites

Soil Sample Location Condition Class

Adjacent Subplot 2 _____

Adjacent Subplot 3 _____

Adjacent

2.

Forest Floor Thickness (cm)

N E S W

Subplot 2 Soil Sampling Site ____ ____ ____ ____



3. Litter Layer Thickness (cm)

N E S W




4. Depth to Subsoil Restrictive Layer (cm)

Subplot 2 Soil Sampling Site ____



5. Field Texture Determination (check appropriate texture)

Organic Loamy Clayey Sandy CSand

Subplot 2 Site 0-10 cm ____ ____ ____ ____ ____

10 - 20 cm ____ ____ ____ ____ ____

Subplot 3 Site 0-10 cm ____ ____ ____ ____ ____

10 - 20 cm ____ ____ ____ ____ ____

Subplot 4 Site 0-10 cm ____ ____ ____ ____ ____

10 - 20 cm ____ ____ ____ ____ ____

165


April 2000

Soil Data Sheet 2

Forest Health Monitoring

Soil Erosion and Compaction Measurements

State _____________ Hex Number ____________

Date ______________ Crew Member(s)_________

Subplot

1

2

3

4

Bare

Soil a

(%)

Litter

(%) a

Groun d

Cover

(%) a

Depth (cm )

N

Litter &

Ground

Cover

W S b

Litter

Decomp.

Y or N c

N W S

Slope

Length d

(circle units)

ft or m b c a

Percent area cover estimated from subplot center.

Representative depth from a 4 ft. radius around measurement point d

Litter decomposing and mixing with mineral soil: “Y” or “N” response.

Length of slope (specify if measured in feet or meters)

Subplot 1 Subplot 2 Measurement

% area compacted

Evidence - Density

Evidence - Platy Structure

Evidence - Ruts

Evidence - Loss of normal structure

Evidence - Mottles

Evidence - Other (Explain)*

Type - Rutted Trail

Type - Compacted Trail

Type - Compacted Area

Type - Other (Explain)*

*Explanations:

Subplot 3 Subplot 4

167


April 2000

11.9 SLOPE LENGTH REFERENCE INFORMATION

More questions have been asked in training sessions regarding the slope length measurements than any other soil erosion measurement. The purpose of this section is to provide some additional information regarding the slope length measurement to help field crews collect data in a consistent manner.

The definition of slope length is the distance from the origin of overland flow to the point where either

(1) the slope gradient decreases enough that deposition begins; (2) runoff becomes concentrated in a defined channel; or (3) a particular position on the landscape or “point of interest” has been chosen as the location for the measurement of slope length (such as a subplot center). For the purposes of our measurements in Phase 3, the 3 rd

case is the one of interest to us. To establish the ends for the slope length measurement, the crew member walks upslope from the subplot center, moving perpendicular to the contour, until the origin of overland flow is reached. This point may be the top of a hill or a divide down the nose of a ridge (see Figure 11-11). The arrows in the diagram show the direction of the flow of surface water.

Figure 11-11. Examples of slope lengths (from Renard et al.,1997).

168


April 2000

11.10 SLOPE LENGTH SITUATIONS FOUND IN THE FIELD

Many different slope length situations are found in the field. Additional guides are helpful, especially for forest lands. The following figure (Figure 11-12) provides some slope length examples. Of particular interest to Phase 3 field crews is the identification of the location where overland flow of water originates - as slope length is measured in Phase 3 from a point of interest (subplot center) rather than from an area of deposition of sediment or concentration of flow in a defined channel.

Figure 11-12. Examples of slope length (Dissmeyer and Foster, 1980).

Legend:

Slope A. If undisturbed forest (on flat ground) above does not yield surface runoff , the top of slope starts with edge of undisturbed forest and extends down slope to windrow if runoff is concentrated by windrow.

Slope B. Point of origin of runoff to windrow if runoff is concentrated by windrow.

Slope C. From windrow to flow concentration point.

Slope D. Point of origin of runoff to road that concentrates runoff.

Slope E. From road to flood plain where deposition would occur.

Slope F. On nose of hill, from point of origin of runoff to flood plain where deposition would occur.

Slope G. Point of origin of runoff to slight depression where runoff would concentrate.

References:

Dissmeyer, G.E. and G.R. Foster. 1980. A Guide for Predicting Sheet and Rill Erosion on Forest Land.

USDA Forest Service, Southern Region, Altlanta, Georgia. Technical Publication SA-TP-11. 40pp.

Renard, K.G., G.R. Foster, G.A. Weesies, D.K. McCool, and D.C. Yoder, coordinators. 1997. Predicting

Soil Erosion by Water: A Guide to Conservation Planning with the Revised Universal Soil Loss

Equation (RUSLE). U.S. Department of Agriculture, Agric. Handbook No. 703, 404pp.

169


April 2000

11.11 DETAILED PROCEDURES FOR MEASURING FOREST FLOOR & GROUND COVER DEPTH -

SOIL EROSION MEASUREMENTS

The purpose of this section is to provide some additional guidance regarding the measurement of forest floor and plant cover depth for soil erosion. Forest floor and plant cover protect the soil surface from the erosive energy on raindrops. The following steps should be followed when making this measurement:

1) Proceed to the center of the 4 ft (1.2 m) radius circle which is 12 ft north of the subplot center (see

Figure 11-5).

2)

“5".

Measure the depth of the forest floor in cm. If the forest floor is at least 5 cm thick, enter a “5" for the depth of forest floor/ground cover. Even if the forest floor thickness is greater than 5 cm, enter a

Explanation: Soil erosion experiments have shown that a forest floor at least 5 cm thick provides adequate protection from rainfall. If the forest floor is less than 5 cm, it is important to consider the plant cover protection. If the forest floor is greater than 5 cm thick, this is equivalent to the protection afforded a forest floor of 5 cm thickness.

Note: Remember to note whether or not the forest floor is decomposing as you measure its thickness.

If the forest floor thickness is less than 5 cm, it is necessary to estimate the plant cover height for the 4 ft circle. Figure 11-13 provides several examples of how this is done.

- Figure 11-13 “A” shows the measurement of the plant height to be 50 cm. Always remember to record plant heights in cm. Measure to the base of the foliage as this is the distance that rainfall will have the opportunity to gain new energy after being intercepted by the plant cover.

- Figure 11-13 “B” depicts a plant cover height of 10 cm

- On occasion, the plant cover height in the 4 ft radius circle will not be consistent. In Figure 11-13

“C”, this type of situation is depicted. Assuming that the circle contained an equal proportion of the two plant heights, the average height would be recorded. In this case, the average is (10 + 50)= 60 ÷

2 = 30 cm

- Sometimes the ground cover is layered. An example is shown in Figure 11-13 “D”. The layer providing the most protection is the closest layer to the ground. In this case, the depth of the plant cover on the left side of the 50 cm plant would be 10 cm rather than the average of the two heights

(i.e., NOT 30 cm).

The maximum depth of evaluation is 99 cm. If the ground plant cover height is greater than 99 cm, enter

99 on the PDR.

Repeat the procedure at the other two locations (west and south of the subplot center) on the subplot.

170


April 2000

Figure 11-13. Examples for measuring plant cover heights.

171

172


April 2000


April 2000

12 FOREST HEALTH MONITORING CROWN INDICATOR

12.1 OVERVIEW

A multitude of abiotic and biotic influences shape forest trees. Tree, seedling and sapling vigor and growth are determined by a variety of physiological and external influences, such as age, available light, water and nutrients. This section describes procedures to rate seedling, sapling and tree crown conditions.


Tree vigor and growth are determined by age, available water, nutrients and light resources at a site. Both climate and site affect resource availability, but spacing becomes critical when determining the amount of water, light and nutrients available for a single tree. These tree-stand interactions require that both stand-level data and individual tree data must be collected.

Saplings are trees with DBH (or DRC in the West) between 1.0 in (2.5 cm) and 4.9 in (12.7 cm).

Like seedlings, all sapling variables are measured on each 1/300 ac (1/750 ha) microplot (6.8 ft [2.07 m] radius) offset a distance of 12 ft (3.66 m), due east (90 degrees) from each subplot center. Vigor class, live crown ratio, crown light exposure and crown position are determined for each sapling. Foliage below the point used for live crown ratio is not considered in vigor class determination. All sapling measurements are done during plot establishment and whenever plot remeasurement occurs.

Crown evaluations, including live crown ratio, light exposure, position, density, dieback, and transparency are made on all trees with DBH (or DRC in the West) 5.0 in (12.7 cm) or larger. Trees with high scores for live crown ratio, density and diameter and low scores for dieback and foliage transparency have increased potential for carbon fixation, nutrient storage and increased potential for survival and reproduction. Crown evaluations quantitatively assess current tree conditions and provide an integrated measure of site conditions, stand density and influence of external stresses. All crown measurements are done during plot establishment and whenever plot remeasurement occurs.


All crown measurements for saplings and trees are done during plot establishment and whenever plot remeasurement occurs.

Vigor class, live crown ratio, crown light exposure and crown position are determined for each sapling on the four microplots. Foliage below the point used for live crown ratio is not considered when determining sapling vigor class.

The Phase 3 (P3) crown evaluation technique helps describe current tree conditions on all live trees 5.0 in (12.7 cm) DBH (or DRC in the West) or larger on the four subplots. Crown evaluation measurements are listed in order of data collection on each tree:

(1) live crown ratio,

(2) crown light exposure,

(3) crown position,

(4) crown density,

(5) crown dieback,

(6) foliage transparency,

173


April 2000


Several uncontrollable environmental and site conditions have hindered or slowed the crown condition classification measurements, including: (1) poor weather such as gusting wind, heavy rain and/or dark overcast skies; (2) steep and/or unstable slopes; (3) dense understory vegetation which prohibits free ground movement; and (4) a thick canopy immediately overhead that obscures full view of the crown being evaluated. Suspend data collection under severe weather conditions, such as strong winds and heavy rainfall.

12.1.4 SAFETY

No specialized safety precautions are necessary. Follow general safety precautions for conducting fieldwork.

12.1.5 DEFINITIONS AND CODES

DEFINITIONS

Crown Shape

Crown shape is the silhouette of a tree, drawn from branch tip to branch tip, which contains all of a tree’s foliage as it grows in a stand. Exclude abnormally long branches beyond the edge of the crown for this silhouette. Normally, silhouettes are derived from vigorous, open grown trees and tend to be specific to a species. For Phase 3 purposes silhouettes vary with age and spacing. Tree crowns tend to flatten out with age and be more slender when growing in crowded conditions. Crown shape is important when measuring crown density and is used to estimate crown biomass. Crown shape is used as an outline for the sides of the tree.

Crown Top

The crown top is the highest point of a standing tree. Young trees usually have more conical shaped crowns and the main terminal is the top. Older trees and many hardwoods have globose and flat-topped crowns, where a lateral branch is the highest point. For some measurements the highest live foliage is considered the live crown top. Other measurements include a dead top. Some crown measurements assess how much of the expected crown is present and include broken or missing tops.

Live Branch

Any woody lateral growth supporting foliage and 1 in (2.5 cm) or larger in diameter at the base above the swelling where it joins a main stem or larger branch.

Live Crown Base

The live crown base is an imaginary horizontal line drawn across the trunk from the bottom of the lowest live foliage of the "obvious live crown" for trees and from the lowest live foliage of the lowest twig for saplings. The "obvious live crown" is described as the point on the tree where most live branches/twigs above that point are continuous and typical for a tree species (and/or tree size) on a particular site. Include most crown branches/twigs, but exclude epicormic twigs/sprigs and straggler branches that usually do not contribute much to the tree's growth. The base of the live branch/twig bearing the lowest foliage may be above or below this line.

For trees only, if any live branch larger than 1 inch (2.5 cm) in diameter at the point of trunk attachment is within 5 ft (1.5 m) below this "obvious live crown" line, a new horizontal line is established.

Create the new line at the base of live foliage on that branch. Continue this evaluation process until no live branches, 1 in (2.5 cm) diameter or greater, are found within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the foliage of the lowest qualifying branch (Figure 12-1).

174


April 2000

Occasionally, all original major crown branches/twigs are dead or broken and many new twigs/sprigs develop. These situations are likely to occur in areas of heavy thinning, commercial clearcuts and severe weather damage:

• Trees, that had an "obvious live crown" with live branches, have no crown to measure until new live twigs reach 1 in (2.5 cm) in diameter (become live branches). The previous “obvious live crown” base here would be dead branches, while many of the new live branches may be below this point. When new branches reach 1 in (2.5 cm) in diameter, draw the crown base to the live foliage of the lowest live branch that now meets the 5 ft (1.5 m) rule.

• Saplings and small trees that had only live twigs should establish the crown base at the base of the live foliage on the new lowest live twig. If no live twigs are present, there is no crown to measure.

Figure 12-1. Determining the base of the live crown.

Overstory Canopy Zone

The area delineated by the average live crown length is used to determine live crown ratio for overstory trees. The bottom of the zone is the average height of the live crown bases. The top of the zone is the average height for the live crown tops.

Snag Branch

Dead upper crown branches without twigs.

175


April 2000

Sprig

Any woody or non-woody lateral growth, without secondary branching, less than 1 inch in diameter at the point of attachment to a branch or crown stem.

Twig

Any woody lateral growth, with secondary branching, less than 1 inch in diameter at the point of attachment to a branch or crown stem.

CODES

Table 12-1. PDR Prompt Codes.

Variables

Sapling Measurements

Live Crown Ratio

Crown Light Exposure

Crown Position

Sapling Vigor

Tree Measurements:

Live Crown Ratio


Crown Position

Crown Density

Crown Dieback

Foliage Transparency

PDR Code

CrRatU

CrnLit

CrnPos

CrnVigr

CrRatU

CrnLit

CrnPos

CrnDen

CrnDbk

FolTrn

Table 12-2. Sapling vigor codes.

Code

1

2

3

Definition

Live crown ratio 35 or higher, >80% normal foliage (50% of each leaf is not damaged or missing) and less than 5% dieback.

Does not meet Class 1 or 3 criteria and may have

21 to 100% normal foliage.

Any live crown ratio, 1 to 20% normal foliage and any amount of dieback.

Table 12-3. Crown Light Exposure Codes.

Code

0

1

2

Definition

The tree receives no full light because it is shaded by trees, vines, or other vegetation.

The tree receives full light from the top or 1 side.

The tree receives full light from the top and 1 side

3

4

5

(or 2 sides without the top).

The tree receives full light from the top and 2 sides


The tree receives full light from the top and 3 sides.


176


April 2000

Table 12-5. Crown Position Codes.

Code

1

Definition

Superstory. The live crown top must be two times the height of the top of the overstory canopy zone.

The tree is open grown because most of the crown is above the overstory canopy zone (pioneers, seed trees, whips, remnants from previous stands,

2

3

4 etc.). Note: Code 1 is not valid for seedlings or saplings.

Overstory. The live crown top is above the middle of the overstory canopy zone.

Understory. The live crown top is at or below the middle of the overstory canopy zone.

Open Canopy. An overstory canopy zone is not evident because the tree crowns in this condition are not fully closed (<50% cover). Most of the trees in this stand are not competing with each other for light.

Table 12-6. Live Crown Ratio, Crown Density, Crown Dieback and Foliage Transparency Codes.

Code Definition Code Definition Code Definition

20

25

30

00

05

10

15

0%

1-5%

6-10%

11-15%

16-20%

21-25%

26-30%

35

40

45

50

55

60

65

31-35%

36-40%

41-45%

46-50%

51-55%

56-60%

61-65%

70

75

80

85

90

95

99

66-70%

71-75%

76-80%

81-85%

86-90%

91-95%

96-100%

Note: Class code is the percentage of the upper limits of the class, i.e., Code 10 is 6% to 10%, etc.

Estimates are recorded to the nearest 5 percent to be consistent throughout this guide with other procedures and to allow estimator flexibility.

SAMPLE COLLECTIONS, PRESERVATION AND STORAGE

No material samples are collected.

EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES

With this field guide , the list below includes all equipment and supplies needed for two trained and certified people to perform all measurements described in this section. All measurements are recorded on portable data recorders (PDRs). Equipment and supplies associated with PDRs are discussed in the

FHM Portable Data Recorder Users Guide. Regions using the metric system should use equipment calibrated in metric units. Those using the English system will use equipment calibrated in English units.

177


April 2000

Field Documentation:

Blank Tally sheets for use in the event of PDR failure

Hard copy of downloaded data

Equipment:

Binoculars - required, 1 set per field crew

Crown Density - Foliage Transparency Card - required (provided), 2 per field crew

Crown Grid - optional, 1 per field crew

Clipboard - optional but required in mensuration sections

CALIBRATION AND STANDARDIZATION

General calibration and standardization protocols should be applied to all field equipment. Purchase tapes to required specifications. Tapes should be maintained in working order and do not require calibration upon confirmation of accuracy.

The Crown Density - Foliage Transparency card (Figure 12-2) should be used as a training aid until crew personnel are comfortable with all ratings. White areas of the card represent skylight visible through the crown area and black areas represent some aspect of the tree. After training, use the card to calibrate your eyes at the start of each day and rate those trees that do not fit into an obvious class. For crown density, hold the card so that "Crown Density" is right-side up ("Foliage Transparency" should be upside down). Use the numbers that are right-side up. Conversely, for foliage transparency, make sure that "Foliage Transparency" is right-side up. Crews should refer to specific crown density or foliage transparency sections for a definition of aspects that are included in the crown rating.

The back of the crown density - foliage transparency card has two uses: for crown density when a portion of the crown is missing and a general scale for estimating live crown ratio. Crews should refer to the crown density and live crown ratio sections for the use of this side of the card.

A crown grid can be used in training to estimate crown area. The crown grid was developed from similar grids used to estimate areas on maps. The area does not represent a quantitative unit since the grid is intended to determine proportions. The central square has 100 dots and each peripheral square has 25 dots (Figure 12-3). The grid may be copied on a transparency and mounted on thick Plexiglas

TM with clear cellophane tape for field use.

Front Back

Figure 12-2. Crown density - foliage transparency card.

178


April 2000

Figure 12-3. Crown grid.



Table 12-8. Crown Classification Measurement Quality Objectives.

Variable

Vigor Class

Live Crown Ratio


Crown Position -

Saplings

Trees

Crown Density

Crown Dieback

Foliage Transparency

Reporting Units Data Quality Limits

3 classes

21 classes

5 classes

3 classes

4 classes

21 classes

21 classes

21 classes

90% agreement

90% @ ± 10% (2 classes)

85% agreement within 1 if >0

85% agreement

90% @ ± 10% (2 classes)

90% @ ± 10% (2 classes)

90% @ ± 10% (2 classes)

12.5.2 DATA QUALITY PROCEDURES

Sources of measurement differences include boundary estimates for the crown and the affected area, ability to detect damage, amount of crown closure and an individual's ability to estimate crown conditions.

Differences between observers can be minimized by open and frequent communication between crewmembers. Consistency and quality are also encouraged by changing observation positions and repeating estimation procedures.

179


April 2000

In addition, remeasurements may differ because of weather conditions, particularly light, and when a sufficient amount of time has passed to allow changes in the tree itself. Remeasurements taken immediately after the original measurement are best to determine variability among individuals. This procedure should be used during the training and certification program. All remeasurements should be completed less than two weeks after trees were originally rated.

Crown indicators (live crown ratio, light exposure, position, density, dieback, foliage transparency and diameter measurements) can be reproduced partly because the indicators are easy to apply and because of data quality expectations. To meet these standards, proper training and follow-up are vital throughout the program. All crown-rating procedures require two individuals to rate each tree for each variable and to agree on a final value to enter into the PDR.

12.5.3 CROWN RATING PRECAUTIONS

Crews must be especially careful when making evaluations under certain conditions and follow these procedures:

Distance from the tree -

Crews must attempt to stay at least 1/2 to 1 tree length from the tree being evaluated. Some ratings change with proximity to the tree. In some situations, it is impossible to satisfy this step, but the crew should do the best it can in each case. All evaluations are made at grade (same elevation as base of the tree) or up slope from the tree. This may not be possible in all cases but never get in the habit of evaluating trees from the down slope side.

View of the crown -

Crew members should evaluate trees when standing at an angle to each other, striving to obtain the best view of the crown. The ideal positions are at 90 degrees to each other on flat terrain (Figure 12-4).

If possible, never evaluate the tree from the same position or at 180 degrees. In a forest, getting a good perspective of the crown becomes difficult. Overlapping branches, background trees and lack of a good viewing area can cause problems when rating some trees. Crews need to move laterally to search for a good view. Take special care when rating such trees. crowns


April 2000

Climatic conditions -

Cloudy or overcast skies, fog, rain and poor sun angles may affect estimates. Live crown ratio and crown diameters may be affected but to a lesser degree than other crown indicators. Crown density tends to be overestimated or underestimated because light does not project well through the foliage or, in some cases, the light may be too bright for a good estimate. Crown dieback may be underestimated, because it is difficult to see dead twigs and/or to differentiate defoliated twigs from dead twigs. Foliage transparency estimates could be affected in either direction, because it is hard to separate foliage from branches. The data quality expectation standard helps, because crews can normally be within ± 10 percent, even in poor weather conditions. However, crews need to be especially careful during poor lighting conditions. Crews should move around a tree to get another view, even if the view appears adequate at a specific location.

Heavy defoliation -

During heavy defoliation, crown dieback may be overestimated and foliage transparency may be underestimated due to the difficulty in differentiating dead twigs from defoliated twigs. The use of binoculars may help in separating dead twigs from defoliated twigs.

Leaning trees -

Leaning trees cause a major problem in estimating crown variables. Record crown variables as best as possible for the tree as it actually occurs rather than as it might appear if standing upright and also record in the PDR tree note field that it is leaning (Figure 12-8). This will allow for better data interpretation.

Trees with no crown after application of definitions (epicormics or sprigs only) -

After a sudden release or damage, a tree may have very dense foliage, but no crown. These situations are coded as follows: live crown ratio - 00, crown light exposure - 0, crown position - 3, crown density - 00, crown dieback - 99, foliage transparency - 99.

Epicormics remain epicormics until they regain the size of previous branches for trees with no branches 1 in or larger in diameter at the base above the swelling. For trees that had 1 in or larger branches when the epicormics formed, epicormics become branches once they reach 1 inch in diameter.

Measurement differences resolution -

If the numbers for a crown measurement estimate by two crewmembers do not match, arrive at the final value by:

Taking an average, if the numbers differ by 10% (2 classes) or less.

Changing positions, if the numbers differ by 15 % or more and attempt to narrow the range to

10% or less.

Averaging the two estimates for those trees that actually have different ratings from the two viewing areas (ratings of 30 and 70 would be recorded as 50)

181


April 2000

12.6 PROCEDURES

12.6.1 SAPLING PROCEDURES - LIVE TREES 1 in (2.5 cm) TO 4.9 in (12.6 cm) DBH/DRC

12.6.1.1 LIVE CROWN RATIO

Determine sapling live crown ratio by dividing the live crown length by total tree height to the live crown top. Live crown length is the distance between the top live foliage (dieback and dead branches are not included) and the lowest live twig for saplings. Be sure to eliminate vine foliage as best you can when determining the live crown. The live crown base for saplings is different from trees 5.0 in (12.7 cm)

DBH/DRC and larger. The 5 ft/1 in (1.5 m/2.5 cm) rule does not apply in this case. Do not include sprigs or leaves on the main stem below the lowest live twig (Figure 12-7).

Figure12-7. Sapling ratio determination examples.

182


April 2000

Measure leaning saplings as they are (Figure 12-8).

After a sudden release or damage, a sapling may have very dense foliage, but no crown as it only has sprigs. These situations are coded as follows: live crown ratio - 00, crown light exposure - 0, crown position - 3, sapling vigor - 3.

Figure 12-8. Live crown ratio examples.

183


April 2000

12.6.1.2 CROWN LIGHT EXPOSURE

Divide the crown vertically into four equal sides. Rate the live crown ratio for each side of the tree separately using the criteria for estimating total live crown ratio. In order for a side to qualify, at least 1/3 of the tree length to the live crown top on that side must have live foliage exposed to direct light. Count the number of sides that would receive direct light if the sun was directly above the tree. Add one if the tree receives any direct light from the top (Figure 12-5).

Note: The entire side must be receiving full light to qualify. A sliver of a side receiving light does not qualify.

Trees with all sides having less than a 35 percent live crown ratio can have a maximum crown exposure of one. Individual sides with less than 35 percent live crown ratio should not be counted.

Figure 12-5. Crown light exposure and position

Code Definition

.

0

1

2

The tree receives no full light because it is shaded by trees, vines, or other vegetation.

The tree receives full light from the top or 1 side.

The tree receives full light from the top and 1 side (or 2 sides without the top).

3

4

5

The tree receives full light from the top and 2 sides (or

3 sides without the top).



184


April 2000

12.6.1.3 CROWN POSITION

Determine the relative position of each tree in relation to the overstory canopy zone. Saplings can never be coded as 1. Codes 2 or 3 should be used in stands where the tree crown cover is closed (>50 percent cover). If the tree crowns are not closed and the area is greater than 1 ac (0.4 ha) in size, then assign code 4.

When code 4 is used, it is often assigned to all trees in the stand. Code 4 is typically used in the following cases:

Trees in stands, over 1 ac (0.4 ha) in size, where crown cover is less than 50%

Trees in clumps less than 1 ac (0.4 ha) in size when the overall forest, over 1 ac (0.4 ha) in size, is a patchwork of open areas and clumps of trees

Code

2

3

4

Definition

Overstory. The live crown top is above the middle the overstory canopy zone.


Open Canopy. An overstory canopy zone is not evident because the tree crowns in this condition are not fully closed (<50% cover).

Most of the trees in this stand are not competing with each other for light.

185


April 2000

12.6.1.4 VIGOR CLASS

Vigor class is a visual measure of sapling crown vigor. Saplings are classified for: (1) high vigor, (2) moderate vigor, or (3) low vigor. The objective is to separate excellent saplings (1) from very poor ones

(3) and place all others in the middle class (2). The easiest method for vigor classification is to determine if the sapling meets criteria for class (1) or (3). If it does not, classify it as a (2) (Figure 12-6).

Figure 12-6. Sapling vigor classes .

Vigor Class Definitions

Vigor Class 1 - Saplings must have a live crown ratio of 35 or higher, have less than 5 percent dieback*

(deer/rabbit browse is not considered as dieback but is considered missing foliage) and

80 percent or more of the foliage present is normal or at least 50 percent of each leaf is not damaged or missing. Twigs and branches that are dead because of normal shading are not included.

Vigor Class 2 - Saplings do not meet Class 1 or 3 criteria. They may have any live crown ratio, may or may not have dieback and may have between 21 and 100 percent of the foliage classified as normal.

Vigor Class 3 - Saplings may have any live crown ratio and have 1 to 20 percent normal foliage or the percent of foliage missing combined with the percent of leaves that are over 50 percent damaged or missing should equal 80 percent or more of the live crown. Twigs and branches that are dead because of normal shading are not included.

* Dieback is defined as recent mortality of branches with fine twigs, which begins at the terminal portion of a branch and proceeds toward the trunk. Dieback is only considered when it occurs in the upper and outer portions of the tree. When whole branches are dead in the upper crown, without obvious signs of damage such as breaks or animal injury, assume that the branches died from the terminal portion of the branch. Dead branches in the lower portion of the live crown are assumed to have died from competition and shading. Dead branches in the lower live crown are not considered as part of crown dieback, unless there is continuous dieback from the upper and outer crown down to those branches.

186


April 2000

12.6.2 TREE PROCEDURES - LIVE TREES 5.0 in (12.7 cm) DBH/DRC AND LARGER

Crown indicators are designed to be used together. Each indicator comprises a piece of information that can be used individually or as a factor in combination with other indicators.

Measure all leaning trees as they are (Figure 12-8). Do not attempt to mentally upright the tree for any measurements.

Live crown ratio is a measure of crown length and its relationship to total tree height. Trees with higher live crown ratios are typically viewed as healthier and faster growing. Crown light exposure and crown position are combined in analysis to determine stand and canopy structure. Once the live crown ratio, crown light exposure and crown position are determined, the next logical step is to measure how much of a crown exists. Crown density, which includes foliage, branches and reproductive structures, measures the crown biomass. Crown dieback defines how much of the crown does not have foliage but has fine twigs, indicating a loss of vigor or growth potential. Foliage transparency estimates how dense the foliage is on branches, indicating a loss of vigor or stress due to foliar damage or defoliation.

Some individuals want to know why both crown density and foliage transparency are determined when they seem to be inverse measures. This is true on trees having a full crown with no crown dieback and no open areas in the crown. However, the average tree does not have a full, uniform crown. For example, a tree with 80 percent crown dieback could have a few living branches with a foliage transparency rating of 5 percent, but the crown density rating would be 15 percent. (Crown density estimates are based on a mentally projected complete and symmetric forest-grown crown form. Foliage transparency estimates consider only the foliated parts of the crown.) Examples of crown silhouettes and various crown estimates are found in Figures 12-9 and 12-10.

These crown variables have been combined into a variety of models. Each variable, alone or in combination with others, adds to the overall rating given each tree. It is important to realize that models are designed to rate trees on how they look, from thriving to almost dead and to help predict future conditions of trees and forest ecosystems.

187


April 2000

Figure 12-9. Examples of a conifer with crown measurement outlines.

188


April 2000

Figure12-10. Examples of a deciduous tree with crown measurement outlines.

189


April 2000

12.6.2.1 LIVE CROWN RATIO

Live crown ratio is a percentage determined by dividing the live crown length by the total live tree height (Figure 12-8). Live crown length is the distance from the live crown top (dieback in the upper portion of the crown is not part of the live crown) to the "obvious live crown" base. Many times there are additional live branches below the "obvious live crown". These branches are only included if they have a basal diameter greater than 1.0 in (2.5 cm) and are within 5.0 ft (1.5 m) of the base of the obvious live crown (Figure 12-1). The live crown base becomes that point on the main bole perpendicular to the lowest live foliage on the last branch that is included in the live crown. The live crown base is determined by the live foliage and not by the point where a branch intersects with the main bole. Occasionally, small trees or certain species may not have 1.0 in (2.5 cm) diameter branches. If this occurs, use the 5.0 ft (1.5 m) rule, and apply it to branches that you feel contribute significantly to tree growth. Live crown ratio is measured by two people (Figure 12-4).

An individual can use the live crown ratio scale on the back of the crown density - foliage transparency card to help estimate ratios (Figure 12-2). Hold the card in one hand, parallel to the trunk of the tree being evaluated and move the card closer or farther from your eye until the 0 is at the live crown top and the 99 is at the base of the tree where it meets the ground. Then place your finger at the live crown base. The number on the scale provides the live crown ratio. Interpolate to the nearest 5 percent if the point is between two values on the scale. A clinometer can also be used to verify the live crown ratio by determining the values of both heights and determining the ratio of the two values. This is very useful during training but is not necessary under field conditions.

When the two estimates do not agree, follow the guidelines listed at the end of the Crown Rating

Precautions Section 12.5.3. The estimate is placed into one of 21 percentage classes.

After a sudden release or damage, a tree may have very dense foliage, but no crown. These situations are coded as follows: live crown ratio - 00, crown light exposure - 0, crown position - 3, crown density - 00, crown dieback - 99 and foliage transparency - 99.

12.6.2.2 CROWN LIGHT EXPOSURE

Rate the live crown ratio for each side of the tree separately using the criteria for estimating total live crown ratio. Divide the crown vertically into four equal sides. In order for a side to qualify, at least 1/3 of the tree length to the live crown top on that side must have live foliage exposed to direct light. Count the number of sides that would receive direct light if the sun was directly above the tree. Add one if the tree receives any direct light from the top (Figure 12-5).

Note: The entire side must be receiving full light to qualify. A sliver of a side receiving light does not qualify.

Trees with all sides having less than a 35% live crown ratio can have a maximum crown exposure of one. Individual sides with less than 35% live crown ratio should not be counted.

Code Definition

0 The tree receives no full light because it is shaded by trees, vines, or other vegetation.

1 The tree receives full light from the top or 1 side.

2 The tree receives full light from the top and 1 side (or

2 sides without the top).

3 The tree receives full light from the top and 2 sides


4 The tree receives full light from the top and 3 sides.

5 The tree receives full light from the top and 4 sides.

190


April 2000

12.6.2.3 CROWN POSITION

Identify the relative position of each tree in relation to the main overstory canopy. Codes 1-3 should be used in stands where the tree crown cover is closed (>50 percent cover). If the tree crowns are not closed and the area is greater than 1 ac (0.4 ha) in size, then assign code 4.

When code 4 is used, it is often assigned to all trees in the stand. Code 4 is typically used in the following cases:

Trees in stands, over 1 ac (0.4 ha) in size, where crown cover is less than 50%

Trees in clumps less than 1 ac (0.4 ha) in size when the overall forest, over 1 ac (0.4 ha) in size, is a patchwork of open areas and clumps of trees

Code

1

2

3

4

Definition

Superstory. The live crown top must be two times the height of the top of the overstory canopy zone. The tree is open grown because most of the crown is above the overstory canopy zone (pioneers, seed trees, whips, remnants from previous stands, etc.).

Overstory. The live crown top is above the middle the overstory canopy zone.


Open Canopy. An overstory canopy zone is not evident because the tree crowns in this condition are not fully closed (<50% cover). Most of the trees in this stand are not competing with each other for light.

12.6.2.4 CROWN DENSITY

Crown density estimates crown condition in relation to a typical tree for the site where it is found.

Density also serves as an indicator of expected growth in the near future. Crown density is the amount of crown branches, foliage and reproductive structures that blocks light visibility through the crown. Each tree species has a normal crown that varies with the site, genetics, tree damage, etc.

Crown density is measured by two people (Figure 12-4). To determine the crown shape, select the crown base on the stem used for live crown ratio. Project a full "mirror image" crown based on that trees shape where it is growing to the crown top (missing, dead or live). Foliage below the crown base is not included (Figure 12-1). If the top is broken or missing, mentally reestablish that portion of the tree before estimating density. Mentally project half-sided trees as full crowns by using the "mirror image" of the existing half of the crown. Include crown dieback and open areas in this outline (Figure 12-11).

After determining the crown shape, each person should use the crown density - foliage transparency card (Figure 12-2). Along the line of sight estimate what percentage of the outlined area is blocking sunlight. In cases where portions of the tree may be missing, i.e., half-sided trees, it may be easier to determine the percent of the crown shape missing and the actual density of the tree's remaining portion.

Then use the table on the back of the crown density - foliage transparency card to arrive at the final crown density.

When two individuals disagree with their estimates, follow the guidelines listed at the end of the

Crown Rating Precautions Section 12.5.3. The estimate is placed into one of 21 percentage classes.

191


April 2000

Figure12-11. Density rating examples.

192


April 2000

12.6.2.5 CROWN DIEBACK

Crown dieback is defined as recent mortality of branches with fine twigs, which begins at the terminal portion of a branch and proceeds toward the trunk. Dieback should occur from the top of the crown down and from the outside in toward the main stem. Dieback is only considered when it occurs in the upper and outer portions of the tree. When whole branches are dead in the upper crown, without obvious signs of damage such as breaks or animal injury, assume that the branches died from the terminal portion of the branch. Dead branches in the lower portion of the live crown are assumed to have died from competition and shading. Dead branches in the lower live crown are not considered as part of crown dieback, unless there is continuous dieback from the upper and outer crown down to those branches.

Crown dieback estimates reflect the severity of recent stresses on a tree. Estimate crown dieback as a percentage of the live crown area, including the dieback area. The crown base should be the same as that used for the live crown ratio estimate. Assume the perimeter of the crown is a two-dimensional outline from branch-tip to branch-tip, excluding snag branches and large holes or gaps in the crown

(Figure 12-12).

Crown dieback is obtained by two people (Figure 12-4). Binoculars should be used to assist in the data collection. Observers should be conscious of lighting conditions and how light affects the day's observations. Under limited-light conditions, observers should take extra time. Poor lighting can make the measurement more difficult.

Each individual should mentally draw a two-dimensional crown outline, block in the dieback and estimate the dieback area.



193


April 2000

Figure12-12. Dieback rating examples.

194


April 2000

12.6.3.6 FOLIAGE TRANSPARENCY

Foliage transparency is the amount of skylight visible through the live, normally foliated portion

(where you would expect to see foliage if the tree was not or had not been impacted by a stressing agent during the current evaluation year) of the crown. Rate what you feel should be present on the tree not necessarily what is present. A recently defoliated tree except for one or two live leaves should have a transparency rating of 99 not 0!! Check with binoculars to assess which branches are alive and should have foliage.

Different tree species have a normal range of foliage transparency, which may be more or less than that of other species. Changes in foliage transparency can also occur as a result of current damage, frequently referred to as defoliation, or from reduced foliage resulting from stresses during preceding years.

Estimate foliage transparency using the crown density - foliage transparency card (Figure 12-2).

Exclude vine foliage from the transparency estimate as best you can. Dead branches in the lower live crown, snag branches, crown dieback and missing branches or areas where foliage is expected to be missing are deleted from the estimate (Figure 12-13).

Large uniform crowns are rated as if the whole crown should be foliated. When defoliation is severe, branches alone will screen the light, but you should exclude the branches from the foliage outline and rate the area as if the light was penetrating those branches. For example, an almost completely defoliated dense spruce may have less than 20 percent skylight coming through the crown, but it will be rated as highly transparent because of the missing foliage. Old trees and some hardwood species, have crowns with densely foliated branches which are spaced far apart. These spaces between branches should not be included in the foliage transparency rating. When foliage transparency in one part of the crown differs from another part, the average foliage transparency is estimated.

Foliage transparency should be rated by two people (Figure 12-4). First, each individual will mentally draw a two-dimensional crown outline. Second, the foliated area will be blocked into the crown outline.

Third, estimate the transparency of the foliated area.



195


April 2000

Figure12-13. Transparency rating examples.

196


April 2000

12.7 REFERENCES

Anderson, R.L. and R.P. Belanger. 1987. A crown rating methods for assessing tree vigor of loblolly and shortleaf pines. In, D.R. Phillips, compiler, Proceedings of the fourth biennial southern silvicultural research conference. Nov. 4-6, 1986; Atlanta, GA. USDA Forest Service Gen. Tech. Rep. SE-42,

Asheville, NC. pp. 538-543.

Anderson, R.L., W.G. Burkman, I. Millers and W.H. Hoffard. 1992. Visual crown rating model for upper canopy trees in the eastern United States. USDA Forest Service, Region 8/Northeastern Area. 15p.

Belanger, R.P. and R.L. Anderson. 1991. A guide for visually assessing crown densities of loblolly and shortleaf pines. USDA Forest Service Res. Note SE-352. 10p.

Dolph, K.L. 1988. Predicting height increment of young-growth conifers in the Sierra Nevada. USDA

Forest Service Res. Paper PSW-191. 7p.

Francis, J.K. 1986. The relationship of bole diameters and crown widths of seven bottom land hardwood species. USDA Forest Service Res. Note. SO-328. 3p.

Grano, C.X. 1957. Growth of loblolly pine seed trees in relation to crown density. J. For. 55(11):852.

Kuhlman, H.M. 1971. Effects of insect defoliation on growth and mortality of trees. Annual Rev. of

Entomology 16:289-324.

Sprinz, P.T. and H.E. Burkhart. 1987. Relationships between tree crown, stem and stand characteristics in unthinned loblolly pine plantations. Can. J. For. Res. 17(6):534-538.

197

198


April 2000


April 2000

5.

6.

3.

2.

APPENDICES

1. FIPS Codes for all States and Counties

These are the standard federal 2- and 3-digit codes for States and Counties respectively.

Forest Type Codes

These are the codes that correspond to the National FIA Forest typing algorithm. Definitions for the types will be included in a future draft. Units may choose to also add local forest type groupings.

Invasive Plants/Noxious Weeds Checklist Species

List of species, in preparation.

4. Tree Species List

This list includes all species deemed to be tally trees with western woodland trees measured for

DRC indicated.

Site Tree Selection Criteria and Species by Region

7.

8.

Determination of Stocking Values for Land Use Classification

Glossary

Figures – Easy Reference Page

199

200


April 2000

Appendix 1. State FIPS

Codes

(06) California

(001) Alameda

(003) Alpine

(005) Amador

(007) Butte

(009) Calaveras

(011) Colusa

Costa

(015) Del

(017) El

Norte

(019) Fresno

(021) Glenn

(023) Humboldt

(025) Imperial

(027) Inyo

(029) Kern

(031) Kings

(033) Lake

(035) Lassen

Angeles

(039) Madera

(041) Marin

(043) Mariposa

(045) Mendocino

(047) Merced

(049) Modoc

(051) Mono

(053) Monterey

(055) Napa

(057) Nevada

(059) Orange

(061) Placer

(063) Plumas

(065) Riverside

(067) Sacramento

Benito

Bernardino

Diego

Francisco

(077) San

(079) San Luis Obispo

(081) San

Barbara

(085) Santa

Cruz

(089) Shasta

(091) Sierra

(093) Siskiyou

(095) Solano

(097) Sonoma


April 2000

(099) Stanislaus

(101) Sutter

(103) Tehama

(105) Trinity

(107) Tulare

(109) Tuolumne

(111) Ventura

(113) Yolo

(115) Yuba

(41) Oregon

(001) Baker

(003) Benton

(005) Clackamas

(007) Clatsop

(009) Columbia

(011) Coos

(013) Crook

(015) Curry

(017) Deschutes

(019) Douglas

(021) Gilliam

(023) Grant

(025) Harney

(027) Hood

(029) Jackson

(031) Jefferson

(033) Josephine

(035) Klamath

(037) Lake

(039) Lane

(041) Lincoln

(043) Linn

(045) Malheur

(047) Marion

(049) Morrow

(051) Multnomah

(053) Polk

(055) Sherman

(057) Tillamook

(059) Umatilla

(061) Union

(063) Wallowa

(065) Wasco

(067) Washington

(069) Wheeler

(071) Yamhill

(53) Washington

(001) Adams

(003) Asotin

(005) Benton

(007) Chelan

(009) Clallam

(011) Clark

(013) Columbia

(015) Cowlitz

(017) Douglas

(019) Ferry

(021) Franklin

(023) Garfield

(025) Grant

Harbor

(029) Island

(031) Jefferson

(033) King

(035) Kitsap

(037) Kittitas

(039) Klickitat

(041) Lewis

(043) Lincoln

(045) Mason

(047) Okanogan

(049) Pacific

Oreille

(053) Pierce

Juan

(057) Skagit

(059) Skamania

(061) Snohomish

(063) Spokane

(065) Stevens

(067) Thurston

(069) Wahkiakum

(073) Whatcom

(075) Whitman

(077) Yakima

201

202

National Core Field Guide, Version 1.4

February 2000


February 2000

Appendix 2. U.S. Forest Type Codes

This following list includes all forest types in the Continental U.S. and Alaska Types designated

East/West are commonly found in those regions, although types designated for one region may occasionally be found in another.

East Wes t

Cod e

Species Type

E 100 White / Red / Jack Pine Group

E

E

101

E Red

103 Eastern white pine

104 White pine / hemlock

E

E

E

122

E

Spruce / Fir Group

E 124 Red spruce / balsam fir

E

126

E

E 140 Longleaf / Slash Pine Group

141

E

E 160 Loblolly / Shortleaf Pine Group

E

162

E

164

E

E

167

E

W

E

180 Pinyon / Juniper Group

Eastern

W 182 Rocky Mountain juniper

183

W Juniper

W 185 Pinyon juniper woodland

200 Douglas-fir

201

W

W 220 Ponderosa Pine Group

221

W Incense

W 223 Jeffrey pine / Coulter pine / bigcone Douglas-fir

W

203


February 2000

East Wes t

Cod e

Species Type

W 240 Western White Pine Group

W 241 Western white pine

W 260 Fir / Spruce / Mountain Hemlock Group

261

W

W

W 264 Pacific silver fir

W Engelmann

W 266 Engelmann spruce / subalpine fir

W

268

W

270

W

W 280 Lodgepole Pine Group

W

W 300 Hemlock / Sitka Spruce Group

301

W

W

W 320 Western Larch Group

W 340 Redwood

341

Group

Redwood

W

W 360 Other Western Softwoods Group

W Knobcone

W 362 Southwest white pine

W

W

W 365 Foxtail pine / bristlecone pine

W

W

W 368 Misc. western softwoods

W

W

E W

E

E W

371

California Mixed Conifer Group

California mixed conifer

Exotic Softwoods Group

E W 383 Other exotic softwoods

E Oak / Pine Group

E

E

401 White pine / red oak / white ash

402 Eastern redcedar / hardwood

204


February 2000

East Wes t

E

E

E

Cod e

Species Type

403 Longleaf pine / oak

404 Shortleaf pine / oak

405 Virginia pine / southern red oak

E

E

E

406 Loblolly pine / hardwood

407 Slash pine / hardwood

409 Other pine / hardwood

E Oak / Hickory Group

E 501 Post oak / blackjack oak

E

E

E

E

503 White oak / red oak / hickory

White

505 Northern red oak

E

E

E

506 Yellow-poplar / white oak / red oak

507 Sassafras / persimmon

508 Sweetgum / yellow-poplar

509 oak

510

E

E

E

E

E

E

514 Southern scrub oak

515 Chestnut oak / black oak / scarlet oak

519 Red maple / oak

E

E

E

E 520 Mixed upland hardwoods

E Oak / Gum / Cypress Group

601

602

605

Swamp chestnut oak / cherrybark oak

Sweetgum / Nuttall oak / willow oak

Overcup oak / water hickory

E

E

E

607

608

Baldcypress / water tupelo

Sweetbay / swamp tupelo / red maple

E

E

700 Elm / Ash / Cottonwood Group

701 Black ash / American elm / red maple

E

E

E

E

703

E W

E

702 River birch / sycamore

Willow

705 Sycamore / pecan / American elm

706

708

Sugarberry / hackberry / elm / green ash

Red maple / lowland

W 709 Cottonwood / willow

E

E

E

E W

E 800 Maple / Beech / Birch Group

E

E

E

801 Sugar maple / beech / yellow birch

Black

803 Cherry / ash / yellow-poplar

805 Hard maple / basswood

807 Elm / ash / locust

809 Red maple / upland

205


February 2000

East Wes t

Cod e

Species Type

E W Aspen / Birch Group

902

E W

910

W

W

Alder / Maple Group

W 920 Western Oak Group

W 922 California black oak

W 923 Oregon white oak

W

W 925 Deciduous oak woodland

W 931 Coast live oak

W 932 Canyon live oak / interior live oak

W Tanoak / Laurel Group

941

W

W

W 950 Other Western Hardwoods Group

W

952

W

W

W

954

955

E 980

E

E

Intermountain maple woodland

Misc. western hardwood woodlands

Tropical Hardwoods Group

E W 990 Exotic Hardwoods Group

E W

E

992

Eucalyptus

W 995 Other exotic hardwoods

E W 999

206


February 2000

Appendix 3. Invasive Plants / Noxious Weeds Checklist Species

(In preparation)

207

208


February 2000


February 2000

Appendix 4. U.S. Tree Species Codes

This following list includes all tree species tallied in the Continental U.S and Alaska. Species designated East/West are commonly found in those regions, although species designated for one region may occasionally be found in another. Woodland species designate species where DRC is measured instead of DBH.

East West Woodland Code Common Name

E W 10 spp.

W 11 Pacific silver fir

E W 12 fir

W 14 Santa Lucia fir

Genus

Abies

Abies

Abies

Abies species spp. amabilis balsamea bracteata

W 15 fir

E 16 fir

W 17 fir

W 18 corkbark fir

Abies

Abies

Abies

Abies concolor fraseri grandis lasiocarpa var. arizonica lasiocarpa W 19 fir Abies

W

W

20 California red fir

21 Shasta red fir

W 22 fir

Abies

Abies

Abies magnifica magnifica var.shastensis procera

W 41 lawsoniana

W 42

E 43

W 50

W 52 cypress

Cupressus spp.

W 51 cypress Cupressus arizonica

Cupressus bakeri

W

W

53 Tecate cypress

54

Cupressus guadalupensis var. forbesii cypress Cupressus macrocarpa

W 55 cypress Cupressus sargentii

E W 57 redcedar / juniper Juniperus spp.

W w 59 redberry juniper

Juniperus pinchotii

Juniperus erythrocarpa

E 61 juniper Juniperus ashei

California Juniperus californica alligator Juniperus deppeana

W 64 juniper Juniperus occidentalis

Juniperus osteosperma

W w 66 Rocky Mountain juniper Juniperus scopulorum

E 67 redcedar Juniperus silicicola

E 68 redcedar Juniperus virginiana

E W oneseed Juniperus monosperma

70 (introduced) Larix spp.

E W

W

W

W

71

72

73

81

(native) larch larch

Larix

Larix laricina lyallii

Larix occidentalis

Calocedrus decurrens

209


February 2000


E W

E

W

E W

E W

E

W 127 pine

E 128 pine

E 129 eastern white pine

E 130 pine

E

90

91

92

95

96

126

136 spp. spruce spruce spruce spruce pine pine

Genus

Picea

Picea

Picea

W 93 spruce Picea

E W 94 spruce Picea

Picea

Picea

E 97 spruce

W 98 spruce

W 101 pine

Picea

Picea

Pinus

W 102 pine Pinus

W 103 pine

W 104 pine

Pinus

Pinus

E 105 pine Pinus common Pinus

E

W

107

108 pine pine

Pinus

Pinus

W 109 pine

E 110 pine

E 111 pine

W 116 pine

W 117 pine

W 118 Chihuahua pine

Pinus

Pinus

Pinus balfouriana banksiana edulis clausa contorta

W

W

112

113 pine pine

Pinus

Pinus engelmannii flexilis

W 114 white pine

E 115

Pinus strobiformus

Pinus glabra

Pinus

Pinus

Pinus

W 119 western white pine

W 120 pine

W 124 pine

E 125 pine

Pinus

Pinus

E 121 pine Pinus

E W

E

122 pine Pinus

123 Table Mountain pine Pinus

Pinus

Pinus coulteri echinata elliottii jeffreyi lambertiana leiophylla var. chihuahuana monticola muricata palustris ponderosa pungens

E 131 pine Pinus

E 132 pine Pinus singleleaf Pinus

W 135 Arizona pine

Pinus

Pinus

Pinus

Pinus

Pinus

Pinus

Pinus

Pinus species spp. abies breweriana engelmannii glauca mariana pungens rubens sitchensis albicaulis aristata attenuata radiata resinosa rigida sabiniana serotina strobus sylvestris taeda virginiana monophylla discolor ponderosa var. arizonica nigra

210


February 2000


W 137 pine

W 138 pine

W 139 pine

Genus

Pinus

Pinus

Pinus species washoensis quadrifolia torreyana

W

W

W w w

140 Mexican pinyon pine Pinus

142 Great Basin bristlecone pine

143 Arizone pinyon pine Pinus cembroides

Pinus longaeva monophylla var. fallax

W 201 Douglas-fir Pseudotsuga macrocarpa

W 202

W 211

W 212 sequoia

E 221

E 222

Pseudotsuga menziesii

Sequoia sempervirens

Sequoiadendron giganteum

Taxodium distichum

W 231 yew

E 241

Taxus brevifolia occidentalis

W

W

242

251 redcedar Thuja

(nutmeg)

E 252 torrey Torreya californica

Torreya plicata taxifolia

E W 260 spp. Tsuga

E 261 hemlock Tsuga spp. canadensis

E

W

W

262

263

264 hemlock Tsuga hemlock Tsuga hemlock Tsuga caroliniana heterophylla mertensiana

E 270 pine Causarina spp.

E W 310 spp.

E 311 maple

W 312 maple

Acacia

Acer

Acer

Acer spp. spp. barbatum macrophyllum

E W

E

E

313

314

315 maple maple

E 316 maple

E 317 maple

Acer

Acer

Acer

Acer

Acer negundo nigrum pensylvanicum rubrum saccharinum saccharum spicatum

E 318 maple

E 320 maple

Acer

E 319 maple Acer

Acer

W w 321 Rocky Mountain maple Acer

Acer platinoides douglasii grandidentatum

E 323 maple

E 331 buckeye

Acer leucoderme

E W 330 horsechestnut Aesculus spp.

Aesculus glabra

E 332 buckeye Aesculus octandra

W 333 buckeye Aesculus californica

E

E

334 Texas buckeye

341

Aesculus glabra var. arguta

Ailanthus altissima

E 345 silktree Albizzia julibrisson

E W 351 alder Alnus rubra

211


February 2000


W 352 alder

Genus

Alnus species rhombifolia

E

E

355

356

Alder Alnus glutinosa

Amelanchier spp.

W

E

361

367 madrone Arbutus menziesii

Asimina triloba

E W

E

E

370

371

372 spp. birch birch

E 373 birch

E 374 birch

E W 375 birch

Betula

Betula

Betula

Betula

Betula

Betula spp. alleghaniensis lenta nigra occidentalis papyrifera

E 378 birch

E 379 birch

E 381

E

E bumelia

391 hornbeam,musclewood

400 spp.

Betula papyrifera

Betula

Bumelia lanuginosa

Carpinus caroliniana

E 401 hickory

Carya

Carya

E 402 hickory Carya

E 403 hickory Carya var.subcordata populifolla spp. aquatica cordiformis glabra

E 404 Carya

E 405 hickory Carya illinoensis laciniosa

E 406 hickory Carya myristiciformis

E 407 hickory Carya

E 408 hickory Carya ovata texana

E 409 hickory Carya

E 410 hickory Carya tomentosa pallida

E 421 chestnut Castanea dentata

E 422 chinkapin Castanea pumila

E 423 chinkapin Castanea ozarkensis

W

E

431 chinkapin

450 chinkapin,golden spp. Catalpa spp.

E 451 catalpa Catalpa bignonioides

E 452 catalpa Catalpa speciosa

E W 460 spp.

E 461

E

W

462

463

Celtis

Celtis

Celtis hackberry Celtis spp. laevigata occidentalis reticulata

E 471 redbud curlleaf mahogany

E 481

Cercis canadensis

Cercocarpus ledifolius

Cladrastis kentukea

E

W

491

492 dogwood Cornus dogwood Cornus florida nuttallii

E 500 Crataegus spp.

E 501 hawthorn Crataegus crus-galli

212


February 2000

East West Woodland Code Common Name Genus species

E 502 hawthorn Crataegus mollis

E W 510 Eucalyptus spp.

E 521 persimmon Diospyros virginiana

E 531 beech Fagus

E W 540 spp. Fraxinus

E

W

541

542 ash ash grandifolia spp.

Fraxinus americana

Fraxinus latifolia

E 543 ash

E 544 ash

E 545 ash

E 546 ash

W 547 ash

E 548 Carolina ash

E

E

551

552

Fraxinus nigra

Fraxinus pennsylvanica

Fraxinus profunda

Fraxinus

Fraxinus quadrangulata velutina

Fraxinus caroliniana

Gleditsia aquatica

Gleditsia triacanthos

E 555

E 580

Gordonia lasianthus

E 571 coffeetree Gymnocladus dioicus

Halesia spp.

E 591 holly Ilex

E W 600 Juglans

E

E W

601

602 walnut opaca spp.

Juglans cinerea

Juglans nigra

W

W

E

603 California black walnut Juglans

604 black walnut

605

California walnut

Juglans californica

Juglans hindsii microcarpa

E

E

W

E

611

621

631

641

Liquidambar styraciflua

Liriodendron tuliperfia

Lithocarpus densiflorus

Maclura pomifera

E 650 spp.

E 651

Magnolia spp.

Magnolia acuminata

E 652 magnolia Magnolia grandiflora

E 653 Magnolia virginiana

E 654 magnolia Magnolia macrophylla

E 655 magnolia Magnolia fraseri

E W 660 spp.

E 661 Oregon crab apple

Malus

Malus spp. fusca

E 680 spp.

E 681 mulberry

E

E

682

691 mulberry tupelo

Morus

Morus

Morus

Nyssa spp. alba rubra aquatica

E 692 tupelo Nyssa

E

E

693

694 swamp tupelo

Nyssa

Nyssa

E

E

E

701

711

712 empressogechee sylvatica sylvatica var. biflora virginiana

Oxydendrum arboreum

Poulownia tomentosa

213


February 2000

East West Woodland Code Common Name tree

Genus species

E 721 Persea borbonia

E 722 planertree aquatica

E W 730 sycamore Platanus racemosa

E 731 Platanus occidentallis

E W 740 cottonwood and poplar spp.

E W 741 poplar

Populus spp.

Populus balsamifera

E 742 cottonwood Populus deltoides

E 743 aspen Populus grandidentata

E 744 cottonwood Populus heterophylla

W

E W

745 plains cottonwood

746 aspen

Populus

Populus deltoides ssp. monilifera tremuloides

W 747 cottonwood Populus trichocarpa

W 748 Rio Gr. cottonwd,

Fremont Poplar

Populus deltoides wislizeni

W 749 cottonwood angustifolia

E 752 poplar Populus alba

Prosopis spp. western mesquite

Prosopis glandulosa torreyana velvet Prosopsis velutina

E 802 oak

E W

E

760 cherry and plum spp. Prunus

761 cherry Prunus

E 762 cherry

E 763

E 765 plum

E

W

E W

W

W

766

768 w plum cherry

800 oak -- deciduous

801 coast live oak

803 Arizona white oak and gray oak

Prunus

Prunus

Prunus

Prunus

Prunus

Quercus

Quercus agrifolia

Quercus alba

Quercus

Quercus spp. pensylvanica serotina virginiana nigra americana emarginata spp. arizonica grisea

E 804 swamp white oak

W 805 canyon live oak

E 806 oak

E

W 815 Oregon white oak

816 bear oak, scrub oak

Quercus bicolor

Quercus chrysolepsis

Quercus coccinea

W 807 oak

E 808 oak

E 809 northern pin oak

Quercus

Quercus

Quercus douglasii durandii ellipsoidalis

Quercus emoryi

W 811 oak Quercus engelmannii

E

E

812 southern red oak

813 cherrybark oak

Quercus

Quercus falcata var.falcata falcata var.pagodifolia

Quercus gambelii

Quercus

Quercus garryana ilicifolia

214


February 2000


E 817 oak

W 818 California black oak

E 819 oak

E 820 oak

W 821 California white oak

Genus species

Quercus imbricaria

Quercus kelloggii

Quercus laevis

Quercus laurifolia

Quercus lobata

E 822 oak

E 823 oak

E 824 oak Quercus marilandica

E

E W

825 swamp chestnut oak Quercus

826 oak Quercus michauxii muehlenbergii

E

E

W

827

828 w oak oak

829 Mexican blue oak

E 830 oak

E 831 oak

Quercus lyrata

Quercus macrocarpa

Quercus nigra

Quercus nuttallii

Quercus oblongifolia

Quercus palustris

Quercus phellos

E

E

E

832

833 northern red oak

834 oak oak

Quercus prinus

Quercus rubra

Quercus shumardii

E

E

835 oak

836 Delta post oak

Quercus stellata

Quercus stellata var. mississippiensis

Quercus velutina E 837 oak

E

E

E

W

838 oak

839 interior live oak

840 dwarf post oak

Quercus virginiana

Quercus

Quercus

Quercus wislizeni stellata var. margaretta minima E

E

841 dwarf live oak

842 oak Quercus incana

Quercus hypoleucoldes

W 844 oak Quercus oglethorpensis

W

W w

845 Dwarf chinakapin oak

850 oak -- evergreen

E W 901 locust

W w 902 New Mexico locust

Quercus

Quercus

Robinia

Robinia prinoides spp. pseudoacacia neomexicana

E 911 spp.

E 920

Sabal spp.

E 919 soapberry Sapindus drummondii

Salix spp.

E 921 willow Salix

E 922 willow Salix

E

E

927

931 willow amygdaloides nigra

Salix alba

Sassafras albidum

E 935 mountain-ash Sorbus

E 936 mountain-ash Sorbus

E 950 spp. Tilia

E 951 basswood Tilia

E 952 basswood Tilia

E 953 Carolina basswood Tilia americana aucuparia spp. americana heterophylla americana var. caroliniana

215


February 2000


E

E

E

E

E

970

971

972

973

974 spp. elm elm elm elm

Genus

Ulmus

Ulmus

Ulmus

Ulmus

Ulmus species spp. alata americana crassifolia pumila

E 975 elm

E 977 elm

Ulmus

E 976 elm Ulmus

Ulmus rubra serotina

W 981 Umbellularia californica

E 989 Rhizophora mangle tesota, ironwood

W 991

E

E

992

993

Olneya tesota

Tamarisk thomasii spp.

Melaleuca quinquenervia

Melia azedarach

E

E

994

995 tallowtree Sapium sebiferum

Aleurites fordii

E 996 Cotinus obovatus

W

E

997 Elaeagnus angustifolia

999 Other, or unknown tree UNKNOWN UNKNOWN

216


February 2000

Appendix 5. Site Tree Selection Criteria and Species List

A. Eastern U.S. Site-Tree Selection Criteria

Ideally, site trees in the eastern U.S. should be between 20-70 years old. If preferred trees cannot be found in this age range, expand the age range to 15-120 years. Reject trees outside the 15-120 year age range, trees that exhibit signs of damage, trees with ring patterns that show signs of suppression, trees less than 5.0 inches DBH, trees with abnormalities at DBH, and trees with rotten cores. A list of preferred site-tree species are provided below. Site trees should be selected in the following order of preference:

1st Choice: representative of the stand, on the list below for your region.

2nd Choice: representative of the stand, on the list below for an adjoining

eastern region.

3rd Choice: not representative of the stand, on the list below for your region.

4th Choice: not representative of the stand, on the list below for an adjoining

eastern region.

Last Choice: any suitable non-woodland tree on the general tree list.

Note: NE = Northeast, NC = North Central, SO = Southern

Code Common Region

012

-------------------- Softwood Species -------------------- balsam fir NE, NC

068

070 larch

071 eastern redcedar

(introduced) NE tamarack (native)

NE, NC

NE, NC

091 Norway NE

094

095 white spruce black spruce

NE, NC

NE, NC

NE

105

110

111 jack pine

107 sand shortleaf pine slash pine

121 longleaf

125

128 red pine pond pine

129

130

131

132 eastern white pine

Scotch pine loblolly pine

Virginia pine

NE, NC

SO

NE, SO

SO

SO

NE, NC

NE, SO

NE, NC, SO

NE, NC

NE, SO

NE, SO

241 northern white cedar

261 eastern

NE, NC hemlock NE

316

317

318

371

-------------------- Hardwood Species --------------------

Red maple silver maple

NE, NC

NE, NC sugar maple yellow birch

NE, NC

NE, NC

217


February 2000

Code Common Region

375

402

407 paper birch bitternut hickory shagbark hickory

NE, NC

NE, NC

NE, NC

462 hackberry

531 American

541 white ash

NE beech NE

NE, NC

543

544 black ash green ash

602 black walnut

611 sweetgum

NE, NC

NE, NC

NE, NC

SO

830

832

833

835

837

901

951

972

621 yellow-poplar

742

743 eastern cottonwood bigtooth aspen

746

762

802

806

812

813

817

827 quaking aspen black cherry white oak scarlet oak southern red oak cherrybark oak shingle oak water oak pin oak chestnut oak northern red oak post oak black oak black locust

American basswood

American elm

NE, NC,SO

NE, NC

NE, NC

NE, NC

NE, NC,SO

NE, SO

NE, SO

NE, SO

NE, SO

NE, SO

NE, SO

NE, SO

NE, NC, SO

NE, SO

NE, NC, SO

NE

NE, NC

NE, NC

218


February 2000

B. Western U.S. Site-Tree Selection Criteria

Ideally, site trees in the western U.S. should be between 35-80 years old. If preferred trees cannot be found in this age range, expand the age range to 15-250 years. Reject trees outside the 15-250 year age range, trees that exhibit signs of damage, trees with ring patterns that show signs of suppression, trees less than 5.0 inches DBH, trees with abnormalities at DBH, trees with rotten cores, and woodland species. A list of preferred site-tree species are provided below. Site trees should be selected in the following order of preference:

1st Choice: representative of the stand, on the list below for your region.

2nd Choice: representative of the stand, on the list below for an adjoining

western region.

3rd Choice: not representative of the stand, on the list below for your region.

4th Choice: not representative of the stand, on the list below for an adjoining

western region.

Last Choice: any suitable non-woodland tree on the general tree list.

Note: PNW = Pacific Northwest FIA, RMRS = Rocky Mountain FIA

108

109

112

116

117

119

120

011

015

017

018

019

020

021

022

073

096 Blue

098 spruce

Sitka spruce

104 Foxtail

Region

-------------------- Softwood Species --------------------

Pacific silver fir

White fir

Grand fir

Corkbark fir

Subalpine fir

California red fir

Shasta red fir

Noble fir

Western larch

081 Incense-cedar

093

094

Engelmann spruce

White spruce

PNW

RMRS, PNW

RMRS, PNW

RMRS

RMRS, PNW

RMRS, PNW

PNW

PNW

RMRS, PNW

RMRS, PNW

RMRS, PNW

PNW

RMRS

PNW

RMRS

122

135

201

263

264

Lodgepole pine

Coulter pine

Apache pine

Jeffrey pine

Sugar pine

Western white pine

Bishop pine

Ponderosa pine

Arizona pine

Bigcone Douglas-fir

202 Douglas-fir

211

231 Pacific

242

Redwood yew

Western redcedar

Western hemlock

Mountain hemlock

RMRS, PNW

PNW

RMRS

RMRS, PNW

RMRS, PNW

RMRS, PNW

PNW

RMRS, PNW

RMRS

PNW

PNW

PNW

PNW

RMRS, PNW

RMRS, PNW

RMRS, PNW

219


February 2000

312

351

375

741

745

746

747

749

Name Region

-------------------- Hardwood Species --------------------

Bigleaf maple PNW

Red alder

Paper birch

Balsam poplar

Plains cottonwood

Quaking aspen

Black cottonwood poplar

Narrowleaf cottonwood

PNW

RMRS, PNW

RMRS, PNW

RMRS

RMRS, PNW

RMRS, PNW

RMRS

RMRS

220


February 2000

Appendix 6. Determination of Stocking Values for Land Use Classification

Stocking values are required to determine if a CONDITION STATUS = 1 (accessible forest land) exists on a plot. This will determine which data items must be recorded for the condition. When the CONDITION STATUS is in question (usually a nonforest area that is in the process of reverting to forest land or a marginal site that can only support a low number of trees) the crew must determine if there is sufficient stocking to classify the condition as forest. A minimum stocking value of 10% is required for accessible forest land (unless the condition was previously forested, such as a recent clear cut).

The following tables show the number of trees per acre needed to achieve this minimum stocking value. In the determination of stocking for this purpose the field crew should consider the condition over its entire area, not just the trees and seedlings that would be tallied on the subplots and microplots, especially when the condition straddles the plot. Also, for stocking purposes only consider a clump of trees (e.g., stump sprouts) less than 5 in DBH to be a single tree.

The number of trees per acre need to obtain minimum stocking depends on the DBH of largest tree in the condition (not necessarily a tally tree) and the forest type of the condition, and the size of the trees. If the condition occurs on all 4 subplots and the trees are distributed fairly evenly over the entire condition area, the following steps can be used to determine if the condition has the minimum number of trees per acre for forest land:

Observe the diameter of the largest tree on the condition and classify the condition into one of the following groups, 5+, 4.0-4.9, 3.0-3.9, 2.0-2.9, 1.0-1.9 and < 1.0 in DBH classes. If a 5 in or larger tree is present, Table A6b will be used, otherwise use Table

A6a.

Determine the appropriate forest type of the condition based on the tree species present in the condition and/or the forest type of similar conditions in the area. Forest type may be hard to determine, however if it is determined that the condition is forest, then a forest type must be assigned to the condition.

Estimate the number of trees per acre by the diameter classes shown from the appropriate table. When a condition exists on all 4 of the 24-ft radius subplots each tally tree (DBH > 5.0 in) represents 6 trees per acre and each sapling (DBH > 1.0 in to < 5.0 in) or seedling observed on the 4 microplots represents 75 trees per acre.

In sparse stands of smaller trees, a more accurate observation of trees per acre can be determined by observing trees < 5.0 in DBH on the 24-ft radius subplot. In many forest types no more than 180 trees per acre of the largest diameter class are needed to meet the minimum stocking requirements, a total of 30 trees on all 4 subplots, 7 or 8 smaller trees on each subplot will provide minimum stocking.

When trees of more than one diameter class are present, their contribution towards meeting the minimum must be combined. For example:

221


February 2000

In a lodgepole pine forest type, largest tree in the condition is 5.0+ in DBH. If 15 or more

5.0-6.9 in trees are found on the four subplots the minimum of 90 trees per acre (Table

A6b, 5 th

row, 6 th

column) would be met. In the same condition only 3 tally trees in the

13.0-14.9 in DBH class equal the18 trees per acre in that diameter class. If the tally were three 5.0-6.9 in trees (18/90 = 1/5 the minimum) and two 13.0-14.9 in DBH class trees

(12/18=2/3 the minimum) the combined stocking does not meet the minimum (1/5 +2/3 <

1) and the condition would be classified nonforest.

Other things observed on the plot will influence in the determination of condition status. In the last lodgepole pine example, evidence of a recent disturbance that reduced the stocking (cutting, fire, etc.) should be considered. Also, a very uneven distribution of the trees across the condition may have can greatly change the observed number of trees per acre on plots installed across the condition.

If the condition does not cover all four subplots entirely, trees per acre must be expanded by an expansion factor. The expansion factor is equal to 400/sum of the percent of subplot area

(%ARE) for the condition. The trees per acre value of every diameter class is multiplied by this expansion factor.

If the trees are not uniformly distributed throughout the condition or the condition occurs on only a small portion of the plot, (half the plot or less), use your best judgment in assigning status. You may place several additional temporary subplots in the condition in order to get a larger sample to base stocking on. When additional temporary subplots or judgment is used to assign land use, a note should be made on the plot sheet. Use the following procedure to establish these temporary subplots in a condition:

A. Consider locations 120.0 ft horizontal distance from the highest numbered subplot in the condition. First consider the location 0 o

azimuth from the subplot center. If this location is unsuitable, consider in order locations at azimuth 120 o

, and 240 o

. When a suitable location has been found, establish the temporary subplot. Temporary subplots should be entirely within the condition (locations should not be within 24.0 ft of a mapped boundary).

B. If Step A fails to yield a suitable subplot location, repeat Step A at each of the next highest numbered regular subplot in the condition.

C. If Steps A and B have been exhausted and a suitable temporary subplot still has not been found, repeat Step A at each temporary subplot in turn beginning with the first temporary subplot that was established.

If more than one temporary subplot is to be established, repeat Steps A and B to establish the second lowest numbered temporary subplot next, and continue in order until you have enough temporary subplots established in the condition to get a good, representative estimate of stocking. The general rule for establishing temporary subplots is:

• Install the lowest temporary subplot off the highest established subplot, until all the established subplots have been exhausted.

• Then establish the lowest temporary subplot yet to be established off the lowest one already established (lowest off highest, then lowest off lowest).

222


February 2000

If there is a transition zone between two conditions use your best judgment to be sure that trees tallied in the transition zone do not have too much weight in the assignment of a land use.

Table A6a. Number of trees per acre needed for minimum stocking (stocking value 10%) of forest land in conditions with no trees > 5 in DBH.

DBH of largest tree in the condition

Forest type

4.0-

4.9

3.0-

3.9

2.0-

2.9

1.0-

1.9

<1.0

3.0-

3.9

DBH of tally tree

2.0-

2.9

1.0-

1.9

<1.0

2.0-

2.9

1.0-

1.9

<1.0

1.0-

1.9

<1.0

<1.0

Spruce-fir 120 150 200 300 620 120 160 240 490 120 180 370 120 250 120

150 190 260 410 990 160 220 340 800 170 270 600 180 400 200

120 150 190 260 430 110 140 200 340 100 140 260 90 170 90

90 110 150 240 530 90 130 190 420 100 150 320 100 210 110

170 220 290 460 1090 180 250 380 870 190 300 660 200 440 220

120 150 210 330 840 130 170 280 670 140 220 500 150 340 170

110 140 200 320 870 120 170 270 700 140 220 520 150 350 170

200 260 360 560 1350 220 300 460 1080 230 360 810 250 540 270

80 100 130 200 400 80 110 160 320 80 120 240 80 160 80

140 180 240 380 910 150 200 310 730 160 240 550 170 360 180

120 160 210 330 770 130 180 280 620 140 210 460 150 310 150

80 100 140 220 510 90 120 180 410 90 140 310 100 210 100

110 140 180 280 580 110 150 220 470 110 170 350 110 230 120

100 130 180 280 670 110 150 230 530 120 180 400 120 270 130

120 150 200 310 670 120 170 250 540 130 190 400 130 270 130

140 180 250 400 990 150 210 330 790 170 260 600 180 400 200

120 150 210 360 1110 130 190 310 890 150 250 660 180 440 220

Redwood

Maple-beech-birch

Oak-hickory

180 220 300 480 1100 190 250 390 880 200 300 660 210 440 220

220 280 380 600 1400 240 320 500 1120 250 380 840 260 560 280

90 110 140 220 470 90 120 180 380 90 140 280 90 190 90

70 90 110 170 340 70 90 140 270 70 100 200 70 130 70

80 100 140 230 590 90 120 190 480 100 150 360 110 240 120

80 110 150 240 640 90 130 200 510 100 160 380 110 250 130

70 90 120 190 430 80 100 160 350 80 120 260 80 170 90

60 80 110 160 340 70 90 130 270 70 100 210 70 140 70

Aspen

130 160 220 360 950 140 190 310 760 150 240 570 170 380 190

70 90 120 190 380 70 100 150 300 80 110 230 80 150 80

Cherry-ash-y. 80 100 130 180 310 80 100 140 250 70 100 190 70 120 60

Basswood 100 120 170 290 840 110 150 250 670 120 200 500 140 330 170

Elm-ash-cottonwood 80 100 140 230 600 90 120 190 480 100 150 360 110 240 120

223


February 2000

Table A6b. Number of trees per acre needed for minimum stocking (stocking value 10%) of forest land in conditions with at least one tree 5 in DBH or larger.

Forest type

Spruce-fir

<1.0 1.0-

1.9

2.0-

2.9

3.0-

3.9

4.0-

4.9

5.0-

6.9

7.0-

8.9

DBH of tally tree

9.0-

10.9

11.0

12.9

13.0

14.9

15.0

16.9

17.0

18.9

19.0

20.9

21.0

22.9

23.0

24.9

25.0

26.9

27.0

28.929.0+

740 350 230 170 140 60 40 27 20 16 13 10 9 8 7 6 5 5

Western larch 1190 490 310 230 180 80 50 30 21 16 12 10 8 7 6 5 4 4

Black spruce

Jack pine

Lodgepole p.

510 310 220 170 140

630 280 180 130 110

1310 550 350 250 200

70 50

50 30

90 50

35 29

19 14

34 24

24 21

11 9

18 14

18 16 15 13

7 6 5 4

12 10 8 7

12 11

4

6

3

5

10

3

5

Shortleaf pine 1010 390 240 180 140 60 30 22 15 11 9 7 6 5 4 3 3 3

Slash pine 1040 380 230 170 130 60 30 20 13 10 7 6 5 4 3 3 2 2

W. white pine

Long leaf pine

1620 660 420 300 240 110 60

480 240 160 120 90 40 30

40 28

19 14

21 17

11 9

13 11

7 6

9

5

8

5

7

4

6

4

5

3

Ponderosa p.

Red pine

Pond pine

E. white pine

Loblolly pine

Douglas fir

N. white ced.

E. hemlock

W. hemlock

Redwood

1090 450 280 210 160

930 400 250 180 150

620 260 170 120 100

1190 470 290 210 170

1330 420 250 180 140

70 40

70 40

40 30

80 40

60 30

1320 560 360 260 210 100 50

1680 710 450 330 260 120 70

27 19

25 18

17 12

27 19

19 12

36 26

45 32

14 11

14 11

9

9

7

14 11

6

19 15

24 19

9 7 6 5

9 7 6 5

6 5 4 3

8 7 6 5

5 4 3 3

12 10 9 7

15 13 11 9

5

5

3

4

2

7

8

4

4

3

4

2

6

7

4

4

2

700 330 220 160 130 60 40 24 18 14 11 9 8 7 6 5 5 4

800 330 210 150 120 60 30 20 14 11 8 7 6 5 4 3 3 3

800 370 240 180 140 70 40 27 19 15 12 10 8 7 6 5 5 4

3

2

5

6

Red maple

Red alder

560 260 170 130 100

400 200 130 100 80

50 30

40 20

19 14

16 12

11

10

9

8

7 6 5 4

7 6 5 4

4

4

4

3

3

3

Map.-beech-bir. 710 270 170 120 90 40 20 15 10 7 6 4 4 3 3 2 2 2

Paper birch

Oak-hickory

Black walnut

760 280 170 130 100

520 230 150 110

410 190 130 90

80

80

50 20

40 20

30 20

15 10

15 11

14 11

7

8

8

6

7

7

4 4 3 3

5 4 4 3

6 5 4 4

2

3

3

2

2

3

2

2

2

Sweet gum

Aspen

1150 430 260 190 150 70 40 23 16 12 9 7 6 5 4 3 3 3

460 220 150 110 90 40 20 17 13 10 8 7 6 5 4 4 3 3

Cher.-ash-y. p. 370 220 150 120 100 40 30 23 18 15 13 11 10 9 8 7 7 6

Basswood 1000 340 200 150 110 50 30 16 11 8 6 4 4 3 2 2 2 2

Elm-ash-ctwd. 720 270 170 120 90 40 20 15 10 7 6 4 4 3 3 2 2 2

224


February 2000

Figure 6.

Here the dark shaded area is trees, surrounded by a treeless area or an area with only scattered trees. It could be a forest island surrounded by marsh/bog, a wooded draw in a grazed area, or a farm woodlot that is invading an abandoned field.

Between the forest and the nonforest is a transition zone that is about 40 to 80 ft wide. Because there is a transition zone, not an abrupt forest/nonforest edge, no mapping is done. Subplots 1 and 3 are recorded as

100% in condition 1 and subplots 2 and 4 are put in condition 2. To determine the stocking in condition 2 you could exclude subplot 2 because it is in a transition zone. If needed, several temporary subplots could be installed off subplot 4 to have an adequate sample for determining the stocking of condition 2.

Similarly, to get a stocking for condition 1, subplot 1 would be excluded and, if needed, several temporary subplots could be installed off subplot 3.

225

226


February 2000


February 2000

Appendix 7. Glossary

Accessible Forest Land – Land that is within sampled area (the population of interest), is accessible and can safely be visited, and meets at least one of the two following criteria:

(a) the condition is at least 10-percent stocked by trees of any size (appendix 3) or has been at least 10-percent stocked in the past. Additionally, the condition is not subject to nonforest use(s) that prevent normal tree regeneration and succession such as regular mowing, grazing, or recreation activities, or b) in several western woodland types where stocking cannot be determined, and the condition has at least 5 percent crown cover by trees of any size, or has had at least 5 percent cover in the past. Additionally, the condition is not subject to nonforest use that prevent normal regeneration and succession such as regular mowing, grazing, or recreation activities.

ACTUAL LENGTH – For trees with broken or missing tops. The actual length of the tree is recorded to the nearest 1.0 ft from ground level to the highest remaining portion of the tree still present and attached to the bole. If the top is intact, this item may be omitted. Forked trees should be treated the same as unforked trees.

Agricultural Land – Land managed for crops, pasture, or other agricultural use. Evidence includes geometric field and road patterns, fencing, and the traces produced by livestock or mechanized equipment. The area must be at least 1.0 ac in size and 120.0 ft. wide at the point of occurrence.

Annular Plot – A circular, fixed area plot with a radius of 59.0 feet. Annular plots may be used for sample intensification or for sampling relatively rare events.

ARTIFICIAL REGENERATION SPECIES – Indicates the predominant species that is planted or seeded in an artificially regenerated condition.

Bole – The main stem of a tree, extending from one foot above the ground to the point on the tree where DOB reaches 4 inches

Boundary – The intersection of two or more conditions on a subplot or microplot. Each boundary is described by recording the azimuth and horizontal distance from the subplot or microplot center to the left and right points of where the boundary intersects the perimeter of the subplot or microplot. An azimuth and distance to a corner point may also be described, if one exists. If multiple boundaries exist at a subplot, they are recorded in the order of their occurrence on the subplot, starting from north and proceeding around the compass.

Census Water – Rivers and streams that are more than 200 feet wide and bodies of water that are greater than 4.5 acres in size.

CONDITION CLASS – The combination of discrete landscape and forest attributes that identify and define different strata on the plot. Examples of such attributes include condition status, forest type, stand origin, stand size, owner group, reserve status and stand density.

Cropland – Land under cultivation within the past 24 months, including orchards and land in soil improving crops, but excluding land cultivated in developing improved pasture.

CROWN CLASS – A classification of trees based on dominance in relation to adjacent trees within the stand as indicated by crown development and the amount of sunlight received from above and sides.

227


February 2000

CUBIC-FOOT CULL – An assessment of the rotten, missing, or otherwise defective portions of a tree bole that are unsuitable for industrial wood products. Cubic-foot cull is expressed as a percentage of the entire bole.

Cull – Portions of a tree that are unusable for industrial wood products because of rot, form, or other defect. (See cubic-foot cull.)

Diameter at Breast Height (DBH) – The diameter of the bole of a tree at breast height (4.5 feet above the ground), measured outside of the bark.

Diameter at Root Collar (DRC) – The diameter of a tree measured at the ground line or stem root collar, measured outside of the bark.

Diameter Outside Bark (DOB) – A diameter that may be taken at various points on a tree, or log, outside of the bark. Diameter Outside Bark is often estimated.

Face -- A section of the tree surface (usually within the butt sixteen feet) that is ¼ of the circumference of the tree and extending the full length of the log.

Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) – A unique code identifying U.S. States and counties (or units in Alaska).

Forest Industry Land – Land owned by companies or individuals that operate wood-using plants.

Forest Land – Land that is at least 10 percent stocked by forest trees of any size, or land formerly having such tree cover, and is not currently developed for a nonforest use. The minimum area for classification as forest land is one acre. Roadside, stream-side, and shelterbelt strips of timber must have a crown width at least 120 feet wide to qualify as forest land. Unimproved roads and trails, streams and other bodies of water, or natural clearings in forested areas shall be classified as forest, if less than 120 feet in width or an acre in size.

Grazed woodlands, reverting fields, and pastures that are not actively maintained are included if the above qualifications are satisfied. (Also see definitions of nonforest land, idle farmland and improved/maintained pasture.)

Forest Trees – Plants having a well-developed, woody stem and usually more than 12 feet in height at maturity.

FOREST TYPE – A classification of forest land based upon the trees or tree communities that constitute the majority of stocking on the site.

GPS – Global Positioning System. Information from this system is collected and used to determine the latitude and longitude of each plot.

Hardwoods – Dicotyledonous trees, usually broad-leaved and deciduous.

Idle Farmland -- Former cropland or pasture that has not been tended within the last 2 years and that has less than 10 percent stocking with live trees.

Improved Pasture -- Land that is currently maintained and used for grazing. Evidence of maintenance, besides the degree of grazing, includes condition of fencing, presence of stock ponds, periodic brush removal, seeding, irrigation, or mowing.

228


February 2000

Inclusion – An area that would generally would be recognized as a separate condition, except that it is not large enough to qualify. For example, a ½ acre pond within a forested stand.

Industrial Wood – All roundwood products, except firewood.

Land Area – As defined by the Bureau of the Census: The area of dry land and land temporarily or partially covered by water such as marshes, swamps, and river flood plains (omitting tidal flats below mean tide); streams, sloughs, estuaries and canals less than 200 feet in width, and ponds less than 4.5 acres in area.

Limbs – That part of a tree above the stump which does not meet the requirements for sawlog and upper-stem portions, including all live, sound branches to a minimum of 4 inches DOB at the knot collar.

Maintained Road – Any road, hard topped or other surfaces, that is plowed or graded periodically and capable of use by a large vehicle. Rights-of-way that are cut or treated to limit herbaceous growth are included in this area.

Marsh – Low, wet areas characterized by heavy growth of weeds and grasses and an absence of trees.

Measurement Quality Objective (MQO) – Describes the acceptable tolerance for each data element. MQOs consist of two parts: a statement of the tolerance and a percentage of time when the collected data are required to be within tolerance.

Merchantable Sawtimber Top – The point on the bole of sawtimber trees above which a sawlog cannot be produced. Minimum merchantable top is 7.0 inches DOB for softwoods and 9.0 inches

DOB for hardwoods

Microplot – A circular, fixed-radius plot with a radius of 6.8 feet that is used to sample trees less than 5.0 inches at DBH, as well as other vegetation.

National Forest Land – Federal lands which have been legally designated as National Forests or purchase units, and other lands under the administration of the Forest Service, including experimental areas and Bankhead-Jones Title III lands.

Native American (Indian) Land – Tribal lands held in fee, or trust, by the Federal government but administered for Indian tribal groups and Indian trust allotments. This land is considered

“Private Lands”, Owner Group 40.

Net volume – Gross volume less deductions for rot, sweep, or other defect affecting use for timber products.

Non-census Water – Bodies of water from 1 to 4.5 acres in size and water courses from 30 feet to 200 feet in width.

Nonforest Land -- Land that does not support, or has never supported, forests, and lands formerly forested where use for timber management is precluded by development for other uses.

Includes areas used for crops, improved pasture, residential areas, city parks, improved roads of any width and adjoining rights-of-way, power line clearings of any width, and noncensus water. If intermingled in forest areas, unimproved roads and nonforest strips must be more than 120 feet wide, and clearings, etc., more than one acre in size, to qualify as nonforest land.

Nonstockable – Areas of forest land that are not capable of supporting trees because of the presence of rock, water, etc.

229


February 2000

Other Federal Lands – Federal land other than National Forests. These include lands administered by the USDI Bureau of Land Management, USDI National Park Service, USDI Fish and Wildlife Service, Department of Defense, Department of Energy, Army Corps of Engineers, and military bases.

Overgrown Knot – The scar left in the bark by a limb that has been completely overgrown, but still outlined by the circular configuration in the bark.

OWNER CLASS -- A variable that classifies land into fine categories of ownership.

OWNER GROUP – A variable that classifies land into broad categories of ownership; Forest

Service, Other Federal Agency, State and Local Government, and Private. Differing categories of

Owner Group on a plot require different conditions.

Phase 1 (P1) – FIA activities done as part of remote-sensing and/or aerial photography.

Phase 2 (P2) – FIA activities done on the network of ground plots formerly known as FIA plots.

Phase 3 (P3) – FIA activities done on a subset of Phase 2 plots formerly known as Forest Health

Monitoring plots. Additional ecological indicator information is collected from Phase 3 plots.

Plot – A cluster of four subplots that samples approximately 1/6 acre. The subplots are established so that subplot 1 is centered within the sample and the centers of subplots 2, 3,and 4 are located 120 feet from the center of subplot 1 at azimuths of 360, 120, and 240 degrees, respectively. Each subplot has an associated microplot and annular plot

PRIVATE OWNER INDUSTRIAL STATUS – Indicates whether Private land owners own and operate a wood processing plant.

REGENERATION STATUS – A stand descriptor that indicates whether a stand has been naturally or artificially regenerated.

Reserved Land – Land that is withdrawn from timber utilization by a public agency or by law.

RESERVE STATUS – An indication of whether the land in a condition has been reserved.

Rotten Cull Tree – A live tree with less than 1/3 of its gross board-foot volume in logs that meet size, soundness and grade requirements, and more than ½ of the board-foot cull is due to rot.

Or, a live poletimber size that prospectively will have less than 1/3 of its gross board-foot volume in logs that meet size, soundness and grade requirements, and more than ½ of the board-foot cull is due to rot.

Rough Cull Tree – A live tree with less than 1/3 of its gross board-foot volume in logs that meet size, soundness and grade requirements, and more than ½ of the board-foot cull is due to sound defects such as sweep, crook, etc. Or, a live poletimber size that prospectively will have less than 1/3 of its gross board-foot volume in logs that meet size, soundness and grade requirements, and more than ½ of the board-foot cull is due to sound defects such as sweep, crook, etc.

Roundwood Products – Logs, bolts or other round sections cut from trees for industrial or consumer uses. (Note: includes sawlogs veneer logs and bolts; cooperage logs and bolts; pulpwood, fuelwood; pilings; poles; posts; hewn ties; mine timbers; and various other round, split, or hewn products.)

230


February 2000

Saplings – Live trees 1.0 to 4.9 inches DBH.

Seedlings – Live trees less than 1.0 DBH that are at least one foot tall.

Site Class – A classification of forest land that indicates the potential capacity to grow crops of industrial wood based on fully stocked natural stands.

Softwoods – Coniferous trees, usually evergreen having needles or scale-like leaves.

STAND AGE – A stand descriptor that indicates the average age of the live trees not overtopped in the predominant stand size-class of a condition.

STAND DENSITY – A stand descriptor that indicates the relative tree density of a condition class.

The classification is based on the number of stems/unit area, basal area, tree cover, or stocking of all live trees in the condition which are not overtopped, compared to any previously defined condition class tree density.

STAND SIZE – A stand descriptor that indicates which size-class of trees that are not overtopped constitutes the majority of stocking in the stand.

State, County and Municipal Lands – Lands owned by states, counties, and local public agencies or municipalities, or lands leased to these government units for 50 years or more.

Stocking – The relative degree of occupancy land by trees, measured as basal area or the number of trees in a stand by size or age and spacing, compared to the basal area or number of trees required to fully utilize the growth potential of the land; that is, the stocking standard.

Sound Knot or Limb – Knots or limbs that are intergrown, or encased, with the surrounding wood, and that show no sign s of decay. Bark may not be present on the limbs.

Subplot – A circular, fixed-area plot with a radius of 24.0 feet. Each subplot represents ¼ of the fixed plot sample unit.

TOTAL LENGTH – The total length of the tree, recorded to the nearest 1.0 ft from ground level to the tip of the apical meristem. For trees growing on a slope, measure on the uphill side of the tree. If the tree has a broken or missing top, the total length is estimated to what the length would be if there were no missing or broken top. Forked trees should be treated the same as unforked trees

Transition Zone – An area where a distinct boundary between two or more different conditions cannot be determined.

Upper Stem Portion – The part of the bole of sawtimber trees above the sawlog top to a minimum top diameter of 4.0 inches DOB, or to the point where the central stem breaks into limbs.

231

232


February 2000

Appendix 8. Figures – Easy Reference Pages

Section 1:

.


February 2000

Figure 1. FIA plot diagram

233


February 2000

Section 2:

Nonforest land greater than 120 ft wide

NF

NF

PC

Strip of Forest less than 120 ft wide

PC

Strip of

Nonforest less than 120 ft wide

PC

Forest land greater than 120 ft wide

PC

F

F

Figure 2. Example of alternating strips of forested and nonforested conditions.

Figure 3. Illustration of the 90 degree corner rule.

The dotted lines do not create nonforest conditions.

234


February 2000

Figure 4. Example of classifying the condition class of the subplot in a transition zone with forest/nonforest encroachment.

235


February 2000

Figure 5. Forest condition narrows within a nonforest condition. Examine the location of the subplot center in reference to the approximate line where the forest narrows to 120 ft wide. In this example, the entire subplot is classified as forest.

Figure 6. Nonforest condition narrows within a forest condition. Examine the location of the subplot center in reference to the approximate line where the nonforest narrows to 120 ft wide. In this example, the entire subplot is classified as forest.

236


February 2000

Section 3:

Figure 7. How to measure a straight boundary on a microplot, subplot, or annular plot.

Figure 8. How to measure a boundary with a corner on a subplot or annular plot.

237


February 2000

Section 5:

Pine Plantation

Condition Class 2

C

Upland

Hardwoods diti Cl 1

Figure 9. Ragged condition class boundary and tree condition class designation.

238


February 2000

1.5’

3.0’ or more

Diameter point

Figure 10. (1) Tree with swelled butt

Diameter point

4.5’

4.5’

Figure 11. (2) Forked tree

Diameter point

3.5’

Pith intersection

4.5’

Figure 12. (2) Two trees

4.5’

Diameter point

4.5’

Figure 13. (3) Tree with swelling

4.5’

Figure 15. (4.) Tree on a slope

Figure 17. (8) Tree with broken stem

Figure 14. (3) Tree with branch

DBH

4.5’

Figure 16. (5) Leaning tree

Root

Collar 4.5’

Figure 18. (9) Tree on the ground

239


February 2000

Figure 19. Where to measure DRC in a variety of situations.

240


February 2000

2 5 3 2 4 33 3

2 5 2

Figure 20. Examples of CROWN CLASS definitions

1

Figure 21. UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN RATIO examples.

241


February 2000

Figure 21-P3. UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN RATIO examples.

Figure 22. Sapling UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN RATIO determination examples.

242




February 2000

Figure 24. The damage runs from stump to crownstem. Code here should be

02 (roots and "stump" and lower bole) which represents the lowest locations of this multi-location damage.

243


February 2000

Figure 25. A canker which exceeds threshold. Since 40% of circumference is visible from any side, and since over half the visible side is taken up by the canker, it obviously exceeds the 20% minimum circumference threshold.

Figure 26. Multiple damage in "stump" and lower bole. A=approximately 40% of tree circumference;

B=portion of tree circumference affected by damage;

C=vertical distance within one meter; D=midpoint of occurence at which circumference is measured.

244


February 2000


245


February 2000


246


February 2000


247


February 2000


248


February 2000


249


February 2000


250


February 2000


251


February 2000

Figure 34. Example of the Hawksworth six-class rating system.

252

WEST COAST FOREST HEALTH MONITORING FIELD GUIDE FY2000

WEST COAST

FOREST HEALTH MONITORING

FIELD GUIDE

FY2000

0 – 8 NATIONAL CORE FIELD GUIDE Version 1.4

9 FOREST HEALTH MONITORING OZONE INDICATOR

10 FOREST HEALTH MONITORING LICHEN INDICATOR

11 FOREST HEALTH MONITORING SOIL INDICATOR

12 FOREST HEALTH MONITORING CROWN INDICATOR

APPENDICES

0 – 8 FOREST INVENTORY AND ANALYSIS NATIONAL CORE FIELD GUIDE

degrees feet

9 FOREST HEALTH MONITORING OZONE INDICATOR

OZONE BIOINDICATOR PLANTS - 2000

Map of the Bioindicator Site Location

Amount = Percent of leaves injured relative to the total leaf number.

Severity = Average severity of symptoms on the injured leaves.

10 FOREST HEALTH MONITORING LICHEN INDICATOR

11 FOREST HEALTH MONITORING SOIL INDICATOR

Top View

Side View

Depth Measurements

Plot # ____

Date Sampled

Soil Visit # ____ mon.-____/day-____/2000

LayerType

Litter

Organic Mineral 1 Mineral 2 subplot subplot subplot

W

N

S

soil surface or

5 cm into the mineral soil

Subplot 2

Soil Sampling Line

90

Distance between plot center and soil sampling line

Subplot 4

Soil Sampling Line

is 90' (27.4 m)

30

Subplot 3

Soil Sampling Line

150

12 FOREST HEALTH MONITORING CROWN INDICATOR

APPENDICES

Add this document to collection(s)

Add this document to saved

Suggest us how to improve StudyLib

Soil Visit # mon.-/day-/2000